CATIA Infrastructure Preface What's New?

Getting Started Basic Tasks Advanced Tasks Workbench Description Customizing Installation Requirements Glossary Index

Dassault Systmes 1994-99. All rights reserved.

Preface
Welcome to CATIA Version 5! CATIA Version 5 is the first release of the next generation of CATIA Solutions, and addresses advanced mechanical process centric design requirements.In addition to leading edge feature-based design functions, it includes highly productive capabilities for the design of mechanical assemblies and for drawing generation. Available on both UNIX and Windows environments, CATIA Version 5 is built to be totally compliant with Windows NT presentation standards. In order to integrate to an extended enterprise where CATIA Version 4 designs need to be exchanged and processed, it includes unique two-way interoperability with CATIA Version 4 data. Likewise, CATIA Version 5 benefits from the breadth of the CATIA Solutions Version 4 portfolio by offering interoperable applications. As an open solution, it includes interfaces with the most commonly used data exchange industry standards.

Using This Guide

This book is the CATIA Version 5 Infrastructure Users Guide. It contains information about the user interface and basic tools common to all CATIA Version 5 applications: starting a session getting help activating application workbenches creating, opening and saving documents laying out documents selecting and manipulating objects printing, viewing and navigating rendering and lighting effects using macros using CATIA Version 5 data in OLE-compliant applications customizing toolbars and settings using the Knowledgeware Advisor and provides information for CATIA administrators on topics such as hardware and software prerequisites, network licensing, code distribution and environment management.

What's New?
Getting Started New: IBM License Use Management is no longer installed automatically: it is now integrated in the CATIA software. Enhanced: on Windows, you are no longer blocked when deinstalling after having deleted the installation folder New: when installing on UNIX, the /CATENV directory can be created elsewhere than in the root directory New: on UNIX, the /CATCDE and /CATSGI directories are now created in the /CATENV directory New: batch installation command on UNIX Enhanced: the presentation of the configuration and product list in the License Manager dialog box has been enhanced New: custom configuration licenses now include a serial number to support custom configuration growth Basic Tasks New: command option for starting CATIA in administrator mode for the purpose of locking settings on both Windows and UNIX Enhanced: when using the online documentation search engine, search results are now displayed in a separate window New: create new documents from existing documents New: separate overview window for viewing geometry New: two selection icons in the Select toolbar: polygonal trap paint stroke selection. Enhancements to the Search... command: more productive type searching color search syntax now displays the RGB components of the color and not the color name new "Product Property" search criterion which lets you search for product structure elements to which you may have assigned properties new option for sorting search results alphabetically you can enter search queries in the "Generated Queries" field using the search language New: you can capture and save screen grabs to CGM ATA/CALS/ISO formats

Enhanced Fly mode: the compass is no longer used support for banking when colliding with solid objects when flying, you now slide along the object surface instead of flying through the object New: use of ClearCoat technology (SGI only) for more realistic shading effects New: customize view parameters using a new customization mode Enhanced: support for contrast and specular intensity of light sources Enhanced: you can now drag near and far planes when using depth effects Enhanced standard views: new quick access toolbar for quickly applying standard views standard views are no longer rezoomed when applied. Enhanced: the FileDesk workbench now loads unloaded documents Advanced Tasks New batch commands for installation/administration tools: start (batch installation on UNIX) startspk (batch installation of service packs) Enhanced service pack management: a service pack can be automatically committed at installation batch installation command. New plotter/driver support: CALS and ATA formats for CGM HP 1000 Series plotter HP-GL and IBM-GL support for pen plotters. Enhanced: the search language has been enhanced: new syntax (support of the period) for more powerful type searching support for RGB values in color searching support for product property searching blanks are now tolerated. Enhanced Knowledgeware capabilities: Functions to Access a Design Table: Two new functions: CloserInfConfig, CloserSupConfig Tools->Options->Knowledge Copy/Pasting parameters - Parameters written in non-latin characters. New: create, navigate in and make queries in component catalogs Customizing - Settings Enhanced Performance settings: display hidden edges

Enhanced Visualization settings: lines and planes can now be displayed at their true depth in a 3D scene (now processed using the Z-buffer) highlighting of faces and edges New: user settings can now be locked by running CATIA in administrator mode Software Prerequisites New: support of LUM HAL (High Availability Licensing) feature New: support for Terminal Server clients used in conjunction with Windows NT Terminal Server New: custom configuration growth

Getting Started

Installing CATIA Version 5 on Windows for the First Time

This task explains how to install the CATIA Version 5 files for the first time on a single computer running a supported Windows operating system (Windows NT 4.0, Windows 95 OSR2 or Windows 98), and set up your nodelocked licenses. Note, however, that depending on the Windows platform, certain CATIA configurations and/or products may not be available. If you want information about subjects such as: installing CATIA Version 5 on several computers setting up network licensing refer to "Advanced User Tasks". Installation and de-installation rely on Windows-compliant tools enabling anyone familiar with Windows procedures and concepts to install the software without assistance. On Windows 95 OSR2 or Windows 98, you must use network licensing, and we recommend that you configure a LUM (License Use Management) server, then configure your computer as a LUM client before starting the installation procedure. For more information, refer to "Licensing Mechanism on Microsoft Windows 95 OSR2 and Windows 98". From start to finish, this task should take approximately 15 minutes. Before starting the installation, refer to "What You Need Before Installing CATIA Version 5" to check you have all the hardware and software prerequisites. Furthermore, to prevent the installation from hanging due to concurrently running programs such as screen savers or virus scanning programs, we recommend that you first shut down any such programs. You must also have your license enrollment certificate (in electronic format) provided by your vendor. If you have the certificate, you will be able to register your license during the installation procedure. 1. Log on as an administrator. You must belong to the Administrators group, or have the privileges assigned to the Administrators group. Otherwise, you will not be able to start the installation. On Microsoft Windows 95 OSR2 and Windows 98, log on as a normal user. All users have equal privileges on a local computer: administrator privileges do not exist. In the rest of this user's guide, if you are running either Microsoft Windows 95 OSR2 or Windows 98, log on as a normal user each time you are asked to log on as administrator. 2. Insert the CD-ROM into the drive. The Choose Setup Language dialog box appears, prompting you to choose the user interface language for the Setup program.

The languages you can choose from are: U.S. English (default) French German Japanese.

3. Click the OK button to start the installation using the English user interface, or select another language from the list box, then click the OK button. The Setup program displays a message telling you that it is preparing the installation procedure.

The progress indicator gives you an idea how much of the preparation process has been completed. Once setup is completed, an animated CATIA Version 5 installation splashscreen appears, filling up the whole screen. On Windows NT IBM License Use Management Runtime (LUM), needed to be able to manage nodelock licensing, is no longer installed automatically with the CATIA files: it is now integrated in the CATIA software. The installation sets up the following folder:
C:\ifor\Ls\Conf

On Microsoft Windows 95 OSR2 or Windows 98 On Microsoft Windows 95 OSR2 and Windows 98, only one licensing mechanism exists: network licensing. For more information, refer to "Licensing Mechanism on Microsoft Windows 95 OSR2 and Windows 98". The splashscreen remains displayed in the background throughout the entire installation procedure, and the different dialog boxes you will interact with will be displayed in the foreground. The Welcome dialog box is then displayed:

4. Click the Next button to move to the next step.

On Windows NT only (not on Windows 95 OSR2 or Windows 98), the CATIA V5R3 License dialog box appears, asking you if you want to enter a nodelock license key for the computer on which you are installing the software.

Note that the target id of the computer on which you are performing the installation is displayed after the dialog box title. 5. On Windows NT only, if you want to enter a nodelock license, click the Import Certificate button to access the Import Certificate dialog box. This dialog box lets you import the license certificate (that is, if you received your license certificate by electronic mail, and provided you detached it and stored it on your disk).

6. On Windows NT only, explore your environment containing the license certificate (ending with the suffix ".lic"), then click OK. This creates (or updates) a nodelock file on your computer, and stores your license in the nodelock file in:
C:\ifor\Ls\Conf\nodelock

If you already installed LUM elsewhere, the nodelock file will be updated in the correct LUM environment. If you decide to skip the licensing step, or if you have a license enrollment certificate in paper format only (and not in electronic format), you can enroll your licenses later, after the installation has been completed. For more information, refer to "Enrolling Nodelock Licenses After the Installation".

Licensing Mechanism on Microsoft Windows 95 OSR2 or Windows 98 On Microsoft Windows 95 OSR2 or Windows 98, only one licensing mechanism is offered: network licensing. Network licenses can only be served by a LUM (License Use Management) network license server configured on Windows NT or UNIX. Consequently, you must: configure a LUM network license server (on Windows NT or UNIX) and register your CATIA licenses configure the computer on which you are installing CATIA as a LUM client. The LUM software and documentation is available on the "IBM License Use Management (LUM)" CD-ROM shipped with the CATIA CD-ROM. Refer to the LUM documentation for full details. We recommend that you configure the LUM license server and client before starting the installation procedure. 7. Click the Next button to move to the next step. The Choose Destination Location dialog box appears. A default destination folder is already proposed: C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B03\intel_a (Intel platform)
C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B03\win_a (Windows 95 OSR2 or Windows 98 platforms)

8. If the default destination folder is suitable, click the Next button to move to the next step, or click the Browse... button and navigate to select another folder and click OK. The folder you choose must be empty. You can also specify a new folder: the folder will be created after confirmation. 9. Click the Next button to move to the next step. The Setup Type dialog box appears:

This dialog box lets you specify whether you want to install all of the software on the CD-ROM, or select the configurations and/or products to be installed: Complete: specifies you want to install all the software, and moves on to the next installation step (installation of online documentation files) when you click Next Custom: lets you choose the configurations and/or products to be installed. 10. If you want to choose which configurations and/or products to install, check the Custom option and click the Next button to move to the next step. The Select Software dialog box appears:

By default, the list of all the configurations on the CD-ROM is displayed. 11. Choose whether you want to install products configurations and/or products by using the list box provided. Depending on what you chose, the list will display the names of all the configurations and/or products on the CD-ROM. 12. Click on the configurations and/or products to select them. The selected configurations and/or products are listed in the "Selected Software" list. The dialog box specifies the space available for the installation. Clicking on each configuration or product also specifies the amount of space required for installing those configurations or products; the space required is updated progressively as you select from the list. 13. Click the Next button to move to the next step. The Select CATIA V5R3 Documentation dialog box appears:

14. Check the CATIA V5R3 Documentation check box only if you want to install the online documentation during the code installation procedure: this choice is optional. If you check this box, you will be prompted after the software has been copied to your computer: to remove the CATIA V5R3 code CD-ROM and insert the CATIA V5R3 documentation CD-ROM. 15. Clicking the Next button displays the Start Copying Files dialog box. The central area lists the current settings you set in the previous steps: CATIA V5R3 product names and documentation destination folder.

The result looks something like this (depending on which software you chose to install). In our example, we chose to install the MD2 - CATIA Mechanical Design 2 Configuration and the DP2 CATIA - Drawing Production 2 Configuration:

There is nothing to prevent you from installing all the configurations and products on the CD-ROM. However, you will be able to use only the software for which you have enrolled licenses, except if you are using a demo mode license as explained in "Running in Demo Mode". 16. Click the Next button to start copying the files to your computer. A progression indicator appears, and an animated sequence starts showing you some of the products that you will be able to create with the software. Once the files have been copied, you may be prompted at this point to restart your computer. This is because the latest level of certain Windows system libraries is also shipped and installed with the CATIA V5R3 software: these libraries will be installed if the existing libraries on your system are not up to date. After restarting, you must then relog onto the computer as the same administrator. Once the files have been copied, and only if you checked the CATIA V5R3 Documentation check box, the Setup CATIA V5R3 Documentation dialog box appears:

17. If you want to install the online documentation, remove the CATIA V5R3 product CD-ROM from the drive, insert the CATIA V5R3 online documentation CD-ROM for your language, and click OK to restart the Setup program, this time to install the online documentation files. The default folder in which the documentation will be installed is:
C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B03doc

Note that the dialog box also provides a path for specifying another drive or folder from which you can install the online documentation. The default path is the drive name (usually D:) on the computer from which you are performing the installation. Modifying this path is useful if: you already inserted the online documentation CD-ROM into another drive you copied the online documentation files from the online documentation CD-ROM to a folder. If this is the case, click the Browse... button and specify the appropriate drive or folder. If you have several online documentation CD-ROMs (one for each supported language), you can only install one of these CD-ROMs at this stage of the installation. If you do not want to install the online documentation immediately, you can always install it later. For more information, refer to "Installing the Online Documentation After Installing the Code". Once both the product and (optional) online documentation files have been copied, the Setup Complete dialog box informs you that the installation has been completed.

Microsoft Windows 95 OSR2 and Windows 98 You are using network licensing. You will only be able to start a CATIA session if you have previously: configured a LUM network license server (on Windows NT or UNIX) and registered your CATIA licenses configured the computer on which you are installing CATIA as a LUM client. 18. Click the Finish button to exit the installation program and run CATIA Version 5, If you do not want to run CATIA Version 5 now, uncheck the check box prompting you to run CATIA Version 5 now, then click the Finish button. If you chose to run CATIA Version 5 now, the CATIA Version 5 window will look like this, for example, if you installed the configurations CATIA - Mechanical Design (MD2) and CATIA - Drawing Production (DP2):

Because you imported a license certificate, the license is automatically reserved, allowing you to enter the session immediately without having to reserve the license using the License Manager. An installation log is created in the current temporary directory, located by default in: C:\TEMP\cxinst.log If you did not import a license certificate: If you chose to run CATIA Version 5 now, but did not import a license certificate, a message window appears informing you that you have not yet requested a configuration or product license: Click the OK button. The CATIA V5 application window now appears, along with the License Manager dialog box:

The License Manager dialog box lists the configurations and products you installed. In our example, we installed the CATIA - Mechanical Design 2 Configuration. Note that the field to the left of each product name specifies: "No License". This is because this is the first time you are starting CATIA Version 5, and you have not yet reserved any licenses. At this stage, if you click the OK button, a CATIA V5R3 session will still be started, but you will not be able to work with the product: menu commands will be grayed out, and you will only be able to use the File->Exit command. The TargetId of your computer is displayed at the top of the License Manager dialog box. You have to communicate the target id to your vendor when ordering licenses. At this stage, you will not be able to go any further until you register your licences. To register nodelock licenses after the installation, you must select the Start->Programs->CATIA->Tools->Nodelock Key Management V5R3, as explained in Enrolling Nodelock Licenses After the Installation, to import a license certificate. Once you have imported a nodelock license certificate, double-click the CATIA V5R3 default environment shortcut on the desktop to start a CATIA V5R3 session directly. You can now use the software you installed and for which you enrolled a license. Your licensing settings are stored in a settings file. During a CATIA session, you can reserve and release licenses using the Licensing tab accessible via the Tools->Options... command. For more information, refer to "Reserving Licenses Using the License Manager". About the Environment Created on Windows A CATIA Version 5 installation has the following impact on your computer:

Installation Folder The software is installed (if you used the default location) in the folder:
C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B03\intel_a

or:
C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B03\win_a

Desktop The installation: creates the CATIA V5R3 default environment shortcut on the desktop sets up the Start->Programs->CATIA->CATIA V5R3 default environment shortcut, and the Start->Programs->Catia->Tools menu containing the Environment Editor V5R3, Nodelock Key Management V5R3 (except on Microsoft Windows 95 OSR2 or Windows 98) and Software Management V5R3 commands. Registry The following registry keys are modified: HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\DASSAULT SYSTEMES HKEY_CURRENT_USER\SOFTWARE\ DASSAULT SYSTEMES HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Uninstall\Dassault Systemes B03 (for deinstallation) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\AppPaths\Cnext.exe (sets up the Start->Run... command so you can enter the cnext command to start a session) HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT (CATIA V5 document types) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows NT\CurrentVersion\FONTS (sets up fonts in True Type format, describing the full name and filename of the font). Registry entries, folders and files are not protected. You can protect access to these entries using Windows tools, for example the regedt32 command. Please note that this command is only recommended for advanced users because it is potentially dangerous. Other Folders An installation also affects the following: C:\Winnt\system32 on Windows NT, and C:\Windows\system32 on Windows 95 OSR2 and Windows 98 (certain Windows system libraries will be installed if the existing libraries on your system are not up to date) the folder C:\ifor\Ls\Conf is created (on Windows NT only), in which the file nodelock is stored if you imported a nodelock license certificate, C:\Temp\cxinst.log (installation log). Administrator Setting Environments When running a CATIA session at the end of the installation procedure (as administrator), administrator settings are created in: C:\Winnt\Profiles\administrator\CAT* (CATTemp, CATCache, CATSettings) on Windows NT C:\Windows\CAT* (CATTemp, CATCache, CATSettings) on Windows 95 OSR2 and Windows 98. All end users can now log onto the same computer and run a CATIA Version 5 session, because the environment created at installation is global.

Deinstalling CATIA Version 5 on Windows

This task explains how to remove the CATIA Version 5 files. Deinstallation relies on Windows-compliant tools enabling anyone familiar with Windows procedures and concepts to deinstall the software without assistance. Prior to removing the CATIA software, you must remove any user environments you may have created after the initial installation using the tools described in "Customizing Your Environment on Windows". 1. Log on as an administrator. You must belong to the Administrators group, or have the privileges assigned to the Administrators group. Otherwise, you will not be able to deinstall the software. 2. On the Windows desktop, select the Start->Settings->Control Panel, then double-click the Add/Remove Programs control. An Install/Uninstall dialog box appears, and looks something like this (depending on the software installed on your computer):

3. Select the item "Dassault Systems Software B03" from the list, then click the Add/Remove... button. A message informs you that the folder:
C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B03\intel_a

or: C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B03\win_a (Windows 95 OSR2 or Windows 98 platforms) is about to be removed, and prompts you to confirm that you want to continue and remove all the software. You can also use this command to remove the CATIA online documentation. The item name for the English documentation will be, for example: "Dassault Systemes CATIA - English Documentation B03". 4. Click Yes to confirm. ALL the installed configurations and products will be removed. The program removes: the installation folder all desktop items (environment icon, Start->Programs->Catia menu) all registry entries except for the components specified below. What Is Not Removed? Note that the following components are not removed: the fonts installed with the CATIA software any system libraries installed to update your system. The Start->Programs->CATIA menu will not be removed if it still contains environments created using the tools described in "Customizing Your Environment on Windows". If you delete the installation folder instead of deinstalling cleanly using the Add/Remove Programs control via the Start->Settings command, your registry will be corrupted. Before, when you attempted to reinstall, you were blocked. Now, a message will prompt you to click the OK button if you want to clean up the registry and continue the installation.

Installing CATIA Version 5 on a UNIX Workstation for the First Time

This task explains how to install the CATIA Version 5 files for the first time on a single workstation running UNIX, and set up your nodelocked licenses. The concepts, procedures and look and feel of the installation procedure for Windows have been carried over to the UNIX environment in order to provide a common CATIA Version 5 installation interface for all supported operating systems. From start to finish, this task should take approximately 15 minutes. Before starting the installation, refer to "What You Need Before Installing CATIA Version 5" to check you have all the hardware and software prerequisites. 1. Logon as root. 2. Insert the CD-ROM for your UNIX operating system into the drive 3. If you are running AIX or HP-UX, check whether the CD-ROM drive is declared. On AIX, run the command:
lsdev -C -c cdrom

If a line like this is not displayed:

cd0 Available 00-01-00-30-CD-ROM Drive

you need to add the CD-ROM drive by using the smit AIX command, for example. On HP-UX, run the command:
cat /etc/fstab

If a line like this is not displayed:

/dev/dsk/c201d1s0 /CDROM cdfs ro 0 0 0

you need to add the CD-ROM drive. If you are running IRIX or Solaris, inserting the CD-ROM declares and mounts the CD-ROM automatically by using the sam HP-UX command, for example. 4. On AIX and HP-UX, check whether the CD-ROM drive is mounted. If the CD-ROM drive is not mounted, you will have to mount it before proceeding. You can determine if the drive has already been mounted by typing the command:
mount

In the output lines, you should see a list of mounted file systems. The CD-ROM drive has already been mounted on your local system if a line similar to one of the following lines appears in the list: /dev/cd0 cdrom cdfrs "date" ro (AIX) cdrom on device readonly on "date" (HP-UX) where "date" is the current date.

5. On AIX and HP-UX, mount the CD-ROM drive, if necessary, by typing the commands:
mount -v cdrfs -r /dev/cd0 /cdrom (AIX) mount /cdrom (HP-UX)

6. Change directory to the CD-ROM mount point and enter the command:
./start

to start the installation procedure, or:

./start -s

if you want to start the installation procedure without the accompanying music. The CATIA Version 5 setup program will be run. The setup program checks you have the correct prerequisites. Then, the Welcome dialog box greets you. The setup program invokes a full self-explanatory graphical interface which walks you through the installation. The installation steps are approximately the same as on Windows, as described in "Installing CATIA Version 5 on Windows for the First Time". An installation log is created in: $HOME/CXINST.log What about the online documentation? Note, however, that on UNIX you cannot install the online documentation directly from within the installation procedure. If you want to install the documentation, copy the contents of the CD-ROM into a directory with sufficient free disk space. Then, use the setcatenv command to change the value of the CATDocView variable to point to the location where the CD-ROM contents were copied. Optionally, you may use the CD-ROM directly and set the value of the CATDocView variable to the CD-ROM mount point. For information about the setcatenv command, refer to "Customizing Your Environment on UNIX". About the Environment Created on UNIX A CATIA Version 5 installation has the following impact on your workstation: Installation Path The software is installed (if you used the default location) in the folder directory:
/usr/DassaultSystemes/B03/OS_a

where "OS-a" is: aix_a hpux_a irix_a solaris_a Environment The installation offers you the choice of where to create the /CATENV directory. The default is the root $HOME directory (typically "/"), but you can create the /CATENV directory anywhere you like.

The installation creates in this directory the following global environments required to set the CATIA Version 5 runtime environment variables: CATIA.V5R3.B03.sh (for use with Korn or Bourne shells) CATIA.V5R3.B03.csh (for use with C shell) Note: UNIX system administrators can also setup a /CATEnv environment directly in the home directory of end users. CDE Desktop on AIX, HP-UX and Solaris The /CATCDE directory required for CDE desktops is now created in the /CATENV directory. The installation creates the following filetree required for integrating CATIA into the CDE desktop: /CATENV/CATCDE/CATIA/.dt/appconfig/appmanager/C/CATIA/CATIA.V5R3.B03 (file required for graphic representation of environment in the CDE desktop) /CATENV/CATCDE/CATIA/.dt/appconfig/types/C/CATIA/CATIA.V5R3.B03.dt (action description file for environment icon) /CATENV/CATCDE/CATIA/.dt/appconfig/types/C/CATIA/CATIA.dt (action description file for CATIA directory) /CATENV/CATCDE/CATIA/.dt/appconfig/types/C/CATIA/CATIAFiles.dt (action description file for CATIA document types) /CATENV/CATCDE/CATIA/.dt/appconfig/icons/C/CATIA (contains icons for CATIA document types). The CATIA application is registered in the CDE application base via the "dtAppIntegrate" command which is executed automatically during the installation. The result of registering the application is that the /etc/dt/appconfig/ environment on your workstation is modified. This environment contains links to the CATIA desktop filetree located under /CATCDE (described above). The visible impact on the CDE desktop is: the creation of the CATIA directory in the Application Manager cabinet, accessible via the front panel the creation in this directory of the default global environment icon CATIA V5R3. To display the default global environment icon CATIA V5R3, once the installation is completed, you must click the Application Manager icon on the CDE front panel, go into the Desktop Tools cabinet, then double-click the Reload Applications icon. You can also log off and log on to display the icon. Magic SGI Desktop on IRIX The /CATSGI directory required for CDE desktops is now created in the /CATENV directory.

The installation creates the following directory required for integrating CATIA into the Magic SGI desktop: /CATENV/CATSGI/CATIA/CATIA.V5R3.B03 (file required for graphic representation of the environment in the Magic SGI desktop) and installs the following files in the following system directories: /usr/lib/filetype/install/DassaultSystemes/CATIA.Files.ftr (action description file for CATIA document types) /usr/lib/filetype/install/DassaultSystemes/CATIA.Environment.ftr (action description file for environment icon) /usr/lib/filetype/install/iconlib (contains icons for CATIA document types). Installing CATIA on IRIX takes longer than on the other UNIX platforms because the Magic SGI desktop is recompiled. Other Directories The CATIA Version 5 installation procedure on UNIX sets up on your workstation a filetree for storing IBM License Use Management Runtime (LUM) nodelock licenses, that is, if LUM is not already installed on your workstation. This is needed to manage nodelock licensing. The nodelock file is created by default in:
/var/ifor/nodelock (AIX) /opt/lum/ls/conf/nodelock (HP-UX, IRIX, Solaris)

Administrator Setting Environments When running a CATIA session at the end of the installation procedure (as administrator), administrator settings are created in the /CATSettings and /CATTemp directories. All end users can now log onto the same workstation and run a CATIA Version 5 session, because the environment created at installation is global. The start batch command lets you install CATIA Version 5 without the graphical user interface. To perform a batch installation, change directory to the CD-ROM mount point and enter the command:
start

with at least one of the following arguments: -u: specifies the unload directory. The default unload directory is: /usr/DassaultSystemes/B03. -newdir: creates the unload directory if it doesn't exist. -D: specifies the /CATENV environment directory. The default environment directory is /CATENV. -lic "pathname": specifies the path and name of the license certificate to import for nodelocked licensing.

-env new|erase: if the environment file already exists, you can choose to erase it or create a new one. -env new: If you install the same level of CATIA several times, the same environment is created each time (but under a different name incremented each time). -env erase: if you already installed CATIA, then deleted the installation directory, the environment remains; in this case, use the "-env erase" argument to overwrite the existing environment and create a new one during the installation. -exe: runs a CATIA session at the end of the installation. -s: silent mode (without music). -v: verbose mode. -list: lists the configurations and products on the CD-ROM. -all: unloads all the configurations and the products on the CD-ROM. -l "list_to_unload": specifies the list of configurations and/or products to unload. You have to type the list of configurations and/or products, which you can obtain by running the command using the "list" argument. In the list, configuration names look like this: ME2.slt., and product names look like this: KIN.prd. These are the names you must type. Separate the names using a blank. -h: displays help. The arguments: -list -all -l "list_to_unload" are mutually exclusive. If you run the command without arguments, the installation will be started using the graphical user interface.

Deinstalling CATIA Version 5 on UNIX

This task explains how to remove the CATIA Version 5 files from your workstation on UNIX. Prior to removing the CATIA software, you must remove any user environments you may have created after the initial installation using the tools described in "Customizing Your Environment on UNIX". End users who set up their own user environments using the setcatenv command can only remove them using the delcatenv command. 1. Log on as an root. 2. Delete the environments you created using the command:
/usr/DassaultSystemes/B03/OS-a/code/bin/delcatenv -e env_name

where "OS-a" is: aix_a hpux_a irix_a solaris_a and "env_name" is the name of the environment. Note that environments cannot be deleted using simple operating system commands. The delcatenv command is essential for removing all trace of environments in the desktop environment. CDE Desktop on AIX, HP-UX and Solaris The delcatenv command removes only the following components: /CATEnv/CATIA.V5R3.B03.sh (or CATIA.V5R3.B03.csh) if you specified these environment names using the -e option /CATENV/CATCDE/CATIA/.dt/appconfig/appmanager/C/CATIA/CATIA.V5R3.B03 (file required for graphic representation of environment in the CDE desktop). Magic SGI Desktop on IRIX The delcatenv command removes only the following component: /CATENV/CATSGI/CATIA/CATIA.V5R3.B03 (file required for graphic representation of the environment in the Magic SGI desktop) if you specified this environment name using the -e option. 3. Only when all environments have been deleted, you can then delete the installation directory using the command:
rm -r /usr/DassaultSystemes/B03/OS_a

Reserving Licenses Using the License Manager

This task explains how to reserve product licenses during a session using the Licensing tab via the Tools->Options... command. 1. Select the Tools->Options... command. 2. Select the General category, then the Licensing tab to display the Licensing tab. The role of the Licensing tab is to allow you to reserve licenses before using these products. You will not be able to work with any CATIA Version 5 products until you have first reserved the corresponding licenses. You must select at least one configuration license. In our example, it will look like this if you installed the configurations CATIA - Mechanical Design (MD2) and CATIA - Drawing Production (DP2), and imported a nodelock license for the CATIA Mechanical Design (MD2) configuration:

The list contains all the installed configurations and products. Note that, if you have not previously reserved any licenses, none of the check buttons is checked. If you entered a nodelock license during the installation, the corresponding configuration is preselected in the list. In our example, the CATIA - Mechanical Design (MD2) configuration (DS1DEA00000 - MD2) option is checked because we imported a nodelock license for this configuration during the installation. All configurations are considered as custom configurations. When you install a configuration, the list in the dialog box will contain: custom configurations, represented in the form of a serial number (in our example: "DS1DEA00000 - MD2"), appear at the top the names of the products belonging to the configuration appear after the name of the last configuration. In our example, note that: the status Granted appears next to the configuration "DS1DEA00000 - MD2" because, during the installation, the corresponding nodelock license was imported the status Granted appears next to the products in the list which belong to that configuration. The product names in the list are grayed out and the check button cannot be checked. the status No License appears next to "DP2 - CATIA - Drawing Production 2 Configuration": this means that the configuration has been installed, but you do not have a license. The configuration name is grayed out in the list, and the check button cannot be checked. Furthermore, if you are using network licensing, the status Not Granted means that you attempted to reserve a license that is not available. You will be able to work in demo mode if you registered and reserved at least one configuration license, and checked the Demo Mode option. For more information about the demo mode, refer to "Running in Demo Mode" . 3. Check the check buttons for the configurations and/or products for which you want to reserve a license. When you are working with nodelock licenses, the license will be reserved by default when you start your session, even if you unchecked the corresponding check button. 4. Click OK. 5. Exit and restart your session. You need to restart your session after reserving configuration and/or product licenses. Licensing settings are stored in a settings file. The settings active in the License tab depend on what you set the last time you used it. Troubleshooting Messages You may encounter one of the following messages when using the Licensing Manager: "Environment xxx not set or incorrect" Set an environment using the setcatenv command.

"Environment xxx incorrect" Set a valid environment using the setcatenv command. For more information about customizing environments, refer to "Customizing Your Environment on Windows" . "No Configuration/Product Available" The path containing the information required to display the list of configurations/products, referenced by the CATICPath CATIA environment variable, is incorrect, or the information is incomplete. "You have not requested a configuration or product license" Click OK and select at least one configuration license using the Licensing tab. "No License Available for Requested Configuration(s)" Click OK and select at least one valid configuration license using the Licensing tab. "Not All Licenses Available" Contact your administrator.

Running in Demo Mode

This task explains how to run CATIA Version 5 in demo mode. You must have already registered either the demonstration license, or at least one configuration license (which automatically provides access to the demo mode). What Is Demo Mode? Running in demo mode lets you use all the features of all the configurations and/or products installed, apart from the few exceptions listed below. In demo mode: the automatic save (roll) mechanism is deactivated. you can open only specially marked CATIA Version 4 or Version 5 demo documents you cannot embed CATIA documents in OLE documents you cannot open CATIA documents using OLE technology you cannot save documents on Windows, the clipboard is unavailable for cutting, copying and pasting you cannot record or execute macros you can create new workbench-specific documents, but you cannot save them. Note that when running a normal (non-demo) session, you can read specially marked CATIA Version 4 or Version 5 demo documents, and save CATIA Version 5 demo documents. By default, demo mode is not activated. 1. Display the License Manager. The License Manager is displayed automatically after starting CATIA Version 5 (either for the first time, or each time you start a session until you reserve a license). You can also display it by selecting the Tools->Options... command, then the Licensing tab in the General category. 2. Check the Demo Mode option, and click OK. A message informs you to restart your CATIA session. 3. Click OK and restart CATIA. The CATIA V5 application window is opened in demo mode.

Installing Additional Products

This task explains how to install additional products to an existing installation. The installation procedure is the same as for a first-time installation, with a few minor differences. On Windows, to prevent the installation from hanging due to concurrently running programs such as screen savers or virus scanning programs, we recommend that you first shut down any such programs. 1. Log on as an administrator. 2. Insert the CD-ROM into the drive. 3. Follow the instructions as before. 4. When prompted, enter the new nodelock licenses for the additional products. The licenses are added to the existing nodelock file. On Microsoft Windows 95 OSR2, or Windows 98, for network licensing is used. 5. Continue with the installation until a dialog box appears listing the configurations and products you have already installed, then click Next. This displays a list of the configurations and products you have not yet installed. 6. Select the additional configurations and/or products you want to install, and complete the installation as before. If you previously installed a service pack, you will be prompted to reinstall the service pack near the end of the installation. When installing additional products on UNIX, you will be prompted to update your existing environment, or delete it and create a new environment.

Enrolling Nodelock Licenses After the Installation

This task explains how to enroll nodelock licenses outside the installation procedure. On Microsoft Windows 95 OSR2, or Windows 98, network licensing is used, so this procedure does not apply. 1. Log on as an administrator. 2. On Windows NT only, select the Start->Programs->CATIA->Tools->Nodelock Key Management V5R3 command, or run the program:
install_root\code\bin\CATNodeLockMgt

where "install_root" is the name of your installation folder which is, by default:
C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B03\intel_a

The "Enroll Product (Nodelock)" dialog box appears. Note that the target id of the computer on which you are performing the installation is displayed after the title of the dialog box.

3. Fill in the appropriate fields: Product Version License Password License Serial Number: if you already have a custom configuration, you can extend it by adding products. The serial number is required to support this. License Annotation License Comment or click the Import button to import your electronic license certificate (if you have one). 4. Click OK. The nodelock file is created or updated in the default LUM environment:
C:\ifor\ls\conf\nodelock

This procedure can be used both after installing for the first time and after installing additional products. On UNIX To enroll licenses after the installation, enter the following command to set up the environment required for startup:
. /CATEnv/CATIA.V5R3.B03.sh (for Bourne or Korn shell)

then run the following command to display the Enroll Product (Nodelock) dialog box:
/usr/DassaultSystemes/B03/OS_a/code/bin/CATNodeLockMgt

where "OS-a" is: aix_a hpux_a irix_a solaris_a You can also enroll licenses after the installation by editing the nodelock file created by default in:
/var/ifor/nodelock (AIX) /opt/lum/ls/conf/nodelock (HP-UX, IRIX, Solaris)

Installing the Online Documentation After Installing the Code

This task explains how to install the online documentation after installing the code. Installing the Online Documentation On Your Computer on Windows Follow this procedure if you did not install the documentation during the code installation procedure. Installing the online documentation is very similar to installing the CATIA Version 5 software. 1. Log onto your computer. You do not need to have administrator privileges to install the online documentation. 2. Insert the CD-ROM. Unlike when installing the software, the documentation installation procedure does not start automatically. 3. Use the Windows (NT) Explorer to explore the documentation CD-ROM, and double-click the Setup.exe program on the CD-ROM to start the installation. 4. Follow the instructions. You will be prompted to specify the destination folder, or accept the default folder which is:
C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B03doc

5. Click OK. When installing additional documentation for the same CATIA version (for example, in another language), the additional documentation will be installed in the same folder. Installing the Online Documentation on Your Workstation on UNIX On UNIX, you cannot install the online documentation directly from within the code installation procedure, and there is no tool for installing the online documentation from the CD-ROM. To install the documentation, copy the contents of the CD-ROM into a directory with sufficient free disk space. You could, for example, copy the documentation files to the default directory:
/usr/DassaultSystemes/B03doc

On UNIX, if you decide to install the documentation elsewhere than in the default location, you must update the value for the CATDocView variable in your default environment to specify the location of the documentation files. For more information, refer to "Managing Environments" . Accessing the Online Documentation Directly From the CD-ROM Drive: Windows Insert the CD-ROM into the drive, then start a CATIA session and select the Help->CATIA V5 Help command. If you want to browse the documentation directly from the CD-ROM drive, and without running a CATIA Version 5 session, insert the documentation CD-ROM into the drive, access the device using the Windows (NT) Explorer, and double-click the following file (depending on the language) to display the CATIA Version 5 online documentation homepage: homepage.htm (English) Frenchhomepage.htm (French) Germanhomepage.htm (German) Japanesehomepage.htm (Japanese). Accessing the Online Documentation Directly From the CD-ROM Drive: UNIX Optionally, you may use the CD-ROM directly and set the value of the CATDocView variable to the CD-ROM mount point. If you want to consult the documentation directly from the CD-ROM drive, and without running a CATIA Version 5 session, insert the documentation CD-ROM into the drive, mount the CD-ROM where necessary, then use your HTML browser to open the following file (depending on the language) to display the CATIA Version 5 online documentation homepage: homepage.htm (English) Frenchhomepage.htm (French) Germanhomepage.htm (German) Japanesehomepage.htm (Japanese). Installing the Online Documentation on a Server: Windows You may want to install the documentation files on a server to save disk space. 1. Install the documentation files on a computer as explained above. 2. Log onto another computer where there are no documentation files. 3. Select the Start->Programs->Windows (NT) Explorer command to run the Explorer. 4. Select Tools->Map Network Drive... and map the appropriate network drive before starting a session.

5. Start a CATIA Version 5 session and use one of the commands for obtaining help. For example, press F1 for contextual help. A dialog box will prompt you to specify the online documentation path. 6. In the dialog box, specify the path where the documentation is located. Installing the Online Documentation on a Server: UNIX Copy the contents of the CD-ROM into a directory on the server with sufficient free disk space. You set up a documentation server the same way as you set up a CATIA Version 5 code server. For more information, refer to "Enabling User Access to the Software Over the Network".

Basic Tasks

Starting CATIA Version 5

Starting a Session on Windows

This task explains how to start the default CATIA Version 5 environment on Windows. Method 1 1. On the Windows desktop, double-click the CATIA V5R3 environment . shortcut Method 2 1. On the taskbar, select the Start->Programs->CATIA->CATIA V5R3 environment shortcut. Method 3 1. On the taskbar, select the Start->Run... command, enter the command:
cnext

or:
cnext.exe

2. Click OK. Method 4 1. Open an MS-DOS window. 2. Change to the default folder in which you installed the product. The default folder is:
C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B03\OS_a\code\bin

where "OS-a" is: intel_a (Intel platform) win_a (Windows 95 OSR2 and Windows 98 platforms). 3. Enter the command:
cnext

or
cnext.exe

Use the option "-env" after the command to specify which environment you want to use to start CATIA. For more information about environments, refer to "What Is An Environment"?". Starting a Session in Administrator Mode To Lock Settings

1. Enter the command: cnext -env "my_env" -admin where "my_env" is the name of the environment, if you want to run CATIA in administrator mode for the purpose of locking settings. This prevents all users of that environment from changing the settings you locked. For more information, refer to "Locking Settings".

Starting a Session on UNIX

This task explains how to start the default CATIA Version 5 environment on UNIX. Method 1 1. On CDE desktops (AIX, HP-UX and Sun Solaris), open the Application Manager cabinet on the front panel. 2. Open the CATIA directory. 3. Double-click the CATIA V5R3 icon. On IRIX, access the CATIA tab Application Manager in the desktop, then double-click the CATIA.V5R3.B03 icon. Method 2 1. Log on as either root or end user. 2. Open a shell window. 3. Enter the following command to set up the environment required for startup:
. /CATEnv/CATIA.V5R3.B03.sh (for Bourne or Korn shell) . /CATEnv/CATIA.V5R3.B03.csh (for C shell)

assuming that the $HOME of root is "/". You may want to add this line to your .profile file. This environment is created when the root userid performs the installation. 4. Enter the command:
CNEXT

Method 3 1. Assuming that the software was installed in the default installation directory, run the command:
/usr/DassaultSystemes/B03/OS_a/code/command/catstart

where "OS-a" is: aix_a hpux_a irix_a solaris_a Note that the catstart command is not available if you are using C shell.

Run the following command to get help on the different options:

/usr/DassaultSystemes/B03/OS_a/code/command/catstart -h

where "OS-a" is: aix_a hpux_a irix_a solaris_a The options are: -d: specifies another directory (other than $HOME/CATEnv) containing the environment -env: specifies a new environment name (for more information, refer to "Managing Environments") -h: displays help -object: followed by object to load (or argument) when starting CATIA Version; for example, -object "arg1 arg2" -run: followed by program to start (DMU, ENOVIA, DENEB); if this options is not specified, CATIA is started by default. Starting a Session in Administrator Mode To Lock Settings 1. Enter the command: catstart -run "CNEXT -admin" if you want to run CATIA in administrator mode (using the default environment) for the purpose of locking settings. This prevents all users of that environment from changing the settings you locked. You could also enter the command: CNEXT -env "my_env" -admin where "my_env" is the name of the environment. For more information, refer to "Locking Settings".

Starting a Session Using Document Icons

This task explains how to start a session using icons for existing documents. Method 1 1. Locate the document icon using your platform's Explorer (Windows) or File Manager (UNIX). The icons look like this: this is a Part Design document icon: this is an Assembly Design document icon: this is a Generative Drafting document icon: this is a CATIA Version 4 model icon: 2. Double-click on the icon. .

This will run CATIA Version 5, open the document and activate the workbench used to create the document originally. Note that CATIA Version 4 models cannot be edited. Method 2 1. Drag and drop a document icon onto the CATIA V5R3 environment icon on your desktop (Windows only). Method 3 1. Drag and drop a document icon onto an open CATIA Version 5 window.

Starting a Session in a Language Other than English on Windows

This task explains how to start CATIA Version 5 in a language other than English on Windows. Installing CATIA Version 5 installs the user interface files for all supported languages: English (default language) French German Japanese You then simply use the tools on your operating system to choose the language in which you want to start your session. If no language is chosen, your session will be started in English. On Windows 1. On Windows, select the Start->Settings->Control Panel command, double-click the Regional Settings control, then click the Regional Settings tab (if it is not displayed by default). The following dialog box appears:

In our example above, English is selected. 2. Select the desired language from the languages available on the list. For example, selecting any of: French (Belgian) French (Canadian) French (Luxembourg) French (Standard) French (Swiss) will start the session in French. The same applies to the other language variants. Note that The Regional Settings tab does not activate your input locale: for example, it does not activate the keyboard map for the language you selected. 3. On Windows NT only, click the Input Locales tab if you want to select the input locale for your language. The Input Locales tab is displayed. 4. Select the appropriate input locale. In our example below, you selected French (Standard).

5. Click OK, then start CATIA Version 5.

Starting a Session in a Language Other than English on UNIX

This task explains how to start CATIA Version 5 in a language other than English on UNIX. Installing CATIA Version 5 directly installs the user interface files (message catalogs) for the following languages: English (default language) French German Japanese The user interface files for the French, German and Japanese languages are already translated for you. If you install in the default installation directory:
/usr/DassaultSystemes/B03/OS_a/

where "OS-a" is: aix_a hpux_a irix_a solaris_a the following default environment is set up:
/usr/DassaultSystemes/B03/OS-a/resources/msgcatalog (containing the English files) /usr/DassaultSystemes/B03/OS_a/resources/msgcatalog/French /usr/DassaultSystemes/B03/OS_a/resources/msgcatalog/German /usr/DassaultSystemes/B03/OS_a/resources/msgcatalog/Japanese

This default environment (/usr/DassaultSystemes/B03/OS_a/resources/msgcatalog) is pointed to by the environment variable: CATMsgCatalogPath. What about the other languages? Installing the software also sets up in:
/usr/DassaultSystemes/B03/OS_a/resources/msgcatalog

a subdirectory for each additional language supported (but for which translated user interface files are not provided). The list of languages is: Czech Polish Russian Korean Simplified Chinese

For example:
/usr/DassaultSystemes/B03/OS_a/resources/msgcatalog/Russian /usr/DassaultSystemes/B03/OS_a/resources/msgcatalog/Czech /usr/DassaultSystemes/B03/OS_a/resources/msgcatalog/...

How do I run CATIA Version 5 using translated files? Copy the file to be translated from:
/usr/DassaultSystemes/B03/OS_a/resources/msgcatalog

to:
/usr/DassaultSystemes/B03/OS_a/resources/msgcatalog/Russian

and translate the file. When you run a CATIA Version 5 session, your translated files will be loaded. What about the fonts for these languages? The installation also sets up in each language directory a file named "Dialog". This file contains all the font declarations for use as is, for the language and locale you want to use (we have chosen the same fonts as used in CATIA Version 4 to facilitate the transition to CATIA Version 5). If you want to use other fonts, comment out the previous font declarations and declare the new fonts. The file also contains other user interface texts. You then simply use your operating system tools to choose the locale in which you want to start your session. If no locale is chosen, your session will be started in English. 1. Open a shell window. 2. Export the LANG variable for the desired locale before starting a session. For example, for the French language, enter this command on AIX:
export LANG=fr_FR

this command on HP-UX:

export LANG=fr_FR.iso88591

this command on Sun Solaris and IRIX:

export LANG=fr

3. Start CATIA Version 5.

Getting Help

Displaying Tooltips and Help Messages

This task explains how to display tooltips and the corresponding help messages. 1. Point to an icon. The tooltip is displayed in a small box, with the corresponding message in the status bar.

You can switch tooltip display on and off using the Tooltips option of the Options tab in the Tools->Customize... command, or by right-clicking any toolbar and selecting the Customize... command to access the Options tab. But you have to restart a session to take the new settings into account.

Using the What's This? Command

This task explains how to use the What's This? command to get help on toolbar icons. 1. Click the What's This? icon or select the Help->What's This? command.

The cursor takes on the shape of the What's This? icon. 2. Point to an icon, then click the icon. This displays a long help message in a box:

Accessing the Online Help Library

This task explains how to access the online help library. The CATIA Version 5 documentation is totally Web oriented, using HTML, GIF and JPEG standard formats, allowing easy access and navigation using a standard Web browser. Navigation aids includes full text searching and a framed layout allowing a direct access from the table of contents to the information. 1. Select the Help->Contents, Index and Search command. The welcome page of the CATIA Version 5 online help library is displayed:

If you installed the online documentation in the default location, the welcome page will be displayed immediately. If you installed the online documentation elsewhere, you must first update the CATDocView variable in your environment to reference the environment containing the online documentation. If you do not reset the CATDocView variable, a dialog box will prompt you to specify the location: if you installed the online documentation locally on your computer, you can specify a path like this, for example, on Windows:
C:\online_doc_folder

where "online_doc_folder" is the name of the folder in which you installed the online documentation. if you installed it elsewhere on the network, you must first map the appropriate network drive before starting a session, then specify a path as above when prompted.

Doc Installation Path In the General tab, accessible via the Tools->Options command, the "Doc installation path" field for the CATIA Documentation Location option displays the path of the folder in which the online documentation is installed. The path is the same path you entered when installing the online documentation: the path displays the value of the CATDocView environment variable. When you request help using the Help->Contents, Index and Search command (or press the F1 key for contextual help), the online documentation may not be displayed. This may be because the online documentation may have been physically moved to another location. If the online documentation is not found, the following dialog box appears:

Browse to select the online documentation location. Selecting the location updates the "Doc installation path" field for the CATIA Documentation Location option, in the General tab accessible via the Tools->Options command. Note: You can also type the location in the "Doc installation path" field for the CATIA Documentation Location option.You must enter the real location; otherwise, the path you enter will be ignored. Note that UNC (Universal Naming Convention) names on Windows is allowed. For example, you can specify the following path type:
\\remote_computer\online_doc_folder

2. Click the Infrastructure icon to get familiar with CATIA Version 5 fundamentals, or the icon for the workbench you need information about. In each case, the information you require is displayed in a framed layout:

3. Select the Home button to return to the home page, the Search button to perform a full text search throughout the online library., the Index button to access the indexes for all the workbench documentation, or the Print button to print user guides in PDF format. 4. Select the Search button to perform a full text search throughout part or all of the online library:

The search syntax is very simple: you can search for single words only, and must enter the exact word you are searching for. You can restrict your search to the documentation of a specific workbench (using the list in the "Look in:" field) or search throughout the entire online documentation library by selecting "All documents" in the "Search Scope" field. Search results are displayed in the "Results:" list:

Double-click on an item in the Results list to open the document containing the search string. The page containing the search string is then displayed in a new browser window, so your search query is kept. Finally, use your browser's Find command to find the occurrence (search hits are not highlighted). To print the documentation, click the Print icon. This opens a similar home page. Click on the icon for the product whose documentation you want to print. This opens a PDF version of the documentation using Acrobat Reader. To print the documentation, use the Acrobat Reader File->Print... command.

Getting Contextual Help

This task explains how to get contextual help on the current command. 1. Select the Help->CATIA V5 Help command, or press the F1 key. For example, if you are using the Edge Fillet command, the online help library is displayed in HTML format in a Web browser window, at the topic explaining how to use the Edge Fillet command:

Accessing the Dassault Systmes User Galaxy

This task explains how to connect to the Dassault Systmes user galaxy. 1. Select the Help->User Galaxy command. A Web browser appears displaying the User Galaxy, a full online information package helping you to find all the general information you expect to find about existing and upcoming products, partners, training, hardware, R&D, Services, and much more. You can also click the CATIA P2 Solutions logo in the bottom right corner of the main window to access the User Galaxy.

Displaying Copyright Information

This task explains how to get background information about the product you are using. 1. Select the Help->About CATIA V5.3 command. A dialog box appears providing you with copyright information about the product.

Editing in Context Within the Product Structure

What Is the Product Structure?

Every industrial product can be organized in as a logical structure comprising a large number of assemblies, sub-assemblies and parts: for example, a car (the product) has a bodywork sub-assembly (roof, doors,...), a wheel sub-assembly (comprising four wheels), and a large number of other parts. The CATIA Version 5 infrastructure provides you with a set of product structure management and navigation tools designed to help you structure and organize your products logically, and navigate within your product structure: the Product Structure workbench. If the configuration you are using provides access to the Product Structure workbench, when you open a CATIA Version 5 session, you will automatically be placed in a product structure context, and an empty product structure document (a .CATProduct document) like this will be opened by default:

The added value of this approach is not simply the possibility to structure and organize your products logically. You can also work exclusively on one type of the document, the Product Structure document. Inside this document, you can navigate from one sub-assembly or part to another, and edit them using the workbench used to create them, directly inside the product structure. This is referred to as "editing in context". Saving the product structure document also saves all the data inside the product structure. However, data created using the Part Design, Analysis and Generative Drafting workbenches is created and saved in separate documents outside the product structure. What Is the Product Structure Workbench?

The Product Structure workbench is activated by default, and the product structure icon is displayed as the current workbench. An Assembly toolbar is also displayed (beneath the Select icon):

The Product Structure workbench also provides commands on the Edit and Insert menus. These commands are also available when you activate the CATIA - Assembly Design workbench. They allow you to organize, structure and manipulate your product by: inserting new and existing components inserting new parts moving parts and components establishing context-specific representations, or hierarchical designs of assemblies in specific contexts (engineering, manufacturing, etc.) For more information about these commands, refer to the CATIA - Assembly Design Version 5 Users Guide.

Accessing the Navigation Tools

Understanding the Navigation Assistant The product structure contains a specification tree, like other CATIA Version 5 documents. The easiest way to navigate in the tree is by simply clicking on a branch. Double-click an object in the tree to activate the object-specific workbench. The navigation assistant manages transitions between different workbenches. Three situations are possible when navigating from one workbench to another. Depending on: which workbench you come from to which workbench you want to go and what you selected before navigating the navigation assistant will: create a new workbench document in the current product structure activate a different workbench in the product structure create a new document for a different workbench. The navigation assistant will always privilege the creation of a new document in the current product structure. Note that activating the Analysis or Generative Drafting workbenches creates new documents in a new window, not in the Product Structure. 1. You can navigate from one workbench to another using the "Welcome to CATIA V5.2" dialog box, which appears when you start a session or when you click the icon representing the current workbench. This contains the icons for the workbenches belonging to the configurations and/or products you installed. In our example, the workbenches illustrated are the result from installing the Mechanical Design configuration.

If you do not want to display this dialog box at the start of each session, uncheck the appropriate option "Do not show this dialog at startup". 2. You can also access the workbench icons by right-clicking the current workbench icon:

3. Select the Start menu to access the same icons: the workbench icons are displayed at the top of the menu the second area in the menu contains the list of the CATIA solutions containing the configurations/products you installed: in our example, installing the Mechanical Design configuration sets up the "Infrastructure" and "Mechanical Design" entries in the menu. These entries in turn provide yet another means of accessing the same product workbenches a check list lets you switch between document windows the CATIA User Galaxy lets you access the CATIA Galaxy online information package accessible via html browser (refer to "Accessing the Dassault Systmes User Galaxy" for more information).

4. To customize the list of workbench icons available, right-click any icon in any toolbar to display the Customize... dialog box, or select the Tools->Customize... command. To remove icons from the Start menu, the Welcome dialog box, and the list of icons available by right-clicking the current workbench icon, drag the icon name from the "Favorites" list and drop it on the "Available" list, or select the icon and click the <---- arrow. To add icons, do the reverse: drag them from the "Available" list and drop them onto the "Favorites" list, or select the icon and click the ----> arrow. Then click the Close button to confirm. Note that the "Available" list remains the same because it contains all available workbenches. The list varies according to the configurations and/or products installed.

Creating a New Workbench Document in the Product Structure

This task explains how to create a new document inside the current product structure document, and activate the workbench for the new document. 1. Double-click the Product document in the specification tree to activate the product structure workbench and select it. Selecting it indicates your intention to create a new document inside the product structure. 2. Select the workbench using the Start menu, the "Welcome" dialog box or from the list accessed by right-clicking the current workbench icon. For example, if you select Part Design, a Part Design component is added to the product structure, and the Part Design workbench is activated. Note that the symbol next to "Part1" is a product structure symbol. 3. Expand the tree (by clicking the "+" symbol) to see the Part document itself:

Activating a Different Workbench in the Product Structure

This task explains the how to activate a different workbench inside the same product structure document. 1. Identify the current workbench. For example, in this product structure document, the product structure workbench is active:

and the product structure document is active: 2. To activate the Part Design workbench, for example, double-click the Part document, or select the Part document and access the Part Design workbench. You can use the Start menu, the "Welcome" dialog box or the list accessed by right-clicking the current workbench icon.

The Part Design workbench is activated in the same product structure window:

Creating a New Document for a Different Workbench

This task explains how to create a new document and activate the corresponding workbench. 1. Click the Product document in the specification tree to activate the product structure workbench. Note that the document color is blue in the tree. 2. Select the workbench using the Start menu, the "Welcome" dialog box or from the list accessed by right-clicking the current workbench icon. For example, if you select the Part Design workbench, a new Part Design document will be created in a separate window, and the Part Design workbench will be activated:

Creating, Opening and Saving Documents

About Data Sharing Between Windows NT and UNIX

A communication protocol such as ftp, http or NFS is required for sharing data between Windows NT and UNIX. The ftp and NFS protocols can be used for sharing CATIA data between these environments. Several implementations of NFS exist, provided by different vendors. The following products have been tested: HummingBird NFS Maestro Version 6.0 Intergraph DiskAccess NFS Client 3.2.0.11. Recommendations We recommend that, when using these products, you activate the lock mechanism and keep the same case in file names. We also recommend that you evaluate the product within the context and environment of your company before deploying it, in order to check that it meets your needs and is appropriate for your processes. Limitations Whatever technical solution you choose for sharing your data, make sure you are aware of the system limitations on file names described in "About Filenames".

About Filenames
This section specifies what you need to know about file names. There are a certain number of file naming constraints you need to be aware of. On both Windows and UNIX Firstly, only the ISO-646 subset of characters is authorized (with the limitations described below). ISO-646 provides the subset of characters common to all code pages, and is included in all industry standard code pages such as ISO8859-x, EUC-xxx, etc. The ISO-646 subset contains the principal symbols you characters you may need to use for naming documents: characters A to Z (upper and lower case) numbers 0 to 9 and certain special characters. However, national accented characters are not supported. Furthermore, the following special characters are not supported on Windows: > (greater than) < (less than) * (asterisk) : (colon) " (quotation mark) ? (question mark) \ (backslash) | (vertical bar) and the following special character is not supported on both Windows and UNIX: / (slash). This means that: you cannot use national accented characters or any of the forbidden special characters listed above when creating and saving documents; on UNIX, to enhance document interoperability between the UNIX and Windows platforms, a filter is activated systematically to prevent you from creating documents whose names contain special characters not supported on Windows you cannot read documents created with CATIA Version 5, and renamed using your operating system, if they contain national accented characters or forbidden special characters.

What About Version 4 Model Documents? The following table specifies, for each CATIA Version 4 data type listed, any problems in reading the data due to forbidden characters in the data name:

UNIX Data from CATIA Version 4 model (or PRJMODEL) Example: MY***.model

On UNIX You can read Version 4 model documents containing either national accented characters or any of the forbidden special characters.

On Windows Impossible to read. You can read Version 4 model documents containing national accented characters, but you cannot read Version 4 documents containing forbidden special characters. You must rename the model before reading it, so it does not contain special characters. Impossible to read.

*MASTER *LISTFAM PRJ tables using ":"

You can read them.

Creating New Documents

This task shows you how to create a new document when CATIA Version 5 is already running. 1. Click the New icon File->New... command or select the

2. In the New dialog box, double-click the document type or select it then click OK. Choose the document type from the following: Part A document like this will appear:

For more information about the Part Design workbench, see the CATIA - Part Design User's Guide. Drawing After selection of the standard to be used, a dialog box like this will appear:

For more information about the Generative Drafting and Interactive Drafting workbenches, see the CATIA - Generative Drafting User's Guide and CATIA Interactive Drafting User's Guide. Product A document like this will appear:

For more information about the Assembly workbench, see the CATIA - Assembly Design User's Guide. Analysis A document like this will appear:

For more information about the Generative Part Analysis workbench, see the CATIA - Generative Part Structural Analysis and the CATIA - Generative Assembly Structural Analysis User's Guides. Note that more toolbars may appear next to the Standard toolbar when you create a document.

This task shows you how to create a new document whether or not CATIA Version 5 is already running. 1. Either on the Desktop area of Windows NT or in the appropriate directory of Windows NT Explorer (making sure you do not select any items when doing so) right-click once then select the New command.

2. Select the document type you wish to open.

An empty icon indicating the document type is created (see "Starting a Session Using Document Icons"). 3. Click in the name field that appears with the icon just created and replace the default name with a name of your own choosing (for example, replace New CATIA Part.CATPart with MyFile.CATPart). 4. Double-click on the icon that is created. The new document is created. If you do not have a session running, a session is opened.

Creating a New Document from an Existing One

This task shows you how to create a new document based on a copy of an existing one. 1. You may want to create a new document whose basic characteristics are the same as an existing document. To do this, close the document you want to copy if not already closed and select the File->New from... command. 2. In the dialog box that appears select the appropriate document indicating the name and location of the new document and click Open. The new document is displayed. You can keep the same name for the new document but if you do this you must put the new document in another directory. The new document is now created. Unlike the File->Save command this operation creates a new UUID for the new document created.

Opening Existing Documents

This task shows you how to open an existing document when CATIA Version 5 is already running. If you wish to access V4 data such as V4 models, PROJECT files and library objects on Windows NT or UNIX or access CDMA objects on UNIX you can do so provided you purchase the V4 Integration product. V4 models, PROJECT files or library objects residing on UNIX can be accessed from Windows NT using the http protocol. (Make sure beforehand that an http server has been installed on the machine where the V4 data resides.) The address to be specified should look something like this: http://UNIXserver: port/V4datalocation You will not be allowed to open a document created using Version 5 if its name contains national characters or forbidden special characters. For a reminder, refer to "About Filenames" .

1. Click the Open icon

or select the File->Open... command.

2. In the File Selection Box, select the file location. 3. Click the Files of type: list.

4. Select the document type. 5. If you are sure you do not intend to modify the document in any way you may want to open the document in read-only mode. If so, check the box Open as read-only. 6. Click Open. There are several document types. Here are just some: CATPart (Part Design document) A document like this will appear:

For more information about the Part Design workbench, see the CATIA - Part Design User's Guide. CATDrawing (Generative Drawing or Interactive Drafting document): A document like this will appear:

For more information about the Generative Drafting and Interactive Drafting workbenches, see the CATIA - Generative Drafting User's Guide and CATIA Interactive Drafting User's Guide. CATProduct (Assembly Design document): A document like this will appear:

For more information about the Assembly workbench, see the CATIA - Assembly Design User's Guide. model (V4 model document): A document like this will appear:

For more information about the V4 Integration workbench, see the CATIA - V4 Integration User's Guide. asm (V4 Assembly Modeling document; is saved as an Assembly Design document i.e. CATProduct) For more information see the CATIA - Assembly Design User's Guide. igs (IGES; is saved as an Part Design document i.e. CATPart document). For more information see Importing an IGES File in the CATIA - Part Design User's Guide. dxf (Autocad DXF format; creates a CATDrawing document) For more information see Exporting a CATDrawing into a DXF/DWG File in the CATIA - Generative Drafting User's Guide. stp (creates a CATProduct document). For more information see Importing a STEP AP203 Document in the CATIA Assembly Design User's Guide. Note that more toolbars may appear next to the Standard toolbar when you create a document.

This task shows you how to access an existing document without first running a CATIA Version 5 session. 1. Before you open a session, click Start and select Documents. 2. Select the document you wish to open. A CATIA Version 5 session is opened and your document is displayed.

This task shows you how to open an existing document via a document icon when no CATIA Version 5 session is already running. 1. Before you open a session, click My Computer or run the Windows NT Explorer and find the location of the document you wish to open. 2. Double-click the document icon. A CATIA Version 5 session is opened and your document is displayed.

This task shows you how to open an existing document via a document icon when a CATIA Version 5 session is already running. 1. If a CATIA Version 5 session is already open, drag and drop the icon in your CATIA Version 5 application window. Your document is opened for editing.

Opening Father Documents Only

This task shows you how to open father documents only. "Father" documents, CATProduct and CATDrawing documents, for example, that contain V5 documents such as CATParts and models (their "child" documents) can be opened without simultaneous loading of these "child" documents. 1. Select the Tools->Options... command. The Options dialog box appears with the General category selected in the left-hand column and the General tab already selected. By default, the Load referenced documents option is checked. This means that when a "father" document is loaded the "child" documents it points to are also loaded. However, you may, for reasons of performance and efficiency, want to load only the "father" document. 2. Uncheck the Load referenced documents option as shown below. As of now, only the "father" document will actually be loaded when you next open this type of document.

Opening Most Recently Used Documents

This task shows you how to open a recently used file. 1. Select the File->Open... command and click, at the bottom of the menu, the name of the file you wish to open.

Closing Documents
This task shows you how to close a document. 1. Select the File->Close command. 2. If changes have been made since the last save, the Close dialog box appears. Specify whether the file is to be saved or not.

Saving Documents For the First Time or Under Another Name

This task shows you how to save a document for the first time or under another name. 1. Select the File->Save As... command.

2. In the Save As dialog box, specify the location of the document to be saved as well as its name and type. 3. Click Save. If the name you give the file already exists, the following dialog box appears. You will not be allowed to use national characters or forbidden special characters in the document name. For a reminder, refer to "About Filenames".

Saving Existing Documents

This task shows you how to close a document. 1. Click the Save icon or select the File->Save command.

A message appears in the status bar to confirm that the document is saved. When a document is saved, it is stored in the UTF8 Unicode format. This ensures that the data contained in it can be read on both Windows and UNIX whatever the session code page used. You can choose to set an automatic save for your file using the General tab of the Tools->Options... command.For more information, see "Customizing General Settings" . If you save an existing file in another directory without changing the file name you will only be able to open one of these files at any given time. If one of them is already open you will not be able to open the other. This is because both files have the same UUID. To avoid this happening each file must have its own UUID. This can be done by means of the File->New from... command. See Creating New Documents from Existing Documents.

Saving Documents In Other Formats

This task shows you how to save a document in another format.

1. Select the File->Save As... command.

2. In the Save As dialog box, select the location of the document to be saved. 3. Click the Save as type: list.

4. Select the document type from the list displayed. For example, you may wish to save: a V5 CATPart document as a V4 model See "Saving Version 5 CATPart Documents as CATIA Version 4 Models" in the CATIA - V4 Integration User's Guide a Part Design or Assembly document as a STEP AP203 document (.stp). See "Exporting CATPart or CATProduct Data to a STEP AP203 File" a Part document as an IGES document (.igs). See "Exporting CATPart Data to an IGES File" a Drawing document as a DXF document (.dxf). See "Exporting a CATDrawing into a DXF/DWG File" a Part document as an STL (stereolithography) document (.stl). See "Exporting CATPart Data to an STL File" a Drawing document as a CGM document (.cgm). See "Exporting a CGM File" a 3D document as a VRML document (.wrl). See "Exporting 3D Documents to VRML"

Saving All Documents

This task shows you how to save some or all of the documents you have open. 1. Select the File->Save All command. The following dialog box will appear:

If you have made no changes to any of the documents you want to save this dialog box will not appear.

2. By default it is assumed that you want to save all documents. All documents that have been modified in the current session are therefore placed in the bottom list, i.e. the Will be saved list. However, if there are documents you do not wish to save you can move each of them individually into the upper list i.e. the Can be saved list by using the icon . Alternately, you can move all files to the upper list with the icon files individually and use the icon , select the

to transfer them to the lower list.

The icon moves all documents in the upper list into the lower list meaning they will all be saved. 3. Click on OK to confirm. If symbolic links exist between files, for example if a Drafting document has been created from a Part document, the names of each of these files will also appear in the bottom list and will be saved if the Part document is saved. However, if you want to be able to save all files independently regardless of any existing links between files, check the option Enable independent saves in the bottom left-hand corner of the dialog box.

Viewing the Specification Tree and Geometry Area

About the Specification Tree and Geometry Area

CATIA Version 5 provides a unique specification-driven and generative modeling approach, which captures and reuses process specifications, ultimately accelerating the design process. CATIA Version 5 offers a specification modeler which lets you concentrate the design effort on establishing the proper design specifications, while leaving it to the system to compute or update the resulting geometry when required. This approach is implemented as a generalized mechanism for all CATIA Version 5 applications, for instance feature-based part design, assembly design and drawing generation. CATIA Version 5 model, part, drawing and assembly documents consequently allow you to view and edit data either in the specification tree, the geometry area, or in both at the same time.

Setting Document Window Layout Preferences

This task explains how to set document window layout preferences. 1. Select the View->Specifications command. This is the default layout option. It displays both the specification tree and the geometry together:

2. Select the View->Specifications command again. This removes the specification tree:

You can also use the F3 key to toggle more quickly. 3. Toggle the View->Geometry command on and off to display and hide the geometry.

Using the Full Screen

This task explains how to make the geometry area fill the whole screen. 1. Select the View->Full Screen command. The geometry area fills the whole area of your screen. 2. To restore the document window to its original size, right-click then select the Full Screen command.

Using Document Windows

This task explains how to use document windows. 1. Select the Window ->New Window command. A new window is opened containing the document you are editing. The remaining commands on the Window menu let you organize your windows horizontally or vertically with respect to each other, so that they do not overlap, (Window->Tile Horizontally and Window->Tile Vertically) or in a cascading arrangement in which they overlap each other (Window->Cascade). Note that you can switch from one document window to another by selecting the window name at the bottom of the Window menu. On the Sun Solaris platform, we recommend that you set the following desktop resource to always keep your CATIA V5R3 window on top:
Allow primary always on top

Using the Overview on the Specification Tree

This task explains how to use the overview to zoom in or out on the specification tree. 1. With the specification tree visible, select the View->Specifications Overview command (or press the Shift and F2 keys) to display the Overview window containing a view of a portion of the specification tree:

2. Point to the Overview window to display the This drags the overview viewport through which you view part of the specification tree.

cursor, and drag.

While dragging, the cursor changes to: You can zoom the size of the overview viewport by dragging the handles located at the top right and bottom left corners of the viewport.

Only that part of the tree you see inside the overview viewport will be visible in the document window.

Using the Geometry Overview

This task explains how to use the overview to view the geometry. 1. With geometry visible in the geometry area, select the View->Geometry Overview command. The geometry is displayed in the overview window, but not the specification tree:

2. Point to the Overview window to display the

cursor, and drag.

This drags the overview viewport through which you view the geometry. Only that part of the geometry you see inside the overview viewport will be visible in the document window:

Note that you can resize the overview window itself to see the whole of the viewport. 3. Zoom the size of the overview viewport by dragging the handles located at the top right and bottom left corners of the viewport. While you drag, the cursor changes to: document window: . This lets you zoom the geometry in and out in the

Selecting Objects

Preselecting and Selecting Using the Pointer

This task explains basic selection techniques using the pointer. Whenever you are not using an application command, the Select command is active. Using the Select command, you can select any object in your document. All the selection tools are available using this command. Open the document /Samples/Infrastructure/Selection.CATPart 1. Select the Select icon to enter selection mode, if it is not already activated. 2. Point to the part of the object you want to select. As you point to objects, different parts of the objects are highlighted, in the geometry area, and the object name is highlighted in the specification tree. Highlighting will only be active if you checked the option "Preselect in geometry view" (active by default) using the Visualization tab via the Tools->Options... command. This option is active by default. You can also set the preselected element linetype using the " Preselected element linetype" option in the Visualization tab. The face on the object opposite, for example, is highlighted in red. You can also use the same tab to set a variety of useful selection features including selected element color and pre-selected (highlight) linetype. Note that the selection color and pre-selection color are the same. In the geometry area, you can select the constituent elements of objects, in other words: faces vertices edges planes axes. Whenever you are using an application command, you can only select objects required as input for the command. For example, when creating a hole in a pad, you are prompted to select a face or a plane: no other elements can be selected.

3. Once the element is highlighted, click on the object to select it. In our example, the selected face now changes color because we changed the selection color.

4. Ctrl-click another face to add it to the initial selection.

5. Click another element, then Shift-click a second element to select all elements between and including the two elements. Ctrl-clicking and Shift-clicking can be done in: the geometry area the specification tree lists in dialog boxes. 6. To deselect, click anywhere in the background. 7. Continue pointing at the object. Note that hidden faces and edges are also highlighted as you point at them. Hidden faces and edges are displayed in a different color. Refer to "Selecting Using the Preselection Navigator" for a more powerful method for selecting hidden or coincident elements. Selecting the Esc key deselects all selected elements.

Selecting Using the Selection Traps

This task explains how to select objects using the selection traps. Using the Bounding Outline 1. Select the Select icon to enter selection mode, if it is not already activated. 2. Drag (using the left mouse button). A bounding outline will appear as you drag: 3. Drag the bounding outline until the object(s) you want to select is(are) completely inside the bounding outline. The objects must be completely inside the bounding outline: if not, they will not be selected. 4. Release the mouse. The objects will be highlighted to indicate they have been selected. The Selection Trap Note that you can also use the Selection Trap icon to perform the same function. You access this icon by clicking the Select icon to see the Select toolbar: .

Press and hold down the left mouse key, and slide it to the right to select the icon. The principle is the same: drag (using the left mouse button) to create the trap around the object(s). Furthermore, you can start the creating the trap by pointing to an existing object, and then dragging. Note that only those objects located entirely inside the trap will be selected. The Intersecting Trap icon on the Select toolbar also allows selection The Intersecting Trap using a trap. Any objects intersected by the trap will be selected. The Polygonal Trap The Polygonal Trap icon works like the other traps, except that the trap you can draw is a closed polygon. Drag to define create the polygon around the object to be selected, then double-click to close the polygon.

Paint Stroke Selection The Paint Stroke icon lets you select objects by simply drawing a paint stroke across them. Drag to create the paint stroke. Any object crossed by the paint stroke will be selected.

Selecting Using the Preselection Navigator

This task explains how to use the preselection navigator (or the keyboard arrows) for selecting hidden or coincident elements, or elements located elsewhere in the specification tree. Open the document /Samples/Infrastructure/Selection.CATPart 1. Select the Select icon to enter selection mode, if it is not already activated. 2. Point to the part of the object you want to select. 3. Select the Tools->Options... command, then the Visualization tab. 4. Check the option "Display the preselection navigator after ... seconds", set the spinner to the time delay, and click OK. The spinner sets the amount of time, in seconds, which elapses before the preselection navigator appears after pointing at an object using the Select command. By default, the tool is not active. 5. With the Select command active, point the cursor at an object. The selection tool is displayed after the time delay you set: The following diagram describes graphic selection tool features:

A cross pinpoints the selected location. Four arrows are used for navigating or scrolling through the object you point at. An invisible area around the selection tool determines selection tool sensitivity.

6. Click the up arrow to navigate "in-depth", in other words, from the front to the back of the object, to highlight hidden or coincident elements. This method is particularly useful for large parts since it lets you select, for example, edges, faces, etc. which are not visible or accessible near the front of the part.

You can also navigate between different objects, not just inside single objects. When one object hides another, the preselection navigator will also let you select elements belonging to the hidden object. 7. Click the down arrow to navigate in the opposite direction, towards the front of the object. 8. Click the circle in the center to validate your selection and exit the preselection navigator. You can also press the up and down keys to achieve the same effect, and validate your selection using the ENTER key. Using any of these keys displays the selection tool automatically. 9. Click the left and right arrows to navigate up and down in the object hierarchy. For example, click the left arrow and look at the specification tree to see each click on the left arrow takes you to the top of the tree, then click the right arrow to navigate downwards. Similarly, you can also press the left and right keys to achieve the same effect, and validate your selection using the ENTER key. The selection tool disappears, in any case, once a selection has been made, or if you point or click outside the selection activation area around the selection tool.

Selecting Using the Other Selection... Command

This task explains how to display an object's structure in a separate window to facilitate alternative selections. Open the document /Samples/Infrastructure/OtherSelections.CATPart 1. Select the Select icon to enter selection mode, if it is not already activated. 2. Point to the object to highlight the element you want to select. In this example, point to the circular face at the end of the cylindrical part to highlight it:

3. Select the Other Selection... contextual command. The element is selected, and the Other Selections window appears. The window contains the location of the selected element in the specification tree, and describes the path to the top of the tree. The name of the circular face is: "Face".

You can also navigate up and down the tree inside the Other Selections window using the preselection navigator or the keyboard arrows, and select other objects. 4. This time, point to the body of the cylinder to highlight the surface.

5. Select the Other Selection... contextual command. The element is selected, and the Other Selections window appears. Note that, this time, an additional element (highlighted in blue) has been detected: AxisVisu. This is the axis used when the cylindrical part was created. This type of element is a characteristic element.

The Other Selection... command is the only tool that lets you select characteristic elements. 6. Click on AxisVisu to select it.

Selecting Using the Search... Command

This task explains how to use the Edit->Search... command to search for and select objects. You can search for: objects with a specific name, or of a specific type or color product properties objects created using a specific workbench, in the current document or throughout the whole product structure. Note also that you can perform searches on model documents created using CATIA Version 4. Open the document /Samples/Infrastructure/Search.CATPart

Performing a Quick Search for a Named Object 1. Select the Edit->Search... command. You can also run the command using the Ctrl+F shortcut. The Search dialog box appears:

If the Select command was active before you selected the Edit->Search... command, it remains active. You can also work with other commands while the Search dialog box remains open. If you select the Search button now, all items in the specification tree will be found. 2. Enter the name "My Sketch" in the Name field:

...then click the Search button. The item "My_Sketch" is highlighted in the list in the Search dialog box, a query is also generated in the "Generated queries" field:

...and the sketch "My Sketch" is preselected in the geometry area:

3. Click the Select button to select the sketch. The sketch is selected:

4. Click OK to exit search mode. Note that clicking OK has the same effect as clicking both the Select and Close buttons. Searching Using a Combination of Search Criteria Open the document /Samples/Infrastructure/Search.CATPart 1. Select the Edit->Search... command. The Search dialog box appears:

2. Enter in the Name field the object name. This is particularly useful if you renamed objects using the Feature properties tab of the Edit->Properties command, or the Properties contextual command. You can also use the asterisk (*) as a wildcard. For example, entering:
*

and using the default settings for the other options in the Search dialog box will search for and select all objects in the document. Similarly, entering:
Point*

will select all objects whose names begin with the character string "Point". Check the "Case sensitive" option if you want the search to be case sensitive. Note, however, that the other options allow you to filter your searches progressively. The list below the Name field stores the names you entered during previous searches so you can select them.The names are stored only as long as the Search dialog box remains open: closing the Search dialog box clears the list. 3. Specify the type in the Type field. By default, "*" appears in the Type field. To the right, the list box "in workbench" also contains "*". This means that the search will be performed on all types of elements created by all workbenches. In the list box, selecting a workbench filters the list of types in the Type field: for example, in you select the workbench "Part", the Type field will be filtered to contain only the element types available in Part documents. The same principle applies to the other document or workbench types. Note that the object type is NOT necessarily the name you see in the specification tree. When you select a new workbench, by default "*" remains in the Type field. Whichever workbench is selected in the "in workbench" list box, you can search for element types belonging to any other workbench by typing the name of the type in the "Type" field. If the element type belongs to only one workbench, the correct workbench name is displayed in the "in workbench" list box; otherwise, "*" appears. If you type only the first few characters of an object type, then press ENTER, the system will automatically display the full name of the type. If several types contain the same characters, the first name containing these characters is displayed. 4. Specify a color if you want to search for objects in a specific color. By default, "*" appears in the Color field. This means that the search will be performed on elements of any color. Select the desired color, or click More Colors... at the bottom of the color list to access the color chooser to select basic or previously custom colors, or add new custom colors. The option "From element" lets you use the color of an existing element. To do so, select the element whose color you want to use in your search. The selected color will be displayed in the Color field. Refer to "Displaying and Editing Graphic Properties" for a full description of how to use the color chooser. When you apply basic and custom colors to elements, and search for elements using these colors, a search query is generated, but the query syntax displayed when searching for custom colors now contains the RGB values of the color instead of the color name. This is useful, for example, if you modify your color palette (for example, by deleting the custom color, or deleting the color settings file in your settings folder) then retrieve a search query. Because the query references the RGB values of the color and not the color name, changes to the color palette will not affect the search: the search will always find elements referencing a color expressed using RGB values. The names of basic colors, however, remain the same.

5. Within a product structure, you can also search for elements in the product structure which possess certain properties. You assign properties to products (and parts in products) by right-clicking an element in the specification tree and selecting the Properties command from the contextual menu, clicking the Product tab in the Properties dialog box, and setting the properties in the Product frame. The properties you can search for (the same as those you assigned to the element) are: Part Number Revision Definition Nomenclature Product Description Component Description. If you type only the first few characters of a property, then press ENTER, the system will automatically display the full name of the property. Once you have chosen the property, type in the value of the property in the "of value" field. For example, if you assigned a description to the element, you must select the "Production Description" property then enter text included in the description. 6. Set the filter option in the "Look:" list box. The filter options are: Everywhere: searches the whole specification tree from top to bottom, to find objects created using all workbenches; if you are performing the search in a product structure document (in design mode), the search will be performed throughout the whole product structure, inside all the documents integrated in the product structure (if these documents are accessible in design mode) In "Element": the search will only locate objects belonging to "Element" , and that can be created using the current workbench, where "Element" is the name of the active object. For example, if you are using a Part document, objects created using the Part Design workbench will be searched, but NOT objects created using the Sketcher workbench. In a further example, let's assume you have a product document which includes several parts. Let's assume the product root name is "Product.1". In this case, the filter will display "In Product.1". Selecting the filter <In Product.1> will enable you to locate only the objects that can be created in the Product Structure workbench and that belong to "Product.1". The search does not reach the lower levels in the tree: the individual elements that make up the different parts will not be searched. From "Element" to bottom: searches the elements in the active "Element", to the bottom of the tree. In the previous example (a product including several parts), selecting the filter <From Product.1 to bottom> will let you locate all the objects contained in "Product.1", to the bottom of the tree, regardless of the workshop used to created them. From current selection: this option will only be available if you already selected objects before selecting the Search... command, and searches inside the selected objects to the bottom of the tree. This is particularly useful when you know the object in which you want to search: you simply select the object, then search inside the object. For example, to understand how this option works in our sample document: select "My Sketch" select the Edit->Search... command select the "From current selection" option enter the name of what you are searching for, for example "Point*" to search for all points click the Search button:

Several points are found and preselected:

click the Select button to select it. From search results: the search is performed on the list of objects preselected in the list at the bottom of the Search dialog box. 7. Click the Search button to start the search. The Search dialog box is resized to include a list containing the search results at the bottom of the dialog box. You can deselect items in the list by clicking on them. If the list is very long, you can search the list of selected objects using the "From search results" option which becomes available once the first search is performed. To do so, respecify a search string in the Name, Type, Color and/or Product Property fields, then click the Search button again. Check the "Alphabetical sorting" option to sort the search results alphabetically. The generated query field displays the search query formulated in the search language. This helps you to become familiar with the search language. For a complete description of the search language, refer to "Using the Search Language". Click the down arrow at the end of the "Generated queries" field to display previous search queries. Simply selecting a search query executes the search. Queries are also stored across sessions, because they are stored with your settings. This enables you to recover queries from one session to the next. The query displayed in the "Generated queries" field itself is editable. You can consequently enter your search queries directly. When you do so, and press ENTER, the fields for the corresponding search options in the Search dialog box are updated to reflect the search query. You can also use this language when you are using power input mode.

Storing Selections Using Selection Sets

This task explains how to group selections and store them in selection sets. Selection sets are not saved with your documents. Open the document /Samples/Infrastructure/SelectionSets.CATPart 1. Select several objects. For example, select two of the lines:

2. Point to the selected objects, right-click to display the contextual menu, and select the Selection Sets... command. The Selection Sets dialog box is displayed:

The list contains a highlighted item: <Current Selection>. The current selection contains the element you selected before selecting the Selection Sets... command.

3. Click the Create button. A selection set named "Set001", and containing the lines, is created. Each time you create a new selection set, the number is incremented. You can also rename the selection set using the text field at the bottom of the Selection Sets dialog box.

4. To add more elements to your selection set, click the selection set name in the list, continue selecting elements, then click the Add button. In our example, add the hole to the selection set and click the Add button:

You can add objects to any selection set, and to the <Current Selection>. If you want to recover your original selection, click <Current Selection> in the list. If you want to delete a selection set, select the selection set and click the Delete button. Note that you cannot delete the <Current Selection>. 5. Click the Close button. You can create a selection set quickly by selecting the objects, then right-clicking to select the Define Selection Set command. You can then use the Selection Sets... command to add objects, rename the selection set, or delete it.

Manipulating Objects

Undoing Actions
This task shows you how to reverse the last action. 1. Click the Undo icon or select the Edit->Undo command.

This cancels the last action performed.

2. If you want to undo one or more actions preceding the last one you simply have to repeat step 1. Performing an Undo action may cancel the active object itself. This is indicated by the caption Undo Active Object opposite the Edit->Undo command. If you do remove the active object in this way it can easily be recovered (see next task below). Some actions cannot be undone. When this is the case the Undo icon is grayed out.

Recovering Last Action Undone

This task shows you how to recover the last action undone. 1. Click the Redo icon or select the Edit->Redo command.

2. If you want to repeat the last action more than once, simply repeat step 1 as many times as required. The Redo can only be used to recover what you have canceled by performing an Undo (see previous task above). It cannot be used to perform actions not canceled by an Undo. A redo may recreate an active object. This is indicated by the caption Redo Active Object opposite the Edit->Undo command. Some actions cannot be redone. When this is the case the Redo action is grayed out.

Cutting and Pasting Objects

This task shows you how to remove the selection and paste it to the desired location. 1. Select the object you want to cut. 2. To cut, you can either: click the Cut icon select the Edit->Cut command select the Cut command in the contextual menu, or in the geometry area or the specification tree, drag the selection (although not a graphical cut, this is equivalent to the cut operation). This places what you cut in the clipboard. 3. To paste, you can either: click the Paste icon select the Edit->Paste command select the Paste command in the contextual menu, or in the geometry area or the specification tree, drop what you are dragging (see above). Note that the application workbenches offer a variety of specific cutting and pasting scenarios.

Copying and Pasting Objects

This task shows you how to copy the selection and paste it to the desired location. 1. Select the object you want to copy. 2. To copy, you can either: click the Copy icon select the Edit->Copy command select the Copy command in the contextual menu or in the geometry area or the specification tree, press and hold down the Ctrl key and drag the selection. This places what you copy in the clipboard. 3. To paste, you can either: click the Paste icon select the Edit->Paste command select the Paste command in the contextual menu or in the geometry area or the specification tree, drop what you are dragging (see above). Note that the application workbenches offer a variety of specific copying and pasting scenarios.

Deleting Objects
This task shows you how to delete an object. 1. Select the object or objects you wish to delete, either in the specification tree or in the geometry tree. The object(s) selected are highlighted in both the geometry area and the specification tree. 2. Select the Edit->Delete command or the Delete... command in the contextual menu. Deleting objects may lead to deleting other objects dependent on the object to be deleted. When this is the case, a dialog box appears identifying which features are impacted by the deletion, and prompting you to decide whether to delete the impacted features or not.

3. Click the More>> button when necessary for more advanced deletion possibilities:

4. Select OK to confirm.

Displaying and Editing Graphic Properties

This task shows you how to display and edit the graphic properties of a selected object. 1. Select the object. The object to be selected when using the Part Design application is the PartBody item in the specification tree. 2. Select the Edit->Properties command or select the Properties command on the contextual menu. A Properties dialog box similar to the one opposite is displayed:

3. Click the Graphic tab to display the graphic properties of the current object.

The graphic properties available for editing are: Fill Color (colors the current object) and transparency Edge Color, Linetype and Weight Line and Curve Color, Linetype and Weight Point Color and Symbol Show and Pick attributes Set as default 4. To set object colors, click the Color combo box for Fill. A list appears containing: a blank color field (No Name) a list of sixteen default colors from the color palette, ready for use the More Colors... option.

5. Select the desired color. The selected color is now displayed in the field in the combo box. Pointing the cursor over the combo box displays the name of the selected color. 6. To access more colors, or to create your own colors, click the More Colors... option at the bottom of the list to access the color palette. In the Basic Colors area, the first sixteen colors (in the top two rows) are the same as those in the previous list. The remaining four rows contain extra colors. The Custom Colors area contains sixteen free boxes in which you can place your custom colors.

7. Click the Define Custom Colors >> option to display the full color palette and color customization tools:

The colored area with the cross represents a color spectrum. Drag the cross inside the spectrum to instantaneously change the color in the small box below the spectrum. The HSL (Hue, Saturation and Luminance) and RGB (Red, Green and Blue) values vary according to where the cross is located. You can also enter HSL and RGB values in the fields provided to suit your exact color specifications. Move the arrow up or down to vary the brightness of the custom color.

8. Once you are happy with the color, click one of the free boxes in the Custom Colors area, then Click the Add to Custom Colors option to add the custom color.

9. Click on the custom color, then Apply. The color is now displayed in the Color fill field of the Graphic properties tab. 10. Click OK in the Properties dialog box. The color of the selected object is changed: 11. To make the part more or less transparent, drag the Transparency slider to set the appropriate value (between 0 and 255). Note that you can set either of two transparency modes: Screen Door Alpha Blending with the Performance tab using the Tools->Options command. For more information, refer to "Customizing Performance Settings". 12. To set color edges on parts, click the Color combo box for Edges and proceed the same way 13. To set edge line types and weight, use the appropriate combo boxes. 14. If you selected a line or curve, you can set line and curve color, linetype and weight the same way as for parts. 15. If you selected a point, you can set the point color in the same way as for parts. To select the symbol used to represent the point, select the symbol from the Symbol combo box. 16. In the Show and Pick field, check the Shown check box if you want the object to always be visible, in other words, to always be in show mode. For more information about the show and no show modes, refer to "Hiding and Showing Objects". 17. In the Show and Pick field, check the Pickable check box if you want the object to always be selectable. 18. Click Apply or OK to confirm.

Moving Objects Using the 3D Compass

About the 3D Compass

You can use a graphic manipulator referred to as the 3D compass to manipulate certain objects created and managed by certain applications (for example, FreeStyle Shaper, Assembly, DMU Navigator,...).

Which Objects Are We Talking About? You can only use the 3D compass with non-constrained objects, in other words, objects not linked together by constraints. However, you can manipulate groups of objects in assemblies which are linked to each other by constraints. A quick way to find out if you can work with the compass is to select the object. If a bounding box is displayed around the object, you can manipulate it using the compass. Note, however, that to see the bounding box appear, you must first check the option "Display manipulation bounding box" in the Visualization tab via the Tools->Options command. You can also use the compass to manipulate: viewpoint representations ("cameras") used to capture viewpoints materials (in CATIA - P2 mode using the Real Time Rendering application). The 3D compass is always active. You can show and hide the compass by toggling the View->Compass command. Note that hiding the compass does not deactivate it. The compass is displayed by default in the top right corner of the document. The letters X, Y and Z represent the axes. The Z axis is the default orientation. The point close to the Z axis is the free rotation handle used for freely rotating the compass and the document's objects at the same time. The red square is the compass manipulation handle you use to drag the compass and place on objects to be manipulated. You can also rotate objects around this point. The base of the compass, the XY plane, is the privileged plane. This concept is not useful when simply using the Select command. It is only useful when using application commands that use manipulators which require working planes, for example, when creating planar patches or modifying control points using the FreeStyle Shaper.

What Can You Do With the 3D Compass? The 3D compass lets you: manipulate viewpoints using the mouse and compass: this is just another way of panning and rotating all objects in the document at the same time move and rotate non-constrained objects using the mouse and compass Moving objects in this context means physically moving them so as to redefine their spatial coordinates with respect to the absolute axis system in a document. Moving should not be confused with panning an object, which simply modifies the viewpoint from which you look at an object: the position of the object in the document remains the same. move and rotate non-constrained objects using the Edit... contextual command lock the compass orientation snap the compass automatically onto a selected object set the plane in which you move objects parallel to the screen switch the privileged plane to the XZ or YZ planes of the compass use the privileged plane as a working plane in applications such as the the FreeStyle Shaper application, for example, when manipulating control point manipulators on planar patches and curves).

If you are also using the Assembly application, which provides a number of advanced positioning tools, consider the 3D compass as a preliminary tool for positioning components in space prior to fine positioning of those components within the assembly.

Manipulating Viewpoints Using the Mouse and Compass

This task explains how to manipulating viewpoints by simply dragging certain parts of the compass using the mouse. This is just another way of panning and rotating all objects in the document at the same time. You can: pan along the direction of any axis (X, Y or Z) of the compass rotate in a plane pan in a plane rotate freely about a point on the compass view the document perpendicular to any of the axes of the compass. You need access to a CATIA - P2 FreeStyle Shaper configuration to follow this scenario. Open the document /Samples/Infrastructure/Manipulators.CATPart.

Note that the 3D compass and the absolute axis at the bottom right of the document are aligned identically by default. 1. Rotate to see how the objects, 3D compass and the absolute axis are rotated together.

2. Point to the compass. The cursor shape changes to: . You will also notice that the following parts of the compass are highlighted as you point to them: compass axes arcs on the planes of the compass and the planes themselves. When you drag any part of the compass, the cursor shape changes to: . If you checked the option "Display manipulation bounding box" in the Visualization tab via the Tools->Options command, a box will appear around the selected object if it can be manipulated by the compass. In our example, point to and click on the planar patch to see the bounding box appear. The edges of the bounding box around a selected object always remain aligned with the compass axes. 3. Drag any axis on the compass. The viewpoint is panned along the direction of the axis. For example, dragging the Z axis upwards pans up along the Z axis like this:

4. Drag an arc on the compass. For example, dragging the arc YZ to the right rotates the objects in the plane subtended by the arc YZ like this:

Dragging close to the red square rotates the objects quickly; dragging further away from the red square rotates more slowly. The rotation axis used is the same as that used when rotating using the other rotation tools. 5. Drag a plane on the compass. For example, dragging to the right the plane subtended by the arc ZY moves the objects on the same plane like this:

Select the View->Render Style->Perspective command to perceive the effect more easily. 6. Drag the free rotation handle (the point at the top of the compass) to rotate the objects freely like this:

7. Click the letter for any axis to make that axis perpendicular to your eyepoint. Clicking the same letter reverses the point from which you view the objects. For example, clicking the letter Z lets you view the document along the Z axis like this:

Manipulating Objects Using the Mouse and Compass

Using the mouse and compass, you can manipulate not only viewpoints but also non-constrained objects recognized by the compass, by moving or rotating them. You do so by dragging and dropping the compass onto the object to be manipulated. You need access to a CATIA - P2 FreeStyle Shaper configuration to follow this scenario. Open the document /Samples/Infrastructure/Manipulators.CATPart. 1. Point to the compass manipulation handle (the red square located on the privileged plane at the base of the compass). The cursor shape changes to: . 2. Drag the compass. As you drag the compass, the cursor shape changes to: , and the compass now looks like this:

The axis is the Z axis by default. The square base represents the current privileged plane. The privileged plane is realigned with one of the planes on the object and is snapped to the object. 3. Release the mouse button to drop the compass onto the object. Dropping the compass onto the object snaps the compass to the object and selects it. The compass changes color; the default color is light green. You set this color using the Handles option in the Visualization tab via the Tools->Options command. In our example, drag and drop the compass onto the planar patch. One possible result could look like this:

Note that, in our example, the compass could also be oriented towards you, on the near side of the planar patch, depending on where you drop the compass. Once the compass is snapped to the object, you can begin to manipulate the object. You do so by simply dragging certain parts of the compass, exactly as you do to manipulate viewpoints as explained in "Manipulating Viewpoints Using the Mouse and Compass". This time, the object (and not the viewpoints) will be manipulated. 4. In our example, drag the Z axis of the compass to move the planar patch to the other side of the block, then drop to reposition the planar patch. While dragging, the compass and a representation of the planar patch are moved. The distance from the origin of the axis (the red square or compass manipulation handle located on the compass base) is displayed in real time as you move the object. The value displayed will be preceded by the "-" sign (negative) if you move the object in the direction opposite to the compass orientation.

The translation increments are preset: you cannot reset the translation increments displayed. When you drop the compass, the planar patch will now be positioned approximately like this:

You can also: rotate the object in a plane (by dragging one of the compass arcs): the degree of rotation is also displayed in real time move the object in a plane (by dragging one of the compass planes): the distance from the origin to the new location (along both axes in the plane) is displayed in real time rotate freely about a point on the compass (by dragging the free rotation handle at the top of the compass) as explained in Manipulating Viewpoints Using the Mouse and Compass. 5. Drag the compass away from the selected object and drop it. The compass is now disconnected from the object, but maintains its orientation:

6. To reorient the compass the same way as the absolute reference axis, and restore the compass to its original position in the top right corner of the document, drag and drop the compass onto the absolute reference axis. The compass is repositioned at the default position and takes the default orientation:

To achieve the same effect, you can also press and hold down the Shift key, then drag and drop the compass. Release the left mouse button before releasing the Shift key. The View->Reset Compass command also restores the compass to its original position, but does not restore the default orientation. If you checked the option "Display manipulation bounding box" in the Visualization tab via the Tools->Options command, a box will appear around the selected object if it can be manipulated by the compass. In our example, click on an object to see the bounding box appear:

You can then drag any of the edges of the box to move the object in the corresponding direction. Note also that the bounding box remains oriented the same way as the compass. You can also align the compass on objects that the compass cannot manipulate: this technique is useful if you want to detect a direction on the object for manipulating non-constrained objects. In our example, you could drag the compass onto the pad and align it with one of the pad edges like this:

You can then select the planar patch and drag the compass to move the planar patch in the same direction as the edge of the pad. This is the ideal solution for manipulating several objects at a time. To do so, select the first object, then CTRL-click on other objects to add them to your selection.

Manipulating Objects Using the Edit... Command

This task explains how to manipulate objects precisely, using the Edit... contextual command. You can: reset the position of the compass (and selected object) via its manipulation handle (red square), by specifying its X, Y and Z coordinates with respect to the center of the 3D scene translate the object (or just the compass) to a new position in increments along the X, Y and Z axes rotating the object (or just the compass) about the X, Y and Z axes in increments translate over a specified distance in the direction of the privileged plane translate over the distance between two elements (line/edge/plane) you select rotate through an angle you set, or an angle between two elements (line/edge/plane) you select. You can only use the Edit... contextual command with the same objects as those with which you can use the compass (for example, a planar patch). You need access to a CATIA - P2 FreeStyle Shaper configuration to follow this scenario. Open the document /Samples/Infrastructure/Manipulators.CATPart. 1. Drag and drop the compass onto the object, then point to the compass and right-click to display the 3D compass, or double-click the compass to display the contextual menu. In our example, drag and drop the compass onto the planar patch and right-click:

2. Select the Edit... command to display the Compass Manipulation dialog box:

The Compass Manipulation dialog box stays open during manipulation. Note that the current X, Y and Z coordinates of the compass manipulation handle (red square), with respect to the center of the 3D scene, are displayed in the corresponding fields for the Position option. In our example, the center of the 3D scene, in this case, is the point of intersection of the 3 planes located on the pad. 3. Reset the compass X, Y and Z coordinates of the compass to zero, using the Position option, then click the "Apply new position" button. In our example, because you dropped the compass onto the planar patch, the compass and the planar patch are moved to the center of the 3D scene as follows:

4. To translate the compass and planar patch by increments along an individual axis (X, Y or Z) using the Increments option, set the translation values for an axis, then click the "+" button or the "-" button to translate in forward or reverse direction respectively.

5. To translate an object along a vector derived from two objects you select, click the "Measure Distance" button and select the two elements. When you click the "Measure Distance" button, all options and fields in the dialog box are grayed out. You can select any of the following: a point a line or a plane. The value for the detected distance is highlighted in the appropriate fields, expressed in the units of the compass. Note that, depending on the compass orientation, some or all of the X, Y and Z coordinates may be calculated. If the first element is a line or a plane, you can then select a second element or enter a distance. For example, selecting a line implies that you want to translate the object in the direction of the line, and you can enter the distance for the translation in the Distance field. However, if you just select the two elements, the distance between the two is displayed in the Distance field, and the object will be translated over this distance and in the same direction. If the second element is a plane, the direction of translation is normal to the plane. Then, click either the "+" or the "-" button to the right of the "Distance" option to translate the object in the forward or reverse direction. 6. To rotate, set the rotation angle and click the "+" button or the "-" button for the axis about which you want to rotate. For example, with the object still located at the center of the 3D scene, rotating about the X axis produces this result:

7. To rotate the object through the angle between two elements, click the Measure Angle button and select the two elements. You can select a line or a plane. The angle is displayed in the Angle field. Then click the "+" button or the "-" button for the axis about which you want to rotate.

Snapping the Compass to Selected Objects Automatically

This task explains how to snap the compass to a selected object, as an alternative to dragging and dropping the compass onto the object. You need access to a CATIA - P2 FreeStyle Shaper configuration to follow this scenario. Open the document /Samples/Infrastructure/Manipulators.CATPart. 1. Point to the compass and right-click to display the contextual menu. 2. Select the command Snap automatically to selected object. 3. Select an object. In our example, select the planar patch:

The compass is snapped automatically only onto non-constrained objects recognized by the compass. The compass keeps its current alignment. As long as the command Snap automatically to selected object remains activated, the compass will be snapped automatically.

Locking the Current Compass Orientation

This task explains how to lock the current compass orientation. You need access to a CATIA - P2 FreeStyle Shaper configuration to follow this scenario. Open the document /Samples/Infrastructure/Manipulators.CATPart. 1. Point to the compass and right-click to display the contextual menu. 2. Select the Lock Current Orientation command. 3. Drag the compass. Note that as you drag the compass over objects, the compass symbol remains oriented the same. For example, if the default orientation was current before dragging, the symbol will remain like this while you drag:

When you drop the compass onto an object, this orientation will be kept. 4. To reorient the compass, select the Lock Current Orientation command again.

Locking the Privileged Plane Parallel to the Screen

This task explains how to force the privileged plane to be parallel to the screen plane. You need access to a CATIA - P2 FreeStyle Shaper configuration to follow this scenario. Open the document /Samples/Infrastructure/Manipulators.CATPart. 1. In our example, drag and drop the compass onto the planar patch like this:

2. Point to the compass and right-click to display the contextual menu. 3. Select the command Lock Privileged Plane Orientation Parallel to Screen. This forces the privileged plane parallel to the screen. This works even if you change viewpoints in the document. The compass is now oriented like this:

4. Manipulate the planar patch as desired. The privileged plane will remain parallel to the screen as you manipulate the object.

Swapping the Privileged Plane

This task explains how to swap to a different privileged plane (XZ or YZ). This command is not useful when simply using the Select command. It is only useful when using application commands that use manipulators which require working planes, for example, when creating planar patches or modifying control points using the FreeStyle Shaper. You need access to a CATIA - P2 FreeStyle Shaper configuration to follow this scenario. Open the document /Samples/Infrastructure/Manipulators.CATPart. 1. Activate the FreeStyle Shaper workbench. 2. Select the planar patch. 3.Click the Control Points icon Control points appear on the patch, and the Control Points dialog box appears. 4. Point to a control point on the patch. Manipulators appear:

Note that the manipulators, by default, are oriented in the same plane as the privileged plane of the compass, in the XY plane. 5. Drag the compass onto the patch and align it in the following direction:

6. Drop the compass onto the patch as follows:

The compass has now detected the orientation of the patch. 7. Drag the compass away from the patch and drop it into empty space (in other words, not on another object). The compass keeps the same orientation:

8. Point to the compass and right-click to display the contextual menu. 9. Select the command Make YZ the Privileged Plane. This means that you now want to orient the manipulators in the YZ plane of the compass. The manipulators are now located in the YZ plane:

Do not be confused by the fact that the compass axes do not change: the compass is reoriented to make the YZ the privileged plane, even though the axes on the compass still indicate that the privileged plane is still XY.

Keeping the Privileged Plane the Most Visible during Viewpoint Manipulations
This task explains how to keep the privileged plane visible during viewpoint manipulations. This command is not useful when simply using the Select command. It is only useful when using application commands that use manipulators which require working planes, for example, when creating planar patches or modifying control points using the FreeStyle Shaper. You need access to a CATIA - P2 FreeStyle Shaper configuration to follow this scenario. Open the document /Samples/Infrastructure/Manipulators.CATPart. 1. Activate the FreeStyle Shaper workbench. 2. Select the planar patch. 3. Click the Control Points icon Control points appear on the patch, and the Control Points dialog box appears. 4. Point to a control point on the patch. Manipulators appear:

Note that the manipulators, by default, are oriented in the same plane as the privileged plane of the compass, in the XY plane. 5. Drag the compass onto the patch and align it in the following direction:

6. Drop the compass onto the patch as follows:

The compass has now detected the orientation of the patch. Note that the manipulators, by default, are oriented in the same plane as the privileged plane of the compass. 7. Drag the compass away from the patch and drop it into empty space (in other words, not on another object). The compass keeps the same orientation:

8. Manipulate the viewpoint by, for example, rotating. Because rotating the viewpoint also rotates the compass, the privileged plane may be more or less visible. When you work with commands that use manipulators which require working planes, it may be difficult to work if the privileged plane is not always clearly visible:

9. Point to the compass and right-click to display the contextual menu.

10. Select the command Make Privileged Plane Most Visible. This time, the privileged plane is forced to be visible: the compass and the manipulators are reoriented accordingly:

11. Continue to rotate. You will notice that, as you rotate, the privileged plane switches, the compass is reoriented accordingly, so that the privileged plane always remains clearly visible. Each time this happens, the manipulators are also repositioned in the new privileged plane. This function is useful for both creation and modification commands.

Dragging and Dropping Icons and Objects

Dragging and Dropping Icons onto Objects

This task explains how to drag and drop icons onto objects to run commands, which is a quicker alternative to selecting commands or icons. Open the document /Samples/DragIconOntoObject.CATPart 1. Select the Select icon to enter selection mode, if it is not already activated. 2. In the sample document, drag the Edge Fillet icon from the toolbar onto a face of the pad. As soon as you point at the pad face, the face is highlighted and the pointer changes to this shape :

3. Release the mouse button. This displays the Edge Fillet dialog box, and you can proceed to create the fillet:

The drag and drop method of running commands is not available everywhere: refer to your workbench documentation for more details.

Dragging and Dropping Objects Onto Objects

This task explains how to drag and drop objects onto objects, which is a quick way to copy objects. Open the document /Samples/DragObjectOntoObject.CATPart 1. Select the Select icon to enter selection mode, if it is not already activated.

You will select a fillet and copy it to another location on the same part. 2. Select the fillet.

3. Press and hold down the Ctrl key and drag the fillet to another edge on the part. As soon as you point at the pad face, the face is highlighted and the pointer changes to this shape:

4. Release the Ctrl key and the mouse button. The fillet is copied to the selected edge:

You can also move the fillet, instead of copying it. To do so, simply drag the fillet to the new location. when you drag the fillet, the following symbol appears: . In certain cases, an object may be copied without pressing and holding down the Ctrl key before dragging, when you were expecting the object to be moved. In this case, you will be informed that a copy is being performed (and not a move) by the appearance of the symbol. This is typically the case when you attempt to drag an object created in one context (in one workshop) onto an object created in another context (workshop). So, within the same document window, the move is only allowed if the object onto which you drop your object can be edited in the current context (workshop). For example, you cannot drag (move) a part onto a line in a sketch: the part and the sketch were created in different workshops. The drag and drop method of running commands is not available everywhere: refer to your workbench documentation for more details.

Printing Documents

About Printing, Capturing Images and the Album

A certain number of identical functions are available in different parts of the software: you can print documents, capture and print images directly from the Capture toolbar, or print images from the album you can preview documents prior to printing, or preview images in the album you can save images to other formats using the Capture toolbar or the album you can copy images to the clipboard using the Capture toolbar or the album. The fact that these functions are shared make it easy to use the print, capture and album functions together. For more information about capturing images and using the album, refer to "Capturing and Managing Images for the Album".

Printing a Document Quickly without Customizing Print Settings

This task explains how to print a document quickly to the default printer using default print settings. You can only print a document if a default printer has been set up. On Windows, you print using the default printer (declared by your Windows system administrator). However, on UNIX, you will only be able to print once you have set up a printer, as explained in "Setting Up Your Printers on UNIX" . 1. Once your document is open, select the Quick Print icon .

The current document is sent to your default printer using the current print settings.

Previewing Documents Prior to Printing

This task explains how to preview documents prior to printing. Open the document /Samples/Infrastructure/Print.CATPart. 1. Select the File->Print command to display the Print dialog box:

2. Select the Preview... option to display the Print Preview window:

You can also use the Fit All In icon

and zooming commands inside the Print Preview

to print. window, or select the Quick Print icon You can also preview the document size in real size by zooming. To zoom, press and hold down the middle mouse button in the Print Preview window, then click the left mouse button and drag (still holding the middle mouse button down). Zoom up or down to increase or decrease the document size; the percentage of the real size is displayed top right as you zoom. For example, if you want to display the document at its real size, zoom to reach 100%.

The Preview window is also available to preview images: via the Print icon in the Tools->Image->Capture... command via the Preview icon in the Tools->Image->Album... command.

Customizing Print Settings Before Printing Your Documents

This task explains how to customize the settings in the Print dialog box and print your documents. You can only print a document if a default printer has been set up. On Windows, you print using the default printer declared by your Windows system administrator. However, on UNIX, you can only print a document if a default printer has been set up using the File -> Printer Setup... command, as explained in "Setting Up Your Printers on UNIX". Open the document /Samples/Infrastructure/Print.CATPart. 1. Select the File->Print command to display the Print dialog box. The type of printer you choose determines the default settings in the dialog box:

The Print window is also available via the Print icon in the Tools->Image->Capture... command and the Tools->Image->Album... command. The area to the right is a preview area displaying a shaded rectangle representing the size of the image to be printed, using the default paper format with the default margins. The image size matches the real size of the geometry area in your document window, with respect to the selected paper format. Any changes you make to page orientation, page setup (paper format, paper margins), image scale and position are instantaneously displayed in this area. Resizing the document window resizes the image accordingly. You can also resize the image by dragging the image handles (using the left mouse button). The proportional relationship between image width and height is always maintained. Note that these handles are not available if you check the Fit in Page option (the default setting).

2. Select a printer, or check the Print to file check box and enter the name of a file. Refer to "Printing To a File" for more information. 3. Set the page orientation. The current page setup (page format and page size) set using the Page setup... option is displayed as a reminder. Orientation settings are: Portrait: sets portrait orientation

Landscape: sets landscape orientation

Best orientation: if you resize the image beyond the page margins (displayed in red in the image to the right), Best orientation keeps the image to be printed at its original size, but automatically changes the page orientation (as displayed in the preview area on the right of the dialog box) to fit the image into the page. 4. Set the image position and size of the image to be printed. This involves changing the position of the image on the selected paper format, and scaling the image. To do so, you need to uncheck the Fit in Page option first (if it is checked) to access the position and size options. To scale the image, drag the image handles, enter the scale percentage or use the scale spin box. Whichever method you use, the scale field and the image width and height are updated:

You can also use the Fit in Page option which, used in conjunction with Best orientation, scales the image up to the largest size which still fits into the current paper format. This is the default setting. Clicking the Fit in Page option deactivates the other options in the Position and Size area, and the image resize handles are no longer available. To position the image, you can: click the Center option (to center the image) click the Origin option (to position the image bottom left, at the origin) drag the image to the new position or enter the position of the bottom and left corner of the image, with respect to the paper margins.

5. Click the page setup option to display the Page setup dialog box, and click OK when you have finished. You can: choose a standard paper format reset paper margins or reset printer defaults.

To set the paper format, select the format from the Name list. If you set a new format, the image of the paper format and the image to be printed are resized accordingly. If the format selected is incompatible with the printer currently selected, a message will inform you that the format should not exceed the dimension for the printer. However, this does not prevent you from setting the paper format. In our example, the first image uses the A4 ISO format, and the second the A3 ISO format: The new paper format and corresponding page size are displayed in the Page Orientation option box. To set the paper margins, enter values for the Left, Right, Top and Bottom margins, The example shows how the new margins (represented by dashed lines) affect the position of the image:

6. Click the Options... button to access the Options dialog box and set the Color options determining the type of color output.

Set the color type for the image to be printed: Full color: true color image Grayscale: grayscale image (produces a smaller print file) Monochrome. The gamma factor (between 0.1 and 5.0). A gamma factor of 0.1 produces a dark image, whereas a factor of 5.0 produces a lighter image. Check the Print white vectors as black check box if you want to print white vectors as black on the resulting printout. 7. Click the Banner tab and set the banner options: the first field uses the $USER, $DATE and $TIME variables to print information about the current print job in the banner Position: setting Position to None removes the banner Insert logo: check this check box if you want to insert a graphic logo in the banner, and select the button to navigate in your file system and select the graphic file to be used as the banner. The banner option is also available when using the Generative Drafting application.

8. Click the Various tab and set the various options.

Set the Rendering Quality factor which determines the quality of printed output: low (screen): the quality of the printed output matches the screen resolution medium highest. The higher the setting, the longer the print time, the larger the print file, the higher the image quality. This option does not impact print previewing. Set the Line Width Specification: Absolute: original linetype specifications are preserved Scaled: the print image scale is applied to linetypes No thickness and Line Type Specification: Absolute or Scaled. Set the Line Cap option to choose how line ends are drawn (useful for drafting): Flat Square Round. This option does not impact print previewing. 9. Select OK successively in each dialog box to confirm all your print settings and print the document.

Printing To a File
This task explains how to print to a file. Open the document /Samples/Infrastructure/Print.CATPart. 1. Select the File->Print command to display the Print dialog box. The type of printer you choose determines the default settings in the dialog box.

You can also print to a file via the Print icon in the Tools->Image->Capture... command and the Tools->Image->Album... command. 2. Select a printer name. 3. Check the Print to File check box:

4. Enter a file name, or click the File Name... button to display the Print to File dialog box:

5. Type the file name, then click the Save button to save the file and return to the Print dialog box. The file is saved with the .prn extension (the only extension available). The information in the file depends on the printer you chose in the Print dialog box. 6. Click the Apply or OK button to save the file.

7. To print the file, open an MS-DOS window (on Windows) and use the copy command, for example: copy myfile.prn LPT1 where "LPT1" is the local print port, or if the printer is on a network: copy myfile.prn \\servername\printername where "servername"is the name of the print server, and "printername" is the name of the printer. On UNIX, use the operating system command appropriate for your platform.

Printing on UNIX
This task describes how to quickly set up a printer and print a document on UNIX using printer setup defaults. You can only print a document on UNIX if at least one printer has been set up using the File -> Printer Setup... command. Setting up a printer creates a printer configuration file, needed for printing, in $HOME/CATSettings/Printers. For more information and advanced printer setup scenarios, refer to "Setting Up Your Printers on UNIX" . 1. Select the File->Printer Setup... command to display the Printer Setup dialog box.

Note that the Available printers field is empty the first time you use this command. 2. Click the Add... button to display the Printer Properties dialog box. Note that this dialog box presents a number of default settings. For the purposes of this task, you can use default settings in most cases.

3. In the Printer group box, enter a comment describing the printer name. Use a meaningful comment as printer name, for example, My PostScript Printer. The name you enter will be visible on the list of printers to choose from when using the File ->Print... command. For the purposes of this task, leave the driver set to Post Script, and do not click the Advanced Configuration... button. A PostScript printer is probably the most accessible printer on your network. Use the defaults in the Paper Format group box. 4. In the Submission Scripts group box, click the combo box opposite the Default Queue Name and select a physical printer from the list of printers available on your network:

5. Click the OK button to redisplay the Printer Setup dialog box which now looks like this:

This creates the following printer configuration file: $HOME/CATSettings/Printers/PLOT0000.plot_cfg. Note that, for upward compatibility reasons, CATIA Version 4 UNIX print drivers are supported. The specific parameter files for these drivers are delivered in the following directory:
/usr/DassaultSystemes/B03/OS_a/startup/PrintServices/PrintDriverData

For Versatec drivers, the system searches for the file "prmfil.dat" in this directory. If it exists, the file is used. If not, the system searches the Versatec plot configuration file for the declaration:
export VGSDIR=EXTERNAL

and, if it finds this declaration, uses the variables set in the declaration part of the submission script associated with the plotter. If this declaration does not exist, it searches for a declaration like this:
export VGSDIR=path

where "path" is the path of a directory containing all the Versatec files, and then sets the appropriate variables. Note that, because you have now set up a printer, the Remove, Configure... and Test option buttons are now available. For more information about these options, refer to "Setting Up Your Printers on UNIX". 6. Click the Test button to send a test print job to the printer, or click the Quick . Print icon 7. If you want to set other print settings, or preview the document prior to printing, click the Quit button in the Printer Setup dialog box, then select the File->Print command to display the Print dialog box:

Note that the printer name you created previously is displayed in the Printer Name field. 8. Click the OK button to print the document.

Capturing and Managing Images for the Album

Capturing Simple Images

This task explains how to capture images. 1. Select the Tools->Image->Capture... command to display the capture toolbar: Note that the command activated by default in the capture toolbar depends on the type of document active when you display the toolbar. When a part (or assembly) document is active, the Pixel command is activated by default. When viewing only the specification tree in a document, the Vector command is activated by default. When a drawing document is activated, the Vector command is activated by default: or the Vector icon to choose between a pixel or a 2. Click the Pixel icon vector image. In Shading mode, in which edges are not displayed, capturing vector images is not useful, and produces images that cannot be viewed in the album: you capture only lines and edges in vector mode, not shaded surfaces. 3. Click the Album icon to capture the image and store it in the album.

A message appears in the status bar informing you that the captured image has been stored in the album, and specifies the image name. 4. Select the Tools->Image->Album... command to display the album. The album is displayed, listing the current contents of the album.

The contents of the album are stored on your system in a non-editable file in the location defined by the CATTemp variable. Deleting this file deletes the contents of the album.

Capturing Selected Areas of Images

This task shows you how to capture selected areas of images. 1. Select the Tools->Image->Capture... command to display the capture toolbar: 2. Click in the geometry area and drag to create a bounding outline around the area to be captured, then release the mouse button. The bounding outline remains highlighted as illustrated:

3. Click the Album icon to capture the image and store it in the album. 4. Select the Tools->Image->Album... command to display the album, and double-click the image to preview it. The selected area of the image has been captured.

Previewing Images in the Album

This task explains how to display images in the album. 1. Select the Tools->Image->Album... command to display the album contents.

The system automatically assigns names to each image. Images are named "Capture_xxx", where "xxx" is a number from 001 to 999. You can display images in the preview area to the right by selecting them in the list. This allows you to easily identify the image content. 2. Select an image from the list and click the Preview icon the list to display the Print Preview window: or double-click the image name in

3. Select OK to exit the Print Preview window.

4. This time, select several images in the list. You can perform multiple selections by Ctrl-clicking, Shift-clicking or dragging using the left mouse button. Our example shows that all images in the album have been selected:

5. Click the Preview icon

All selected images are now displayed together in the Print Preview window. Performance and image quality will be determined by the number of images on the preview page.

You can also use the Fit All In icon and zooming commands inside the Print Preview window.

Renaming Images in the Album

This task explains how to rename images in the album. 1. Select the Tools->Image->Album... command to display the album contents. The system automatically assigns names to each image. Image names are "Capture_xxx", where "xxx" is a number from 001 to 999.

2. To rename an image, click in the text box and enter the new name, then press the Enter key to confirm. In our example, we want to rename "Capture_004" to "iso_view": If the new name exceeds the size of the text field, a horizontal scroll bar appears at the bottom of the name list when you press the Enter key to confirm the new name. In our example, we renamed "iso_view" to "iso_view_of_my_new_part." The scroll bar allows you to scroll to read the full name.

Deleting Images from the Album

This task explains how to delete images from the album. 1. Select the Tools->Image->Album... command to display the album contents:

2. Select the image(s) to be deleted from the album. In our example, we want to delete "Capture_000".

3. Click the Erase icon to erase the selected image. The image list is updated. In our example, "Capture_000" has been deleted.

Copying Images to the Clipboard (Windows Only)

This task explains how to copy images from the album to the clipboard, for integration into OLE-compliant application documents. 1. Select the Tools->Image->Album... command to display the album. 2. Select the image(s) to be copied to the clipboard.

3. Click the Copy icon

The selected image is copied to the clipboard, from where it can then be pasted into another application document (for example, a word processing package). 4. Paste the image into the external application. In our example, the selected image has been pasted into Microsoft Word:

You paste data into OLE-compliant documents using either the Paste command or the Paste Special... command: the Paste command simply copies the data into the OLE-compliant application the Paste Special... command offers two modes: you can either paste (embed) the data as normal, or link the copied data to its source. For general information about linking and embedding data from CATIA Version 5 documents in OLE-compliant applications, refer to "Using CATIA Version 5 Data in OLE-Compliant Applications" . There is a quicker alternative: you can also select the Tools->Image->Capture... command and simply click the Copy icon in the Capture toolbar. This captures the image and copies it directly to the clipboard. The image is not stored in the album.

Saving Images to Other Formats

This task explains how to save images in the album to other formats. 1. Select the Tools->Image->Album... command to display the album. 2. Select the image(s) to be saved to another format. The formats to which you can save depend on the format (pixel or vector) of the image you selected.

3. Click the Save As... icon . If you selected a pixel image, the following dialog box is displayed:

If you selected a vector image, the following dialog box will be displayed:

4. Enter a name for the file.

5. Select a format from the list. The formats you can save to depend on the format (pixel or vector) in which the image was originally saved. For pixel images, the formats are: HP/RTL (UNIX only) JPEG 75% (*.jpg) TIFF True Color (*.tif) TIFF Indexed Packbit (*.tif) TIFF True Color Packbit (*.tif) TIFF Indexed (*.tif) TIFF Grey Scale Packbit (*.tif) TIFF BW Packbit (*.tif) RGB (SGI Format) Not Compressed (*.rgb) Windows Bitmap (*.bmp) (Windows only) For vector images, the formats are: Windows Metafile (Windows only) PostScript. The following CGM vector formats are supported: CGM ISO CGM CALS CGM ATA. 6. On UNIX only, and if you save to a vector format, click the Options... button to set further save options associated with saving rasterized images: DPI: resolution in dots per inch (DPI) width height and click OK or Cancel. Note that high quality images require longer computation time. 7. Click the Save button. You do not need to open the album first to save images to other formats. The Save As... icon is also available by selecting the Tools->Image->Capture... command and clicking the Save icon in the Capture toolbar, allowing you to save to a file directly (without saving the image in the album).

Printing Images from the Album

This task explains how to print images. 1. Select the Tools->Image->Album... command to display the album contents:

2. Select the image(s) to be printed. 3. Click the Print icon to display the Print dialog box:

Images are printed the same way as any other document. Refer to "Printing Documents" for a full description of how to print. You do not need to open the album first to print images. The Print command is also available by selecting the Tools->Image->Capture... command and clicking the Print icon in the Capture toolbar, allowing you to print the file directly (without saving the image in the album).

Viewing Objects

Activating Viewing Tools Using the Mouse

You do not have to use the viewing tool commands or icons to perform all viewing operations. For quick access, you can also use just the mouse to activate a certain number of viewing tools, as indicated in the table below:

To use the mouse to... Do this... Center the display at a specific location Click the middle mouse button. Pan Drag using the middle mouse button. Press and hold down the middle mouse button, Rotate then the left mouse button, and drag (still holding both buttons down). Press and hold down the middle mouse button, Zoom then click the left mouse button and drag (still holding the middle mouse button down).

The SpaceBall or SpaceMouse can be used, in addition to the mouse, to perform graphic viewing manipulations (zoom, pan, rotate, etc.); the requisite drivers are delivered with these devices. Clicking on the corresponding icon runs the corresponding command once only. Using the View->Modify commands or pressing and holding down the middle mouse button activates a permanent viewing mode for each command, until you click to exit. Note: See "Hiding and Showing Objects" for information about showing and hiding, and "Using Rendering Styles" for hidden line rendering.

Fitting All Geometry in the Geometry Area

This task explains how to fit the current document contents into the geometry area. 1. Select the View->Fit All In command, or click the Fit All In Fit All In zooms the current view out so that all the document contents fit into the space available in the geometry area. icon.

Panning
This task explains how to move the current document contents by panning the camera viewpoint. 1. Select the View->Pan command, or click the Pan 2. Drag (left or right mouse button) to a new location, then release the mouse button. icon.

Zooming In
This task explains how to zoom in by predetermined increments. 1. Select the View->Modify->Zoom In command, or click the Zoom In You zoom in by one increment each time you click on the icon. To zoom up close (as illustrated), click on the icon several times in succession. icon.

You can also use the View->Zoom In Out command and drag (left mouse button) to zoom in progressively, not by increments.

Zooming Out
This task explains how to zoom out by predetermined increments. 1. Select the View->Modify->Zoom Out command,or click the Zoom Out icon. You zoom out by one increment each time you click on the icon. To zoom out (as illustrated), click on the icon several times in succession.

You can also use the View->Zoom In Out command and drag (left mouse button) to zoom out progressively, not by increments.

Zooming In On An Area
This task explains how to zoom in on an area. 1. Select the View->Zoom Area command. 2. Drag (left mouse button) to draw the bounding outline containing the area on which you want to zoom in. The area now viewed is the area you captured inside the bounding outline.

Viewing Along a Normal to a Plane

This task explains how to view an object along a perpendicular to a selected plane 1. Select the View->Modify->Normal View command or click the Normal View icon. 2. Select a plane. The object is projected onto the selected plane so you can now view along a normal to the plane.

Rotating
This task explains how to rotate an object. 1. Select the View->Rotate command, or click the Rotate 2. Press and hold down the left mouse button to see the rotation sphere symbol appear around the object. 3. Still holding the button down, drag to rotate. 4. Click to stop rotation. icon.

Navigating

Navigating in Examine Mode

Navigating in Examine Mode is the default mode. You can examine your document as you would from the outside by moving around the document's perimeter, or as you would from within, turning your head to view or moving closer (zoom in, zoom out) to different objects. For more information, see "Activating Viewing Tools Using the Mouse". You can also access the Examine mode via the Examine icon toolbar, available when using the beginners walk and fly modes. in the View

Navigating in Walk Mode

In Walk mode, you can walk forward and backward as well as turn right or left as you walk along the horizontal view plane you define. Two walk modes are available: Beginner's mode Advanced mode for experienced users. Before using the Walk navigation mode, you must be in a perspective view (View->Render Style->Perspective).

Beginners Walk Mode

This task shows you how to navigate through a document in beginner's walk mode. Beginner's walk mode commands are single-action commands. Releasing the mouse button means you exit the command. You can only move forward in beginner's walk mode. Open Platform.model in the Samples/Infrastructure directory. You need a V4 Integration license to open this sample document. 1. Select View->Navigation Mode->Walk. The icons used in the beginner's walk mode appear in the View toolbar: These commands are also available via View->Modify in the menu bar. The navigation compass is displayed. The horizontal indicator to the right of the compass helps you keep track of your horizontal view plane.

It consists of: an incremented semi-circle a green point that represents the object's position fine lines (forming a "V") that represent the field of vision. When the green point is within these lines, you can see the object in the geometry area a horizontal view plane indicator to the right of the compass 2. Click the Turn Head icon in the View toolbar then drag (left mouse button) to define your starting position 3. Release at desired location.

4. Click the Walk

icon, then click the left mouse button to begin to walking:

You begin to walk forward in the chosen direction 5. Still holding the left button down, drag to the right or left to change direction. Dragging to the left lets you view the object as if you had turned your head to the left; dragging to the right produces the same effect in the opposite direction 6. Bring the cursor back into the orange rectangle to continue walking forward in the new direction.

7. To modify your speed, click the Accelerate or Decelerate icon one or more times, then click the Walk icon again followed by the left mouse button to pursue your walk. Note: The size of the arrow in the navigation compass reflects the speed of your walk. 8. To return to the default navigation mode, click the Examine mode in the View toolbar icon

Advanced Walk Mode

This task shows you how to navigate through a document in Walk mode. Before using the Walk navigation mode, you must be in a perspective view (View -> Render Style -> Perspective). It is easier to walk through documents in contexts where you would find a virtual ground, i.e. in buildings, planes or ships for example. Open Platform.model in the Samples/Infrastructure directory. You need a V4 Integration license to open this sample document. 1. Select View ->Navigation Mode ->Walk. The navigation compass is displayed in the geometry area. It consists of: An incremented semi-circle A green point that represents the object's position Fine lines that represent the field of vision. When the green point is within these lines, you can see the document in the geometry area For the walk mode, a horizontal view plane indicator to the right of the compass 2. Press and hold down the middle mouse button to define the horizontal view plane 3. Still holding the button down, drag to the left or to the right to determine the direction in which you wish to walk.

In the Walk mode, press and hold down the middle mouse button until you've finished navigating. 4. When in the direction in which you wish to walk, click the left mouse button to begin walking. You begin to walk forward in the chosen direction.

An arrow indicating the direction in which you are walking appears in the navigation compass. 5. Still holding the middle button down, drag left or right to change direction: Dragging to the left lets you view the object as if you had turned your head to the left; dragging to the right produces the same effect in the opposite direction. 6. Bring the cursor back into the orange rectangle to continue your walk forward in the new direction

Pressing the PageUp and PageDown keys modifies your speed. Speed is indicated in the status bar. The size of the arrow in the navigation compass reflects the speed of your walk 7. Click the left mouse button again to reverse direction: You begin to walk backward, away from the target. Note: The left and right are now defined as if you were walking away from the target with the your back towards it.

Navigating in Fly Mode

In Fly mode you can move upward or downward on any horizontal view plane as you move forward or backward (advanced mode only). The horizontal indicator to the right of the compass helps you keep track of your horizontal view plane. Two fly modes are available: Beginner's mode Advanced mode for experienced users. Before using the Fly navigation mode, you must be in a perspective view (View->Render Style->Perspective).

Beginner's Fly Mode

This task shows you how to navigate through a document in beginner's fly mode. Beginner's fly mode commands are single-action commands. Releasing the mouse button means you exit the command. You can only move forward in beginner's fly mode. Open Platform.model in the Samples/Infrastructure directory. You need a V4 Integration license to open this sample document. 1. Select View->Navigation Mode->Fly The icons used in the beginner's fly mode appear in the View toolbar.

These commands are also available via View->Modify in the menu bar. icon in the View toolbar then drag (left mouse 2. Click the Turn Head button) to define your starting position 3. Release at desired location.

4. Click the Fly flying:

icon, then click the left mouse button to begin to

You begin to fly forward in the chosen direction. 5. Still holding the left button down, drag to the right or left to change direction. Dragging to the left lets you view the object as if you had turned your head to the left; dragging to the right produces the same effect in the opposite direction 6. Bring the cursor back into the orange rectangle to continue flying forward in the new direction. or Decelerate icon 7. To modify your speed, click the Accelerate one or more times, then click the Fly icon again followed by the left mouse button to pursue your fly. Note: The size of the arrow in the navigation compass reflects the speed of your fly. When you collide with a solid object when flying, you will slide along the object's surface, and you will no longer fly through the object, providing a more realistic effect. This feature is also available in Advanced Fly mode. Pressing the Shift key and dragging lets you bank left or right. Note that the compass and orange rectangle are no longer used. You can use the option "Gravitational effects when navigating" in the Visualization tab, accessed via the Tools->Options command, to fix the X, Y or Z axis during navigation.While turning in Fly mode, this creates the impression that the user viewpoint tilts or banks with respect to the fixed axis, as in a real plane. 8. To return to the default navigation mode, click the Examine mode icon in the View toolbar

Advanced Fly Mode

This task shows you how to navigate through a document in Advanced Fly mode. Before using the Fly navigation mode, you must be in a perspective view (View->Render Style ->Perspective). Fly is used in exactly the same way as Walk, the only difference being that in Fly mode you can move upward or downward on any horizontal view plane as you move forward or backward. Open Platform.model in the Samples/Infrastructure directory. You need a V4 Integration license to open this sample document. 1. Click the Fly Mode Mode ->Fly icon in the View toolbar or select View ->Navigation

2. Press and hold down the middle mouse button to define the initial horizontal view plane 3. Still holding the button down, drag to the left or to the right to determine the direction in which you wish to fly In the Fly mode, press and hold down the middle mouse button until you've finished navigating. 4. When in the direction in which you wish to fly, click the left mouse button to begin flying. You begin to fly forward in the chosen direction.

An arrow indicating the direction in which you are flying appears in the navigation compass. 5. Still holding the middle button down, drag left or right to change direction: Dragging to the left lets you view the object as if you had turned your head to the left; dragging to the right produces the same effect in the opposite direction. 6. Bring the cursor back into the orange rectangle to continue flying forward in the new direction:

Pressing the PageUp and PageDown keys modifies your speed. Speed is indicated in the status bar. The size of the arrow in the navigation compass reflects the speed of your fly. 7. Click the left mouse button again to reverse direction: You begin to fly backwards, away from the target. When flying backwards, the up and down are reversed.

You can use the option "Gravitational effects when navigating" in the Visualization tab, accessed via the Tools->Options command, to fix the X, Y or Z axis during navigation.While turning in Fly mode, this creates the impression that the user viewpoint tilts or banks with respect to the fixed axis, as in a real plane.

Changing Views
Individual views are created as you navigate through your design in examine, walk and fly modes. Views are stored and can be reviewed. In walk and fly modes, views are created each time you pause during your walkabout or fly around. This task shows you how to change views. Open Platform.model in the Samples/Infrastructure directory. You need a V4 Integration license to open this sample document 1. Navigate in Examine mode (zoom, pan, etc.) to create and save several different views 2. Select the View->Modify->Previous View command. The previous view is displayed in the geometry area. 3. Select the View->Modify->Previous View command again.

4. Select the View->Modify->Next View command. The next saved view is displayed in the geometry area.

Viewing Objects against the Ground

Ground lets you visually insert a plane at the ground level of your document, thus enabling you to recognize when your document is viewed the right way up. When you first access a document, the plane parallel or tangent to the bottom point of your document is considered to be the ground. This task shows you how to show and hide the ground. Open Platform.model in the Samples/Infrastructure directory. You need a V4 Integration license to open this sample document. 1. Select View->Ground. The ground plane is displayed in the geometry area. To hide the ground, simply repeat the same step. 2. Drag (left mouse button) the ground up or down to a new location, then release the mouse button. The ground is repositioned as defined.

Magnifying
This tasks explains how to obtain a magnified view of your document in a separate window. 1. Select the View->Magnifier... command. The Magnifier window opens containing a magnified section of your document:

The section magnified is defined by the magnifier viewport which appears over the object in your document:

Note that the magnifier viewport has handles: the "+" symbol lets you move the viewport the handles in the corners let you resize the viewport. 2. Point to the + symbol and drag it to move the viewport and magnify another area of the document:

3. Point to one of the handles and drag it to size the magnified area up and down. While you drag, the symbol appears.

All the viewing and manipulations performed in the document window are also reflected in the Magnifier window. For example, rotate the object to see how the object is also rotated in the Magnifier window:

Looking At Objects
This tasks explains how to look at the document in a specific direction by targeting through a user-defined viewport. 1. Select the View->Modify->Look At command. 2. Drag (left mouse button) slowly to display the viewport. As you begin to drag, a rectangle with two diagonals appears and continues to grow as long as you continue to drag. This rectangle represents the viewing window of the future view.

3. Continue dragging to move around, resize and reposition the viewport. The viewport is then shaped like a pyramid: your eyepoint is located at the vertex of the pyramid. You can resize the viewport by dragging the middle mouse button.

4. Release the button. You now see what is targeted inside the viewport. You can also press and hold down both Shift then the middle mouse button for a quicker result.

Turning Your Head To View An Object

This tasks explains how to view an object by simulating what happens when you turn your head to look at the scene. 1. Select the View->Modify->Turn Head command, or click the Turn Head icon in the View toolbar. 2. Drag (left mouse button). A navigation symbol appears to help you understand what happens as you drag. 3. Release at the desired location. In our example, dragging to the right lets you view the object as if you had turned your head.

Hiding and Showing Objects

Hiding Objects
This task explains how to hide objects by transferring them to the No Show space (they are no longer displayed). 1. Select an object. In our example, select the line.

2. Click the Hide/Show icon, or select the View->Hide/Show->Swap Hide/Show command. The object is no longer displayed: it has been transferred into the No Show space. In our example, the line is no longer displayed. Note also that if you have several document windows open containing the same objects, the object is transferred to the No Show space in each document window. 3. Click the Hide/Show icon again to display the object in the Show space. After selecting an object, you can also use select the Edit->Properties command, click the Graphic tab, and set the Shown option to achieve the same effect.

Displaying Hidden Objects

This task explains how to display objects transferred to the no show area. 1. Display the same geometry as in the preceding example, In our example, a line which was originally displayed is now in the no show area.

2. Click the No Show icon to display the contents of the no show area. In our example, you now see only the line. The geometry area changes color to indicate you are now viewing the No Show space.

3. Click the No Show icon again to return to the Show space. You can continue working on objects in the No Show space. You can also select objects and transfer them back to the Show space using the Hide/Show icon.

Using Rendering Styles

Wireframe (NHR)
This tasks explains how to display objects in wireframe mode. 1. Select the View->Render Style->Wireframe (NHR) command or click the icon. Wireframe Setting a shaded part to NHR has the following effect:

Hidden Line Removal (HLR)

This tasks explains how to display objects in hidden line removal mode. 1. Select the View->Render Style->Hidden Line Removal (HLR) command or click the Hidden Line Removal Setting a shaded part to HLR has the following effect: icon.

Quick Hidden Line Removal (HRD)

This tasks explains how to display objects in quick hidden line removal mode. 1. Select the View->Render Style->Quick Hidden Line Removal (HRD) command or click the Quick Hidden Line Removal Setting a shaded part to HRD has the following effect: icon.

Shading (SHD)
This tasks explains how to display objects in shading mode. 1. Select the View->Render Style->Shading (SHD) command or click the icon. Shading Setting a part in NHR mode to SHD mode has the following effect:

Shading with Edges (SHD+E)

This tasks explains how to display objects in shading mode with edges. 1. Select the View->Render Style->Shading with Edges (SHD+E) command or click the Shading with Edges Setting a shaded model to SHD+E has the following effect: icon.

Shading with Texture

This tasks explains how to display objects in shading mode with edges. 1. Select the View->Render Style->Shading with Texture command or click the icon. Shading with Texture 2. Apply a material to the object to see the effect. The Shading with Texture and Edges icon adds edges to the textured object.

Displaying Perspective and Parallel Views

This tasks explains how to display objects in perspective or parallel views. 1. Select the Render Style->Perspective command, or the Render Style->Parallel command. Perspective is related to the size of the object being viewed, and the distance of the object from the observer. Note that, before using the Walk and Fly navigation modes, you must be in a perspective view.

Customizing the View Mode

This tasks explains how to use the customize and apply view parameters. 1. Select the View->Render Style->Customize View command. The "Custom View Modes" dialog box appears. If this is the first time you are using the command, the view settings for the current document will be checked in the dialog box. In our example opposite, the Shading parameter is checked: this means that the view mode for the current document is "Shading". 2. Customize your own view parameters by checking or unchecking the appropriate options. In certain cases, checking one option may also activate other options. Each time you check or uncheck an option, the current view is updated dynamically to take your settings into account. 3. Select OK if you want to save your customized view parameters, or Cancel to exit without saving them. If you selected OK, your view parameters will be stored with your settings. If this is the case, you will be able to apply these settings to the current document by selecting: the View->Render Style->Apply Customized View command or, the icon in the list of rendering options in the View toolbar.

Setting Lighting and Depth Effects

Setting Lighting Effects

This tasks explains how to vary ambient lighting effects. 1. Select the View->Lighting... command to display the Light Source Editor dialog box. The default light source settings look like this...

... and produce a lighting effect, for example, like this:

Note that the One Light Source icon is activated by default. The sphere indicates the current lighting direction. The handle on the sphere indicates the direction from which the light is being projected: by default, the light is coming from the top left. You can drag the handle around (using the left mouse button) to change the lighting direction. The new lighting effect is created instantaneously as you drag the handle. A slider at the bottom of the dialog box lets you adjust light source brightness. 2. Drag the handle down and towards the bottom right: the light is now coming from the bottom right:

3. Click the Two Light Source icon

to add another light source.

In our example, using two light sources means that the lighting is now too bright. 4. Drag the brightness slider (the first sllider in the list) to the left to reduce the brightness.

5. Now drag the lower handle up towards the top left to change the direction of the corresponding light source.

6. Click the Neon Light icon

to produce a neon light effect.

7. Click the No Light Source icon

to switch off all light sources.

The bottom two sliders control contrast and specular intensity of light sources repectively.

Setting Depth Effects

This tasks explains how to achieve 3D depth effects, namely, clipping geometry between clipping planes and creating fog effects. 1. Select the View->Depth Effect... command to display the Depth Effect dialog box. The orange sphere completely encompasses the objects in your document. The white cross represents the center of the objects in the geometry area. The color of the area behind the orange sphere is the background color of your document. The vertical lines represent the front (near) and back (far) clipping planes. By default, depth effects are deactivated: if you zoom in and out, you will see that for the moment the geometry is not clipped. You can keep the Depth Effect dialog box open and continue working with other commands. You will be able to understand the results obtained by setting depth effects by zooming in and out. 2. Set the Near Limit and Far Limit by checking the Fixed checkbox for each option, entering values and pressing Enter in each case. Note that location of the vertical lines representing the clipping planes has changed. You can also drag the vertical lines representing the near and far clipping planes to produce the same effect.

The back (far) section of the geometry is clipped. You now only see what is located between the near and far clipping planes. 4. Zoom out to see all the geometry. 5. Click the Foggy option. The foggy option introduces a foggy effect. The fog

6. Zoom out again. As you zoom out, the fog effect is increased. The fog gets thicker as you continue to zoom out beyond the back clipping plane.

Using Standard and User-Defined Views

Using Standard Views

This task explains how to use standard views. 1. Select the View->Named Views... command. The Named Views dialog box appears. The list provides a number of standard views you can use to display the document: *front *back *left *right *top *bottom *iso. 2. Double-click the desired view. For example, double-clicking *front obtains the front view: When you apply standard views, the views are no longer rezoomed. Note also that, if the "Animation during viewpoint modification" option is checked in the Visualization tab, the change of view will be animated. The other views are:

You can also use the quick access icon bar (accessed via the View toolbar) for applying standard views more quickly. When pulled away from the View toolbar, the icon bar looks like this:

Creating, Modifying and Deleting User-Defined Views

This task explains how to create, modify and delete user-defined views. Note that user-defined views are stored with the document. Open the document /Samples/Infrastructure/NamedViews.CATProduct Your license must provide access to the product structure functions to open this document. 1. Select the View->Named Views... command and double-click the desired view. You are now ready to customize the view.

2. Adjust the different view parameters (zoom, rotation, etc.) until you are happy with the result.

3. Select the View->Named Views... command, then click the Add button to add the view to the list. The default name of the view is "Camera 1".

4. Rename the view as required and press Enter, or click Apply.

5. Check the Show Representations checkbox:

You now see a 3D viewpoint representation symbol in the geometry area. Consider the symbol to be a graphic representation of a camera. For the moment, the symbol is not selected. Note that, for the moment, zooming does not affect the size of the symbol. The Show Representations button only works if you are working in one of the following contexts: in the Part Design workbench, on a part activated within a product structure document: it will not work if you are working inside a Part document outside a product structure in the DMU workbench. 6. Select the symbol. The selected symbol looks like this:

6. Manipulate the 3D representation to define your view parameters. The symbol, just like a camera, is a viewport that helps you to define what you want to see in the view. The viewport can be manipulated to set up your view. What you see inside the viewport can then be stored in your view. You can manipulate the symbol in several ways: zooming, rotating and panning the geometry also affects the 3D representation by dragging and dropping the 3D compass onto the symbol, then manipulating it using the compass (refer to "Manipulating Objects Using the Mouse and Compass" for more information) by setting the camera properties using the Camera Properties dialog box (see below). The triangular marker always represents the bottom left corner . 7. If you want to set the camera properties, click the Properties button to access the Camera Properties dialog box.

The settings are as follows: Name: name of your user-defined view (cannot be modified) Type: lets you set a Parallel or Prospective view projection Origin: coordinates of your eye position Target: coordinates of the center of rotation of the camera (the point located at the center of the viewport). You can set the center of rotation by clicking the middle mouse button on the desired point: the coordinated are memorized with the camera. View angle: sets the vertical angle from the eye position (with respect to the center of the view) to define the direction in which you look at the view (available in prospective views only). A large angle has the effect of zooming out to make the geometry look small; a small angle has the reverse effect. Zoom: zoom factor (available in parallel views only). 8. Double-click anywhere on the 3D representation to apply the view parameters, and click Apply to apply the changes to your view. 9. If you want to modify any customized view you already saved, select it, modify the view parameters again, then click the Modify button to save your changes. You can also delete views by selecting the view from the list and clicking the Delete button. The Reverse button lets you view the object from the reverse angle.

Recording, Running and Editing Macros

Automating Repetitive Tasks Using Macros

If you perform a task repeatedly, you can take advantage of a macro to automate it. A macro is a series of functions, written in a scripting language, that you group in a single command to perform the requested task automatically. You can, for example, use a macro to automate: the creation of a series of holes in a part the extraction of bills of materials from an assembly the addition of a standard title block to a series of drawings the printing of a series of documents. You can create macros either by recording an interaction sequence or by editing a file (written in a scripting language) to insert the functions you wish. You can also modify an existing macro, either recorded or created from scratch, to best fit your needs. Once the macro is created, you can run it by selecting Tools->Macro->Macros..., selecting the macro, and clicking Run. Macros can be stored in the current document or in an external file. If a macro is created while a document is current, either by means of recording an interaction sequence or editing a file, and is stored in an external file, a link is kept in the current document to the file containing the macro. You can use the following scripting languages, depending on the platform you are running on: BasicScript 2.2 SDK for UNIX (BasicScript is a registered trademark of Summit Software Company) VBScript, short for Visual Basic Scripting Edition, for Windows NT (Visual Basic is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation). This is the scripting language used when you record a macro JScript, an implementation of JavaScript by Microsoft for Windows NT. You can use it to create macros from scratch, but macros are not recorded in JScript. Note that macros created using CATIA Version 5 Release 1 cannot systematically be replayed using later releases: upward compatibility is not guaranteed.

Recording a Macro
This task explains how to record a macro from a dialog sequence. You can store the recorded macro in the current document or in a file. Even if you choose to store the macro in a file, if a document was current when you began to record the macro, a link is created in this document to the file storing the macro, and the macro can afterwards be selected and run using this link from the document. If you want to record a macro that is not pointed to by any document, you need to store the macro in a file, and you can either start recording with no current document, or delete the created link from the current document when the macro is recorded. 1. Select the Tools->Macro->StartRecording command to display the Macro Recording dialog box.

2. In the Macro Recording dialog box, click in the "Macro in" area: the current document name to store the macro in the current document or "External File" to store the macro in a file. 3. Give a name to the macro If you choose to store the macro in the current document, enter the macro name in the "Macro Name" area. If you choose to store the macro in a file, click Select. The Select External File dialog box appears. In this case, select or create the appropriate file and click Open. 4. Click Start to begin recording the macro. A Warning box is displayed if the macro already exists. Click Yes to start recording the macro while overriding the existing one. The dialog boxes related to the macro recording disappear and the Stop Recording dialog box appears. 5. Perform the dialog sequence you want to record. 6. When this is complete, click Stop in the Stop Recording dialog box, or select the Tools->Macro->StopRecording command. Your macro is now ready for replay.

Running a Macro
This task explains you how to run macro. 1. Select the Tools->Macro->Macros... command to display the Macro dialog box. 2. In the Macro dialog box, click in the "Macro in" area: the current document name to run a macro either stored in, or pointed to by the current document or "External File" to run a macro stored in a file and not pointed to by the current document. 3. Select the name of the macro to run: If you choose to run a macro either stored in, or pointed to by the current document, click the macro name in the "Macro Name" area If you choose to run a macro stored in a file and not pointed to by the current document, click Select and the Select External File dialog box appears. Click the appropriate file name and click Open. 4. Click Run to replay the selected macro.

Editing a Macro
This task explains you how to edit a macro. 1. Select the Tools->Macro->Macros... command to display the Macro dialog box. 2. In the Macro dialog box, click in the "Macro in" area: the current document name to edit a macro either stored in, or pointed to by the current document or "External File" to run a macro stored in a file and not pointed to by the current document. 3. Select the name of the macro to edit: If you choose to edit a macro either stored in, or pointed to by the current document, click the macro name in the "Macro Name" area. If you choose to edit a macro stored in a file and not pointed to by the current document, click Select and the Select External File dialog box appears. Click the appropriate file name and click Open. 4. Click Edit. Your favorite editor opens on the selected macro. 5. Modify the macro instructions as you want, and save the macro, or cancel the modifications.

Creating a Macro From Scratch

This task explains you how to create a macro from scratch. 1. Select the Tools->Macro->Macros... command to display the Macro dialog box. 2. In the Macro dialog box, click in the "Macro in" area: the current document name to create a macro stored in the current document or "External File" to create a macro stored in a file. 3. Type the name of the macro to create: If you choose to create a macro stored in the current document, enter the macro name in the "Macro Name" area and click Create If you choose to create a macro stored in a file, click Create. The Create External File dialog box is displayed. Select the directory in which you want to create the macro, type the macro name and click Save. 4. Your favorite editor opens on the selected macro. Insert the macro instructions as you want, and save the macro. If the macro is stored in a file, a link to this file is inserted in the current document.

Deleting a Macro
This task explains you how to delete a macro. 1. Select the Tools->Macro->Macros... command to display the Macro dialog box. 2. In the Macro dialog box, click in the "Macro in" area: the current document name to delete a macro stored in the current document or to delete the link to a macro stored in a file or "External File" to delete a macro stored in a file. 3. Select the name of the macro to delete: To delete a macro stored in the current document or to delete the link to a macro stored in a file, click the macro name in the "Macro Name" area, click Delete, and click Yes in the Warning box. To delete a macro stored in a file, click Select. The Select External File dialog box is displayed. Select the macro you want to delete and click Open, then click Delete and click Yes in the Warning box. When you delete a link to a macro stored in a file from your document, the file containing the macro is NOT deleted. If you want to delete the link AND the file, you need to perform two delete operations, one in the current document to delete the link, one with the "External File" selected in "Macro in" to delete the file. Pay attention, however, when you delete a file, that this file could also be pointed to by other documents. To delete several macros or links to macros stored in files from a document, hold down CTRL and click the macro names you want to delete in the "Macro name" area, and then click Delete.

Using CATIA Version 5 Data in OLE-Compliant Applications

About Object Linking and Embedding (OLE)

Certain applications (e.g. Microsoft Office) support what is known as Object Linking and Embedding (OLE). Such applications, referred to as OLE-compliant or OLE container applications, allow you to retrieve a CATIA Version 5 document i.e. a part, a drawing or an assembly (referred to, in an OLE context, as the OLE document server). You can either link or embed the contents of the geometry area of a CATIA Version 5 document: Linking the document means that all changes made to it in a CATIA Version 5 session are also made to the document inserted in the OLE-compliant application. However, if you move the target file to another directory the link is severed. The graphic representation still exists but can no longer be edited (unless the link is repaired via the Edit-Links menu in the OLE-compliant application. Embedding the document means that a copy of the document is inserted in the document within the OLE-compliant application. As no links are created, any changes made to the document in the CATIA Version 5 session are not made to the document in the OLE-compliant application. The linked or embedded document appears as an image (or, if you specify otherwise, as an icon). When the document is double-clicked, a normal CATIA Version 5 session is displayed. OLE is available on Windows only. CATIA V5 documents may be linked or embedded in host container documents. Linking is always allowed. Embedding is forbidden in demo mode. Embedding of CATIA V4 models is also forbidden. Only .CATPart, .CATProduct, .CATDrawing, .CATAnalysis and .model documents implement OLE document server. CATIA Version 5 supports the Microsoft /regserver and /unregserver options for OLE. If you experience problems with OLE features, for example, if double-clicking a document icon does not start a session as expected, run the command:
cnext /regserver

then try again.

CATIA documents can also be embedded in Lotus SmartSuite documents, and Lotus SmartSuite documents can be embedded in CATIA documents.

Embedding Existing CATIA Version 5 Data in OLE-Container Applications

This task shows you how to embed CATIA Version 5 data into an OLE-compliant application. You need to have OLE.CATPart open (located in the samples/infrastructure directory). 1. In the OLE-compliant application, place the cursor where you wish to imbed the data and select the Insert->Object command. The Object dialog box appears:

2. In the Object dialog box, click on the Create from File tab. 3. Click on Browse... 4. In the Browse dialog box, specify the file location and click on OK to confirm. 5. A frame containing OLE.CATPart is inserted at the desired location in your OLE-container file:

6. If you want to work on the Version 5 document, double-click on this frame. A normal CATIA Version 5 session is displayed. When you have finished making the changes close and save the document. You will see that the changes you have just made are reflected in the OLE-container document. In the Object dialog box, there are two options: Link to file: see "About Object Linking and Embedding (OLE)" Display as icon: if you prefer the CATIA Version 5 document to appear iconified, select this option.

Creating CATIA Version 5 Data in OLE-Container Applications

This task shows you how to embed CATIA Version 5 data into an OLE-compliant application. 1. In the OLE-compliant application, place the cursor where you wish to insert the new data and select the Insert->Object command. The Object dialog box appears:

2. In the Object dialog box, click on the Create New tab. 3. Select the type of document you want to create. The document type CATIA.Model is listed but cannot be selected (because it is non-editable). 4. Click on OK to confirm. 5. A gray frame is inserted at the desired location in your OLE-container file and a normal CATIA Version 5 session appears:

6. When you have finished working on the new document close and save it. In the Object dialog box, there is the option Display as icon. If you prefer the CATIA Version 5 document to appear iconified, select this option.

Copying CATIA Version 5 Images to OLE-Compliant Applications

This task shows you how to copy images of CATIA Version 5 data to an OLE-compliant application. You need to have OLE.CATPart open (located in the samples/infrastructure directory). 1. In the CATIA Version 5 document, select the Tools->Image->Capture... command to display the Capture toolbar. 2. Use the cursor to draw a rectangle around the part you see in OLE.CATPart.

3. Click the Album icon

to capture the image and store it in the album. .

4. To copy the image to the clipboard click the Copy icon

The selected image is now in the clipboard from where it can be pasted into an OLE-compliant application. 5. Open the OLE-compliant application. 6. Place the cursor where you wish to insert the image and click the Edit->Paste Special... command. 7. Place the cursor where you wish to insert the image and click the Edit-Paste Special... command. 8. Select OK to confirm in the Paste Special dialog box.

The image you selected is pasted at the desired location in the file

In the Paste Special dialog box, there is the option Link to file. For more information about this option, see "About Object Linking and Embedding (OLE)"

Transferring CATIA Version 5 Data

Sending CATIA Version 5 Data In the Mail (on NT Only)

This task shows you how to send CATIA Version 5 data in the mail. (This is available on Windows NT only.) All the data, including linked documents, is included in the send, provided it can be found. Any data that can be opened in a CATIA Version 5 session, including V4 models, can be sent. 1. Open the CATIA Version 5 document you want to copy. Before doing anything, make sure you have saved all the files you intend to send. 2. Select the File->Send To Mail command. The Send To dialog box appears:

In the upper part of the dialog box you can see a list of all the different documents linked to the document you selected for the send operation. The four columns provide information about the file name, the file type, the location and whether or not the file was found. 3. Click on the icon between the two lists. The dialog box will then look something like this:

The files have now been sorted. The list in the lower part of the box shows a list of those files that will be sent. In the upper list remain those files that could not be found. This can be remedied by using the Tools->Search Order or Edit->Links commands (see "Creating a Document Search Order" or "Editing Document Links"). If you prefer, you can select the files in the upper list individually and transfer them to the lower list using the icon . If you want to select the files by type, place the cursor inside the list and right-click to display the list of file types and then select the appropriate type. (Selecting by type in this way operates of course in the lower list as well.)

Before sending your documents in the mail, you may want to check the size of the documents to be sent. You will find this in the lower left-hand corner. The OK button may be grayed out. This means that problems shown in the Problem column have not been resolved. As well as the information provided in the upper list, the lower list also contains a column showing potential problems such as duplicate file names. There are two occurrences of duplicate file names in the case shown above. There are different ways of resolving this. You can: select one of the identically named files and click the icon in the files to be sent rename one of the files using the Rename Target button. 4. If you want to give one of the files a different name in the target directory, select the file and click the Rename Target button in the lower right-hand corner of the dialog box. The dialog box opposite appears specifying the name of the file selected. Enter the new name and click OK. To cancel the rename, select the new name just entered in the Rename dialog box, delete it and click OK. The old name is restored. You can of course move all files to the upper list at any time by using the icon 5. Click OK. You will now be prompted to give the name of your e-mail system. . to move it to the upper list i.e. not include it

Copying CATIA Version 5 Data To a Directory or Diskette

This task shows you how to copy CATIA Version 5 data to a directory or diskette. If the document to be copied is linked to others, those documents will also be copied to the directory (or diskette) you choose, provided they can be found. Any data that can be opened in a CATIA Version 5 session, including V4 models, can be copied. 1. Open the CATIA Version 5 document you want to copy. Before doing anything, make sure you have saved all the files you intend to include in the copy. 2. Select the File->Send To Directory command. The Send To dialog box appears:

In the upper part of the dialog box you can see a list of all the different documents linked to the document you selected for the copy operation. The four columns provide information about the file name, the file type, the location and whether or not the file was found. 3. Click on the icon between the two lists. The dialog box will then look something like this:

The files have now been sorted. The list in the lower part of the box shows a list of those files that will be copied. In the upper list remain those files that could not be found. This can be remedied by using the Tools->Search Order or Edit->Links commands (see "Creating a Document Search Order" or "Editing Document Links"). If you prefer, you can select the files in the upper list individually and use the icon to transfer them to the lower list . If you want to select the files by type, place the cursor inside the list and right-click to display the list of file types and then select the appropriate type. (Selecting by type in this way operates of course in the lower list as well.)

4. If you want to keep the same directory structure in the target directory check the Keep Directory Structure box between the two lists. Once checked, this box remains selected when you next use the Send To Mail command. It might be useful, especially if copying files to a diskette, to know the size of the documents to be copied. You will find this just above the Copy to: field. The OK button may, as in the case shown above, be grayed out. This means that problems shown in the Problem column have not been resolved. As well as the information provided in the upper list, the lower list also contains a column showing potential problems such as duplicate file names. There are two occurrences of duplicate file names in the case shown above. There are different ways of resolving this. You can: select one of the identically named files and click the icon to move it to the upper list i.e. not include it in the files to be copied check the Keep Directory Structure button thus avoiding having files with the same name in the same directory rename one of the files using the Rename Target button. 5. If you want to give one of the files a different name in the target directory, select the file and click the Rename Target button in the lower right-hand corner of the dialog box. The dialog box opposite appears specifying the name of the file selected. Enter the new name and click OK. To cancel the rename, select the new name just entered in the Rename dialog box, delete it and click OK. The old name is restored. . You can of course move all files to the upper list at any time by using the icon 6. Enter the path of the target directory in the Copy to: field using the Browse button if necessary. and click OK. This field is in fact a list and contains the nine destinations last used. 7. Click OK. If you copy to an as yet non-existent directory, the following message appears:

If the target directory contains any files with the same name as any copied, the Confirm File Replacement dialog box will be displayed. Click the appropriate button.

A progress box appears as each file is copied.

When the copy has been performed the Files Copied dialog box appears telling you the number, size and type of the files copied.

Managing Document Links in CATIA Version 5

Using the FileDesk Workbench

This task shows you how to view the relationships between different documents and to obtain information about their properties. 1. Open a document either pointing to others or pointed to by them and select the File->Desk command. What you then see looks something like this:

You may have to click on the Fit All In icon

to see everything, especially with complex relationships.

As you can see, the relationships between the document opened and any others are clearly shown. All types of V5 data and V4 models can be viewed in this way. You can leave the Desk dialog box open when you modify the relationships or add or delete any of the documents in the view. As the view is automatically updated, you can see the changes as you make them.

2. The relationship displayed may include child documents that have not been loaded (see Loading Referenced Documents). Such documents are shown in reverse video. Select one of these documents and click on Load. The specification tree will be updated as a result i.e. the icon representing the document will change to that of a loaded document.

3. If you want to see the properties of any of the documents displayed, whether loaded or not, select the document and click on Properties. The Document Properties dialog box below appears:

Incidentally, this is one way of previewing documents.

Displaying Document Links

This task shows you how to display document links. Only direct links i.e. external links directly pointed to by the active document can be displayed using the Edit->Links... command. Other links, pointed to by an inactive document can be displayed by activating the inactive document. Have the documents LinksFound.CATDrawing and LinksFound.CATPart in the /doc/samples/V4Integration directory. 1. Open the document LinksFound.CATDrawing.

2. Select the Edit->Links... command. The Links dialog box opposite appears.

2. Click one of the the lines showing the features pointing to the document you opened. This activates the Open Source button and provides you with file-related information below the file list. The file-related information in the bottom left-hand corner of the Links dialog box is as follows: Feature: the name of the feature selected Source: the path and name of the document pointed to in the session ( Stored Source: the path and name of the document pointed to and stored on disk. This may be different from the path and name given in the Source as the document may have been moved and placed in a search order directory (see Creating a Document Search Order) Type: the document type i.e. CATPart, CATDrawing, etc. 3. Click the Open Source button. The Links dialog box disappears and the file LinksFound.CATPart, i.e. the file pointing to LinksFound.CATDrawing is displayed.

Editing Document Links

This task shows you how to edit document links. Only direct links i.e. external links directly pointed to by the active document can be edited using the Edit->Links... command. Other links, pointed to by an inactive document can be displayed by activating the inactive document. Have the documents EditLinks.CATDrawing and EditLinks.CATPart and EditLinks.xls (in the /doc/samples/V4Integration directory). 1. Open the document EditLinks.CATDrawing.

Whenever a document is opened and one or more of its links are invalid the following dialog box appears along with the document opened.

There are several reasons why a link may no longer work Either the files could not be found which means they have been moved, renamed or deleted or the files contain the wrong information which means that they exist but they are different from the files pointed to. To correct this, click on the file list in the Open dialog box. Alternatively, click OK to quit the Open dialog box and select the Edit->Links... command. You can check link validity at any time using this command. The Links dialog box opposite appears. 2. Click on the line containing the file you wish to relocate. This activates the Change Source button and provides you with file-related information below the file list. There are four items making up the file-related information in the bottom left-hand corner of the Links dialog box: Feature: the name of the feature selected Source: the path and name of the document pointed to in the session Stored Source: the path and name of the document stored on disk as a link. This may be different from the path and name given in the Source as the document may have been moved and placed in a search order directory (see Creating a Document Search Order) or, if the stored source is not found, you may have to indicate another path and/or name to relocate the document (see step 4 below). Type: the document type i.e. CATPart, CATDrawing, etc.

3. Click the Change Source button.

4. In the Change Source dialog box, specify the correct name of the file and indicate its location. Click OK. Now look at the Links dialog box. If the file has now been found this is confirmed in the Found column and the Open Source button is activated. The whole list is updated i.e. all features linked to the file found will show Yes in the Found column.

5. Click the Open Source button. The Links dialog box disappears and the file EditLinks.CATPart, i.e. the file pointed to by EditLinks.CATDrawing is displayed.

6. If you now select the Edit->Links... command the Links dialog box will indicate that the right file has been found and loaded.

If you now click on the OLE Links... button you will see that an Excel file called EditLinks.xls has been inserted into the document EditLinks.CATDrawing. The operations described above can also be carried out on EditLinks.xls using the Windows dialog box that appears.

Creating a Document Search Order

This task shows you how to define a personal search priority for your documents. The primary aim of the Search Order function is to resolve document links and to propose a particular directory when you select the File->Open and File->Save commands. Its purpose is different from that of the Edit-Links command (see Editing Document Links). 1. Select the Tools->Search Order... command. The following dialog box appears.

2. Select a disk in the Subdirectories list, enter an existing directory in the Directory field as shown below and click the Add button.

This puts the directory into the list on the right.

You do not need to enter the whole path in the Directory field. Just enter the main directory in the Directory field and press Enter. Any subdirectories are then displayed in the Subdirectories list. Select the appropriate subdirectory and click the Add button.

The list on the right is intended to contain the directories you use most frequently. You may wish to use different search order lists for particular uses and for different circumstances. 3. Continue adding your most frequently used directories to the list on the right. When you have finished click the button and save the list as a .txt file in the appropriate location.

4. You can make as many lists as you like. When you want to use one of these lists just click the button . The Load search order dialog box appears.

Right-clicking on any of the .txt files allows you to edit these files. If you then click the Open button the contents of the .txt file you chose is placed in the list on the right. 5. The search order lists can easily be updated. To change the priority of a directory i.e. move it up or down in the list, select it, click the Move button above the list then click where you want to put it in the list. 6. To remove a directory, simply select it and click the Delete button above the list. Both the Delete and the Move button are activated only when an item in the list is selected. Normally, document links are taken into account before the search order lists. However, you may want to give precedence to search order lists. You may prefer to ignore the search order lists you have made or to use search order lists exclusively. 7. To change options, simply select the appropriate one from the list in the lower right-hand corner of the Search Order dialog box. The option selected will be operational the next time you run a CATIA V5 session and will remain selected unless you choose another.

Importing and Exporting Non-CATIA Files

Importing a STEP AP203 File

This task shows you how to import to a CATPart or CATProduct document the data contained in a STEP AP203 file. You can import: either an assembly referencing .CATPart documents, .model files or cgr files or curves, faces and surfaces to a CATPart document. If a STEP file contains both of the above only the assembly will be imported. 1. Select the File->Open command. The File Selection dialog box is displayed:

2. Set the .stp or .step extension in the Files of type field. This displays all .stp or .step files contained in the selected directory.

3. Select the .stp or .step file of your choice (High_pressure_washer.stp, for example) and click Open.

What is then displayed depends on the contents of the STEP file opened. If the STEP file contains geometrical and topological data, a new CATPart document is displayed showing both a tree structure and a geometrical form. If the STEP file contains only the assembly structure or the assembly structure and geometrical and topological data, only the tree structure is displayed, as shown above. However, if the STEP file also contains the transcription of V5 CATPart documents and/or V4 models those documents and models are displayed (providing they are found). The following points should be remembered: As the unit system used in CATIA V5R2 is MKSA (radians, mm) data from all STEP files will be converted into such units. Curves, surfaces and faces are imported.Conformance classes CC2 and CC3 are totally supported; CC4 and CC6 are partially supported. Color exchange is not supported. The import operation generates a report file (name_of_step_file.rpt) and an error file (name_of_step_file.err). These files are created in a location referenced by the CATReport variable. On NT the default value of this variable is $USER_PROFILE\CATReport and on UNIX it is $HOME/CATReport.

STEP Part 42/AP203 Entities Imported into V5R2

This table is based on Part 42 (ISO 10303-42:1994(E)) and AP 203 (ISO 10303-203:1994(E)). Note the following restriction: OpenShell and ClosedShell are not exchanged between STEP and CATIA V5R2. Only the faces composing them are transcribed into CATIA V5R2.

Implemented
Conformance Class

Not yet implemented

CC2
geometrically bounded surface

N/A: Not applicable according to the standard

CC3 CC4 CC5 CC6

Shape Representation

geometrically bounded wireframe

edge-based wireframe edge_based_ wireframe_model

shell-based wireframe shell_based_ wireframe_model

manifold surface

faceted brep

advanced brep

High Level Entities geometric_curve_set geometric_set

shell_based_ faceted_brep manifold_solid_brep surface_model brep_with_voids brep_with_voids

Entity
Point cartesian_point point_on_curve N/A N/A N/A N/A

point_on_surface point_replica

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A N/A

N/A N/A

degenerate_pcurve

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Curve line N/A

circle

N/A

ellipse

N/A

hyperbola parabola

N/A N/A

polyline

N/A

b_spline_curve (+ rational) b_spline_curve_with_knots

N/A

uniform_curve (+rational)

N/A

quasi_uniform_curve (+rational)

N/A

bezier_curve trimmed_curve composite_curve N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

composite_curve_on_surface boundary_curve outer_boundary_curve

N/A N/A

N/A N/A

N/A N/A

N/A N/A

N/A N/A

N/A N/A

pcurve

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

surface_curve

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

offset_curve_3d

N/A

N/A

curve_replica

N/A

N/A

Surface plane N/A N/A N/A

cylindrical_surface

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

conical_surface

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

spherical_surface

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

toroidal_surface

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

degenerate_toroidal_surface

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

surface_of_linear_extrusion

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

surface_of_revolution

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

b_spline_surface b_spline_surface_with_knots

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

uniform_surface

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

quasi_uniform_surface

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

bezier_surface

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

rectangular_trimmed_surface curve_bounded_surface rectangular_composite_surface

N/A N/A N/A

N/A N/A N/A

N/A N/A N/A

N/A N/A N/A

N/A N/A N/A

N/A N/A N/A

offset_surface

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

surface_replica

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Topology vertex_point N/A N/A N/A

edge_curve oriented_edge vertex_loop poly_loop edge_loop

N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

face_bound face_outer_bound

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

face_surface

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

advanced_face

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

oriented_face

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

vertex_shell

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

wire_shell

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

connected_edge_set open_shell oriented_open_shell closed_shell oriented_closed_shell

N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

N/A

N/A N/A

N/A N/A N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Exporting CATPart or CATProduct Data to a STEP AP203 File

This task shows you how to save in STEP AP203 format the data contained in a CATPart or CATProduct document. You can export: CATProduct documents (resulting in STEP AP203 files in compliance with Part 44) the bodies (volumes, shells and faces) of CATPart documents (resulting in STEP AP203 files in compliance with Part 42) If a CATProduct document references CATPart documents containing volumes or shells these CATParts will not be exported. 1. Open the CATPart or CATProduct document to be saved in STEP AP203 format.

2. When the document is open, select the File -> Save As... command. The Save As dialog box is displayed:

3. Specify the name you want to give to the STEP file in the File name: field. 4. Set the .stp extension in the Save as type field. You will remember that the extension used in V4 was .step. In CATIA Version 5, CATPart and CATProduct documents are exported to files with the extension "stp".

5. Click the Save button to confirm the operation. If you now open the .stp file you will see that the file header contains the following information: the file name the date of creation (with the year expressed in four digits meaning that your STEP data will be year 2000-compliant) the V5 version used for the conversion. The following points should be remembered: The units used are CATIA V5R2 units i.e. MKSA (radians, mm). Conformance classes CC3, CC4 and CC6 are used. The other classes serve no purpose for the transcription of V5 data. Color exchange is not supported. The import operation generates a report file (name_of_step_file.rpt) and an error file (name_of_step_file.err). These files are created in a location referenced by the CATReport variable. On NT the default value of this variable is $USER_PROFILE\CATReport and on UNIX it is $HOME/CATReport.

STEP Part 42/AP203 Entities Exported from V5R2

This table is based on Part 42 (ISO 10303-42:1994(E)) and AP 203 (ISO 10303-203:1994(E)).

Implemented according to the standard

Not yet implemented

Not generated by V5

N/A: Not applicable

Conformance Class obtained CC2: from V5 Not generated by V5

CC3: Wire (GSM, Free Style, etc.)

CC4: OpenShell (GSM, CC5: Shape Not Design, generated Free by V5 Style, etc.)
manifold surface

CC6 : PartBody

Shape Representation

geometrically bounded wireframe

geometrically bounded surface

edge-based wireframe

shell-based wireframe

faceted brep

advanced brep

High Level Entities

geometric_curve_set geometric_set

edge_based_ shell_based_ shell_based_ faceted_brep manifold_solid_brep wireframe_model wireframe_model surface_model brep_with_voids brep_with_voids

Entity
Point cartesian_point point_on_curve N/A N/A N/A

point_on_surface point_replica degenerate_pcurve

N/A

N/A

N/A N/A N/A

N/A N/A N/A

N/A N/A N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Curve

line circle ellipse hyperbola parabola polyline

thru edge_curve thru edge_curve thru edge_curve thru edge_curve thru edge_curve

N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

b_spline_curve (+ rational) thru edge_curve b_spline_curve_with_knots N/A

uniform_curve (+rational) quasi_uniform_curve (+rational) bezier_curve trimmed_curve composite_curve composite_curve_on_surface N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

boundary_curve N/A outer_boundary_curve N/A N/A N/A N/A

pcurve surface_curve offset_curve_3d

N/A N/A

N/A N/A

N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

curve_replica

N/A

N/A

Surface

plane cylindrical_surface conical_surface spherical_surface toroidal_surface degenerate_toroidal_surface surface_of_linear_extrusion surface_of_revolution

N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

b_spline_surface N/A b_spline_surface_with_knots uniform_surface quasi_uniform_surface bezier_surface rectangular_trimmed_surface curve_bounded_surface rectangular_composite_surface offset_surface surface_replica N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

Topology

vertex_point edge_curve oriented_edge vertex_loop poly_loop edge_loop face_bound

N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

thru edge_curve thru oriented_edge thru edge_loop

N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

thru wire_shell

N/A face_outer_bound face_surface advanced_face oriented_face vertex_shell wire_shell connected_edge_set open_shell oriented_open_shell closed_shell oriented_closed_shell N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

N/A

N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

N/A N/A N/A N/A

N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

Importing an IGES File

This task shows you how to import into a CATPart document the data contained in an IGES file. Once imported, the data can be handled just as if it were created in the Part Design session. The main purpose of such an import is to be able to create solids from IGES faces but you may also find it useful for re-using face contours in the Sketcher application, deforming NURBs in SmartShaper or using faces in Solid Design. 1. Select the File->Open command. The File Selection dialog box is displayed.

2. If the directory contains many different types of files you may wish to set the .igs extension in the Files of type field. This displays all files with the extension "igs" contained in the selected directory. You will remember that V4 allowed the use of extensions such as IGS, iges for example. However, in CATIA Version 5, only files with the extension "igs" can be imported to a CATPart document.

3. Select the .igs file of your choice (teapot.igs, for example) and click Open.

This creates a new document similar to a CATPart document in all respects and containing all surfaces and 3D wireframe geometry.The data is now available in your session. The following points should be remembered: The IGES standards 5.2 and 5.3 are supported. The latter is year 2000-compliant. Trimmed and bounded surfaces are transformed into faces. Solids, volumes and skins as well as text, annotations and 2D geometry are not converted. The tolerance used is the default tolerance defined in the Part Design session. Properties such as the original colors, the show status, names are maintained in your session. The import operation generates a report file (name_of_saved_file.rpt) and an error file (name_of_saved_file.err). These files are created in a location referenced by the USERPROFILE variable on NT and by the HOME variable on UNIX. The default location is the folder C:Winnt\Profiles\username\CATReport on Windows NT (where "username" is your logon id) or the CATReport directory in your home directory on UNIX.

What About the Elements You Import?

To make sure the elements you need to handle in your session are those you expected, here is a list presenting the IGES data supported when imported into a CATPart document:

Element Type null circular arc composite curve

Element number in IGES format 0 100 102

Element Type tabulated cylinder transformation matrix rational B-spline curve

Element number in IGES format 122 124 126

conic arc - ellipse copious data unbounded plane bounded plane line semi-bounded line unbounded line parametric spline curve parametric spline surface point ruled surface surface of revolution

104 form 1 106 forms 1-3, 11-13, 63 108 form 0 108 form 1 110 form 0 110 form 1 110 form 2 112 114 116 118 120

rational B-spline surface offset curve offset surface boundary (of skin) curve on a parametric surface bounded surface (of skin) trimmed (parametric) surface subfigure definition (detail) color definition associativity instance(group) single subfigure instance (ditto)

128 130 140 141 * 142 * 143 144 308 314 402 forms 1, 7, 14, 15 408

* Only the Geometry type curves "Curve on a parametric surface" and "Boundary" are taken into account for face creation. 2D Parametric type curves are ignored. Notice that dittos are imported as simple elements.

Exporting CATPart Data to an IGES File

This task shows you how to save in IGES format the data contained in a CATPart document. 1. Open the CATPart document to be saved in IGES format. 2. Select the File -> Save As... command. The Save As dialog box is displayed. 3. Specify the name of the document in the File name: field. 4. Set the .igs extension in the Save as type field. You will remember that V4 allowed the use of extensions such as IGS or iges. However, in CATIA Version 5, CATPart documents can be exported only to files with the extension "igs". 5. Click the Save button to confirm the operation. The Save as igs dialog box appears:

This dialog box offers several options: The default Standard option and the BSpline option allow you to select which curve and surface types you want to generated. If you leave the default Standard option selected the curve and surface types created in the Part are kept as is. If you select the BSpline option (which was also available in V4) all curves and surfaces are converted into B-splines. The default Surface option and the Wireframe option allow you to select the representation mode. If you select Surface (which is also used in V4) solid decomposition will be identical in both the original model and the resulting file. Wireframe is a new option in CATIA Version 5 and should be used if you want 3D visualization of solid edges to be identical in both the original model and the resulting file. This may be useful in cases where curves are the only form of input accepted. You may wish to round digits up or down to 7, 8, 9 or 10 digits. If so, use the Number of digits list provided. If you are happy with the settings you have selected and do not want this dialog box to reappear the next time you export, click the checkbox provided in the lower left-hand corner of the dialog box. 6. Click OK. You can also use the Tools->Options... command to enter the information mentioned above. Select the Part category in the left-hand column and click the IGES tab. IGES 5.3 (year 2000-compliant) is the standard supported. The export operation generates a report file (name_of_saved_file.rpt) and an error file (name_of_saved_file.err). These files are created in a location referenced by the USERPROFILE variable on NT and by the HOME variable on UNIX. The default location is the folder C:Winnt\Profiles\username\CATReport on Windows NT (where "username" is your logon id) or the CATReport directory in your home directory on UNIX.

What About the Elements You Export?

The list below shows the IGES element numbers corresponding to the element types in Part Design.

Element Number in IGES format circular arc 100 composite curve> 102 conic arc - ellipse 104 form 1 copious data 106 form 2 unbounded plane 108 form 0 Element Type line point ruled surface 110 form 0 116 118

Element Number >in IGES format surface of revolution 120 tabulated cylinder 122 transformation matrix 124 rational B-spline curve 126 rational B-spline surface 128 curve on a parametric 142 * surface trimmed (parametric) 144 surface color definition 314 Element Type

* The only curve type generated is the Geometry type.

Importing a DXF/DWG file into a CATDrawing

This task lets you quickly see how to import the geometric data contained in a DXF file into a CATDrawing document. Once imported, the data can be handled and edited just as if they had been created in a Drafting session using 2D geometry creation commands. Open your session. Open your CATDrawing document 1. Select the File-> Open items. The File Selection dialog box is displayed: 2. Select the.dxf extension from the field called Files of type. All .dxf files contained in the selected directory are now displayed. 3. Click the .dxf file of your choice. For example, click the draw1.dxf file. 4. Click Open.

A CATDrawing file is created which contains all the geometry included in the dxf file. This .CATDrawing file becomes the current document. You may select the most suitable import unit using the Tools-> Options commands, (Drafting and DXF tab). Note that CATIA supports DXF/DWG formats version 12,13 and 14.

What About The Elements You Import ?

To make sure the elements you need to handle in your session are those you expected, here is a list presenting the DXF/DWG data supported when imported into a a CATDrawing file. DXF/DWG 2D elements you can import point line circle arc profile rectangle curve text dimensions balloon datum feature leader GD&T arrow title-block polyline lwpolyline pattern Resulting corresponding elements in the CATDrawing file point line circle arc geometry lines curves text geometry + text geometry + text geometry + text line + arrow geometry + text geometry geometry geometry (+ pattern) geometry (+ pattern) pattern

Exporting a CATDrawing into a DXF/DWG File

This task quickly shows you how to export the data contained in a CATDrawing document into a DXF file. Drawing Interchange Format (DXF) files enable the interchange of drawings between CATIA Generative Drafting version 5 and version 4 or with other programs. DXF files correspond to ASCII format and DWG to binary format. CATIA provides a simple method to export the data contained in a CATDrawing document either in a DXF file or in a DWG file. Open a CATDrawing document. 1. Select the File, Save As item. The Save As dialog box is displayed:

2. Change the Format type into DXF type. 3. Enter the file name. 4. Press SAVE.

The same method applies to DWG file export. Note that when working with CATIA version 4, if you open a DXF or DWG file created in CATIA version 5, you need to set the curve tolerance to 0.0001 (0.1 as default). Note that the resulting file correspond to version 13 DXF/DWG format.

What About the Elements You Export?

The table below sets the mapping between the CATDrawing file elements and the resulting DXF 2D elements. Drafting elements included in the Resulting corresponding elements in the CATDrawing file DXF/DWG file point point line line circle circle arc arc ellipse ellipse profile geometry rectangle lines curve geometry geometry (all the elements mentioned text above)

dimensions balloon datum feature leader GD&T arrow title-block

geometry geometry geometry geometry geometry geometry geometry

Exporting a CGM File

This task lets you quickly see how to export the data contained in a CATDrawing document into a CGM file. Open the CATDrawing document to be exported into a CGM file. 1. Select the File -> Save As item. The Save As dialog box is displayed:

2. Change the Save as type into CGM type. 3. Enter the file name. 4. Press Save.

Exporting CATPart Data to an STL File

This task shows you how to save your part as an STL (stereolithography) document (.stl). 1. Select the File -> Save As... command. 2. In the Save As dialog box, select the location of the document to be saved. 3. Click the Save as type: list. 4. Select the stl type from the list displayed.

5. Click Save to confirm the operation and quit the command.

Exporting 3D Documents to VRML

This task shows you how to save a 3D document in VRML (Virtual Reality Modeling Language) format. 1. Open the 3D document to be saved in VRML format.

2. When the document is open, select the File -> Save As... command. The Save As dialog box is displayed:

3. Specify the name you want to give to the 3D document in the File name: field. 4. Set the .wrl extension in the Save as type field. 5. Click the Save button to confirm the operation.

Customizing DXF Import/Export Format

As you import/export a catdrawing from/into a DXF/DWG file, you may customize units, destination and/or format.

1. Select Tools -> Options... . 2. Click Drafting in the list of objects to the left of the Options dialog box.

The Drafting tab appears, containing the following categories of options:

Import with unit

Imported file destination, either working view or background sheet DXF/DRW export files format 5. Click OK to confirm the operation and quit the dialog box.

Advanced Tasks

Setting Up Network Licensing

Setting Up IBM License Use Management (LUM) on Windows

The IBM License Use Management software for managing nodelocked licenses is integrated into the CATIA software. If you need to install the complete LUM package, and if you want to set up a network license server, you can install the rest of the product from the LUM CD-ROM accompanying the CATIA software to avoid having to download the software over the Internet. Additional information about LUM may be found at:
www.software.ibm.com/is/lum

Setting Up Your Network License Server

This task explains how to set up a network license server, and is intended for the administrator who is setting up an environment to allow multiple client workstations to share licenses stored on one or more network license servers. This scenario shows you how to set up a network license server on one workstation (ravel), and the scenario "Setting Up Your Network License Clients" two network license clients on two other workstations (mozart and chopin):

Designing the network licensing environment requires careful thought and planning. Consequently, we strongly recommend that you read the following sections in the manual Using License Use Management Runtime for your platform: the chapter "Planning Your Network Licensing Environment": note that before starting, you must determine whether you want to use direct binding or namespace binding. For more information about what this means, read the section "Selecting a Type of Network Binding". For reliability reasons, we strongly recommend that you use direct binding. the section "Setting Up Your Servers and Clients", in particular "Scenario 2: Configuring a Network License Server" in the chapter "Getting Started with License Use Management Runtime". 1. Log on as root onto the workstation on which the network license server is to be configured. In our scenario, the workstation name is "ravel". 2. Go to the LUM installation location.

3. Run the command:

./i4cfg

The Configuration Tool notebook is displayed. You configure the network license server using a configuration tool which, on AIX only, has both a graphic user interface (GUI) and a script interface. The GUI is available on AIX and INTEL only. 4. On the Configure As page, check the Network License Server and Advanced Configuration options. 5. On the Start up page, check the option "Start services at system startup" if you want the configured server to start when you power on your workstation. 6. On the Log page, select the events you want to be logged, and specify the log file directory where you want the log to be kept. 7. If you have decided to use direct binding (strongly recommended), select the Direct Binding page, and enter in the Name field the TCP/IP host name of the server workstation ("ravel" in our scenario), then press the <<Add button to add the server to the Servers list. 8. Select Close from the system menu at the top left corner of the Configuration Tool notebook, and click the Yes button to save your changes. 9. Run the command:
./i4cfg -start

to start the server. 10. Run the command:

./i4cfg -list

to check that the server is up and running.

Setting Up Your Network License Clients

This task explains how to set up two network license clients on two other workstation, as clients of the network license server you set up in "Setting Up Your Network License Server" . Make sure that License Use Management Runtime is installed on each client. Refer to the section "Setting Up Your Servers and Clients", in particular "Scenario 3: Configuring a Network License Client" in the chapter "Getting Started with License Use Management Runtime". 1. Log on as root onto each workstation on which to be configured as client. In our scenario, the workstation names are "mozart" and "chopin". 2. Go to the LUM installation location. 3. Run the command:
./i4cfg

The Configuration Tool notebook is displayed. 4. On the Configure As page, check the Network License Client and Advanced Configuration options. 5. If the network license client is to locate the network license server using direct binding (strongly recommended), select the Direct Binding page, and enter in the Name field the TCP/IP host name of the server workstation ("ravel" in our scenario) with which the client will communicate, then press the <<Add button to add the server to the Servers list. 6. Select Close from the system menu at the top left corner of the Configuration Tool notebook, and click the Yes button to save your changes. 7. Run the command:
./i4tv

to check that the server is up and running, and that the clients can communicate with the server.

You are now ready to enroll your licensed products and register the licenses using the Basic License Tool. This phase involves: enrolling the products and the licenses distributing the licenses to the network license server. For detailed information and a scenario explaining how to enroll licensed products and register the licenses, refer to the sections "Performing Basic Administration", "Scenario 5: Managing a Licensed Product", in the chapter "Getting Started with License Use Runtime" in the manual: Using License Use Management Runtime for your platform.

Distributing CATIA Version 5 on Windows NT

About Distributing CATIA Version 5 on Windows NT

There are basically several ways in which you can provide multiple end users with access to CATIA Version 5. You can: install the software on each computer directly from the CD-ROM install the software on each computer from a server Both solutions are ideal if you want the best level of performance, and involve installing and maintaining the software on each computer. This section explains how to: copy the CATIA Version 5 software to a folder from which you set up a CATIA Version 5 installation server from which you can distribute the software to other Windows NT computers distribute the software to a client computer using a silent installation file distribute the software to a client computer using the RCMD command (part of the Windows NT Workstation Resource Kit). Customizations performed by end users of CATIA Version 5 using the Tools->Options... command are stored in settings files in the Windows NT user profile environment located in the following folder (by default):
C:\Winnt\Profiles\user\CATSettings

where "user" is the end user. There are two types of profile available to end users: local user profiles roaming profiles. Your roaming profile is the same on every computer you use. Windows NT system administrators should ensure that CATIA Version 5 end users use roaming profiles. This will enable end users to log onto different computers to run CATIA Version 5 and recover their customizations. Refer to your Windows NT online documentation for more information about roaming profiles.

On Microsoft Windows95 OSR2 and Windows 98, there in no user-specific folder for storing user settings. Settings for all CATIA users on the same computer are stored in the folders C:\%WINDIR\CATSettings and C:\%WINDIR\CATTemp, where "%WINDIR" is the name of the folder in which Microsoft Windows 95 OSR2 or Windows 98 are installed. For example, this will commonly be: C:\Windows\CATSettings C:\Windows\CATTemp

Setting Up the Server

This task explains a suggested method (not mandatory) for setting up the server. It involves copying the CATIA Version 5 software from the CD-ROM to a folder from which you set up a CATIA Version 5 installation server from which you can distribute the software to other Windows NT computers. This avoids having to install the software from the CD-ROM on each computer.

1. Log on as Administrator onto the Windows NT computer to be used as the server. The name of the server computer, in our example above, is "ravel". You must belong to the Administrators group, or have the privileges assigned to the Administrators group. 2. Still on the server, insert the CD-ROM into the drive. The installation procedure starts automatically. The Setup program displays a message telling you that it is preparing the installation procedure. 3. Stop the installation procedure from starting automatically. One way of preventing the installation procedure from starting automatically after inserting the CD-ROM is to press and hold down the Shift key immediately after inserting the CD-ROM. 4. Open the Windows NT Explorer and explore the CD-ROM drive. The Explorer window appears, and the contents of the CD-ROM are displayed. For the purposes of our example, let's assume the CD-ROM is mapped to drive D:. Among the files on the CD-ROM, note the presence of the file Setup.exe which you will use later.

5. Create a new folder, for example on the C: drive of the server, and set it up as a shared folder. For the purposes of our example, let's assume the folder name is: My_CATIA_V5_Folder. To share the folder, display the folder properties, select the Sharing tab, check the Shared As option, then click OK. A hand symbol will now appear below the folder icon in the Explorer, confirming the folder is now shared. Sharing the folder is essential to successfully setting up the server. 6. Make sure that all the files are visible. To do so, use the View ->Options command in the Explorer, select the View tab, check the Show all files option, then click OK. 7. Select all the files (for example, using the Edit ->Select All command in the Explorer), and copy the files to your new folder. 8. Open an MS-DOS window and go to the folder C:\My_CATIA_V5_Folder using the commands:
C: cd My_CATIA_V5_Folder

You are now ready to perform an installation of CATIA Version 5 from the folder containing the software you copied from the CD-ROM. 9. To start the installation, enter the command:
Setup.exe -r

and follow the installation instructions. The installation proceeds exactly as a manual installation. For the purposes of this scenario, when you are prompted to choose a destination folder in the Choose Destination Location dialog box, choose the default folder:
C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B03\intel_a

Using the "-r" command line parameter with the Setup.exe command causes Setup.exe to automatically generate a silent installation file (or response file), which is a record of the installation input, located by default in the Windows folder (in other words, in the folder C:\Winnt). The default name of the file is: Setup.iss. Automated electronic software distribution, also known as silent installation, is possible. In this mode, you do not need to monitor the installation and provide input via dialog boxes. A silent installation runs on its own, without any end-user intervention. You can specify an alternate location in which to create the response file using the following command:
Setup.exe -r -f1path_name\ResponseFile

where "path_name" is the pathname of the folder containing the response file, and

"ResponseFile" is the name of the response file, which in this case is "Setup.iss". Note that there is no space after "-f1". 10. Copy the response file from the Windows folder to the folder where the Setup.exe program is located. In our example, copy the file to the folder: C:\My_CATIA_V5_Folder. 11. Go the folder C:\My_CATIA_V5_Folder, locate the file "setup.ini", reset the access rights (to make sure that the file can be modified) by unchecking the Read-only option via the Properties command, edit the file and change the line:
EnableLangDlg = Y

to:
EnableLangDlg = N

12. In the same folder, create a command file, for example, "myinstall.bat", containing the following command:
Setup.exe -s -f2path_name\LogFile -f1path_name\ResponseFile

where "path_name" (after -f2) is the pathname of the folder (in our example, C:\My_CATIA_V5_Folder) and "LogFile" is the name of a file for logging the installation. The default log file name is Setup.log. This file will be used by the Setup.exe program when distributing CATIA Version 5 to other computers in the scenarios discussed later. Note that there is no space after "f2". You are now ready to distribute CATIA Version 5 to other computers on your network by running the "myinstall.bat" command file.

Distributing the Software To a Single Client Computer

Now that the server has been prepared, as explained in "Setting Up the Server" , this task explains how to distribute the software from the server to another computer. Note that the online documentation files can be distributed using the same scenario.

1. Log on as Administrator onto the client computer. The name of the client computer, in our example above, is "chopin". You must belong to the Administrators group, or have the privileges assigned to the Administrators group. 2. Select the Start->Programs->Windows (NT) Explorer command to run the Explorer. You need to use the Explorer to connect to the server over the network and access the Setup.exe program in the folder C:\My_CATIA_V5_Folder on the server.

3. Select Tools->Map Network Drive... The Map Network Drive dialog box is displayed, and looks something like this:

4. Select a Drive, then double-click on the server name in the Shared Directories list to display the shared directories on the server. The shared directories are easily identified by a hand symbol below the folder. 5. Select the folder My_CATIA_V5_Folder on the server, and click OK. This is the folder you created when setting up the server. The folder was set up as a shared directory, and contains the response file (by default, Setup.iss). Note that selecting the folder displays the server name and folder name in the Path field: \\server\My_CATIA_V5_Folder In the All Folders list in the left window of the Explorer, you will now see the connection to the server, for example: My_CATIA_V5_Folder on `drive' (F:) 6. Using the Explorer, explore the drive: My_CATIA_V5_Folder on `drive' (F:) and double-click the "myinstall.bat" file which runs the Setup.exe program to install the software. The Setup.exe program is executed by the command file "myinstall.bat" (which you created previously in the scenario described in "Setting Up the Server" ) containing a command with the following syntax:
Setup.exe -s -f2path_name\LogFile -f1path_name\ResponseFile

The "-s" parameter replays the previously recorded response file and installs the software on the client computer using the information recorded in the response file. This means that the software is installed on the client in a folder using the same name. In our example, the folder will be:
C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B03\intel_a

The end section of the log file contains the result code indicating whether or not the installation succeeded. After the ResultCode key name, you will find a code. The meaning of each code is: 0: Success -1: General error. -2: Invalid mode. -3: Required data not found in the Setup.iss file. -4: Not enough memory available. -5: File does not exist. -6: Cannot write to the response file. -7: Unable to write to the log file. -8: Invalid path to the response file. -9: Not a valid list type (string or number). -10: Data type is invalid. -11: Unknown error during setup. -12: Dialogs are out of order. -51: Cannot create the specified folder. -52: Cannot access the specified file or folder. -53: Invalid option selected. The error codes belong to and are generated by the InstallShield product (InstallShield Software Corporation). Code -12 Error Code When installing on the server, you decided to record the install steps in a silent file (Setup.iss). If you then reuse the silent file to perform the same install on another computer, it may not work. For example, installing CATIA Version 5 also reinstalls some system libraries if the installation detects that the Windows system is not up to date. When this is the case, the dialog steps are not in the same order, and the installation may fail. However, the installation will work if both computers have the same level of system libraries. If the libraries were different, you need to reboot the client after the installation, then log on again as administrator on the client to run the command:
C:\install_folder\code\bin\cnext /regserver

where "install_folder" is the name of the folder where you installed the software, to start the OLE server (to allow OLE capabilities during a CATIA session).

Distributing the Software To a Client Using the RCMD Command

This task explains an alternative to the previous scenario: how to use the RCMD command, which is part of the Windows NT Workstation Resource Kit, for distributing the software from the server to another computer inside the same domain.

You need the Windows NT Workstation Resource Kit on the client computer ("chopin" in our example above) and on the server ("ravel" in our example above). Furthermore, for the RCMD command to operate, the RCMDSVC service must be started beforehand on the client computer. This involves installing a Remote Command server on each client computer, then starting the Remote Command server. For more information, refer to the following Windows NT online help topic: RCMD.EXE: Remote Command Service. The software supplied by Microsoft in the Windows NT Workstation Resource Kit is not officially supported. Microsoft (and Dassault Systemes) do not guarantee the performance of the Windows NT Workstation Resource Kit tools, response times for answering questions, or bug fixes to the tools. The software (including instructions for its use and printed and online documentation) is provided "AS IS" without warranty of any kind. 1. Log onto the server using an account with Domain Administrator privileges.

2. Create a command file (in the folder C:\My_CATIA_V5_Folder) containing the following commands, making sure that each command is on a separate line:
net use z: \\server\shared_dir_name pwd /user:domain_name\user_name z: setup.exe -s -f2path_name\LogFile -f1path_name\ResponseFile c: net use z: /delete exit

where you substitute your own values for "server", "shared_dir_name", "pwd", "domain_name" and "user_name", "path_name", "LogFile" and "ResponseFile". 3. For the purpose of this example, name the command file: MyRemoteInstall.bat. The example in the illustration below explains the role of each command in the file. The command:
net use z: \\ravel\My_CATIA_V5_Folder steve /user:CATIAV5\steve_evans

maps the z: device (the device must be available) on the client computer "chopin", to the shared folder "My_CATIA_V5_Folder" on the server "ravel", using the password "steve" (password enabling the user on the client "chopin" to connect to the shared folder on "ravel"). Note that the domain name is "CATIAV5" and the name of the user on "chopin" is "steve_evans". For more information about the net use command, refer to the Windows NT online help system. The command:
z: setup.exe -s -f2z:\my_log_file -f1path_name\ResponseFile

runs the Setup.exe command and writes an installation log file. The "-s" parameter replays the previously recorded response file and installs the software on the client computer using the settings in the response file. This means that the software is installed on the client in a folder using the same name. In our example, the folder is:
C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B03\intel_a

The command:
c: net use z: /delete exit

unmaps the z: device and terminates the command. 4. Open an MS-DOS window and execute the command file as follows:
rcmd \\remote_client_name path_name\name_of_commandfile

In our example, the exact command to run is:

rcmd \\chopin C:\My_CATIA_V5_Folder\MyRemoteInstall.bat

where "chopin" is the remote client name and "MyRemoteInstall.bat" is the name of the command file. The end result is illustrated below:

You can also use the System Management Server (SMS), part of the Windows NT BackOffice suite. SMS includes desktop management and software distribution that significantly automates the task of upgrading software on client computers.

Distributing CATIA Version 5 on UNIX

About Distributing CATIA Version 5 on UNIX

There are basically two ways in which you can provide multiple end users with access to CATIA Version 5. You can: install the software on each computer, either directly from the CD-ROM or from a server This is the ideal solution if you want the best level of performance, and involves installing and maintaining the software on each computer. or, set up the software on a server, and simply set up a minimum environment on each user's computer so end users can access the software over the network. This is the ideal solution if you want to save space on each computer, and facilitates future upgrades since means that you only have to upgrade the software on one computer: the server. The distribution scenarios described in this section are based on mounting NFS file systems. Note that you can also use DFS (Distributed File System). DFS is an open, cross-platform distributed file system for managing network security and administration, and is compatible with CATIA Version 5. You can run CATIA Version 5 using CATIA Version 4 userids. Using CATIA Version 5 with a CATIA Version 4 userid is transparent as is the case for other userids.

Setting Up the Server

This task explains a suggested method (not mandatory) for setting up the server. It involves copying the CATIA Version 5 software to a directory from which you set up a CATIA Version 5 installation server used to easily distribute the software to other UNIX workstations. This avoids having to install the software from the CD-ROM on each workstation. We have chosen the AIX platform for the purposes of this scenario.

1. Log on as root onto the UNIX workstation to be used as the server. The name of the server, in our example above, is "ravel". 2. Insert the CD-ROM into the drive on the server. 3. Check whether the CD-ROM drive is declared. 4. Check whether the CD-ROM drive is mounted, and mount the CD-ROM drive, if necessary. 5. Copy the contents of the CD-ROM to a directory you already created. For the purpose of our example, the name of the directory is:
/usr/My_CATIA_V5_Directory

6. Go to the directory as follows:

cd /usr/My_CATIA_V5_Directory

You are now ready to perform an installation of CATIA Version 5 from this directory.

7. To start the installation, enter the command:

./start

and follow the instructions provided by the program. For the purposes of this scenario, when you are prompted to choose a destination directory in the Choose Destination Location dialog box, choose the default installation directory:
/usr/DassaultSystemes/B03/aix_a

You could also export the CD-ROM directory itself in read only mode. You are now ready to distribute CATIA Version 5 to other workstations on your network.

Distributing the Software To A Client Workstation

Now that the server has been prepared, as explained in "Setting Up the Server" , this task explains how to distribute the software from the server to another workstation. We have chosen the AIX platform for the purposes of this scenario.

1. Log on as root onto the server. The name of the server, in our example above, is "ravel". You already copied the contents of the CD-ROM into the following directory on the server:
/usr/My_CATIA_V5_Directory

using the scenario described in "Setting Up the Server" . You are going to perform the installation by allowing the client to access this directory on the server. 2. Export the directory to the client. The directory must be accessible from the client. 3. Log on as root onto the client. 4. Mount the exported directory via NFS. 5. Go to the mounted directory.

6. To start the installation, enter the command:

./start

and follow the instructions provided by the program. The CATIA Version 5 software is installed on the client in the directory:
/usr/DassaultSystemes/B03/aix_a

You have another alternative if you have not already copied the CD-ROM contents into a directory: insert the CD-ROM, export the /cdrom directory to the client, then mount the /cdrom directory from the client.

Enabling User Access to the Software Over the Network

This task explains how to allow end users access to CATIA Version 5 by setting up an environment on each client, without installing the software on the client workstation. We have chosen the AIX platform for the purposes of this scenario.

1. Log on as root onto the server. The name of the server, in our example above, is "ravel". You already installed the software in:
/usr/DassaultSystemes/B03/aix_a

2. Export the installation directory to the client. The directory must be accessible from the client. 3. Log on as root onto the client. The name of the client, in our example above, is "chopin". 4. Mount the exported installation directory via NFS. 5. Go to the mounted directory.

6. Set the path of the installation directory on the server using the command:
export PATH=/usr/DassaultSystemes/B03/aix_a/code/bin:$PATH

You need to set the path because you are going to run the command to modify the user environment on the client. 7. Create the default global (public) environment using the command:
setcatenv -p path_of_install_directory_on_server

where "path_of_install_directory_on_server" is the path defining the installation directory on the server. In our example, you would run the command:
setcatenv -p /usr/DassaultSystemes/B03/

Running the setcatenv command as a normal end user runs successfully, but does not create a global environment. For a description of the setcatenv command syntax for UNIX, refer to "Customizing Your Environment on UNIX" . 8. Now run a CATIA Version 5 session to check your environment has been correctly set up.

Managing Environments

What Is An Environment?
What is an environment? An environment is a set of runtime environment variables. Each variable points to a path searched by the software when you start a session. On Windows, these variables are contained in the registry, and on UNIX, they are exported by shell scripts. For example, on Windows, the CATDocView variable is set by default to:
C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B03doc

meaning that the online documentation files are installed in the folder C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B03doc. When you want to access the online documentation, the software will look for the files in this location. The term environment also includes its graphical representation, in other words how it is represented to the user on the user's desktop. What are global and user environments? A global environment can only be created by a Windows administrator, or the root userid on UNIX. For example, the default environment created at installation is a global environment: "global" means that it is visible to and can be used by all users on the computer on which it has been set up. Global environments can only be created, edited or deleted by a Windows administrator, or the root userid on UNIX. A user environment is visible to and can be used and manipulated (customized or deleted) only by the user who created it. How are environments managed? Environments are managed: by the installation procedure, which creates a default global environment The default environments created at installation on each platform are described in "About the Environment Created on Windows" and "About the Environment Created on UNIX" respectively. by using the setcatenv command: this command creates and edits user environments only (except if you are administrator or root, in which case you can edit the default global environment) by using the delcatenv command: this command deletes environments by using the catiaenv command (to run the CATIA Environment Editor) on Windows only: this GUI-based tool creates, edits and deletes environments.

What does customizing an environment mean? Customizing your runtime environment means providing different values for the runtime variables in your default environment, or setting up new environments. For example, you may install the online documentation at a location different from the default location. If this is the case, you need to specify where the documentation files are located by modifying the value for the CATDocView variable. this is an example of what we mean by customizing your runtime environment. You can customize runtime environment variable values: by using the setcatenv command, available on all platforms using the CATIA Environment Editor on Windows or by editing the CATIA.V5R3.B03.sh or CATIA.V5R3.B03.csh environments (shell scripts) in the $HOME/CATEnv directory on UNIX, using your favorite text editor. When customizing runtime environments, you can: create new environments edit existing environments copy existing environments (UNIX only) delete environments but you cannot create new variables, or rename existing variables. CATIA Version 5 Release 3 supports ONLY the creation, modification and deletion of LOCAL environments: the creation, modification and deletion of REMOTE environments is not supported. This means that if you customize a local environment, and the same environment exists on other computers, you have to edit the environments on all of those computers if you want the environments to be identical. The runtime environment variables in a CATIA environment are listed in the table below:

Variable Name CATInstallPath

Description CATIA installation path Executable code search path (UNIX PATH only) LIBPATH Library search path (AIX) Library search path (Solaris and LD_LIBRARY_PATH IRIX) N32 shared library search path LD_LIBRARYN32_PATH (IRIX) SHLIB_PATH Library search path (HP-UX)

Introduced in Release.. CATIA V5R1 CATIA V5R1 CATIA V5R1 CATIA V5R1 CATIA V5R2 CATIA V5R1

CATDLLPath

DLL search path (internal use only) CATIA V5R1 Search path for product identification CATICPath CATIA V5R1 (internal use) CATCommandPath Command search path CATIA V5R1 CATDictionaryPath Library dictionary search path CATIA V5R1 CATDocView Online documentation search path CATIA V5R1 CATReffilesPath Reference file search path CATIA V5R1 CATReferenceSettingPath Default reference setting search CATIA V5R1 path; also used to store settings locked by the administrator CATFontPath Font search path CATIA V5R1 Search path for CATIA Galaxy online CATGalaxyPath CATIA V5R1 information files CATGraphicPath Graphic and icon search path CATIA V5R1 CATMsgCatalogPath Application message file search path CATIA V5R1 CATIA V5R2 CATFeatureCatalogPath Feature catalog search path CATStartupPath Sample file search path CATIA V5R1 CATUserSettingPath Permanent user setting search path CATIA V5R1 CATTemp Temporary user setting search path CATIA V5R1 CATIA V5R2 CATCache Cache search path CATIA V5R2 CATReport Conversion trace report location CATErrorLog Error log search path CATIA V5R1

Customizing Your Environment on Windows

This task explains how to customize an existing environment on Windows using the CATIA Environment Editor. 1. Select the Start->Programs->Catia->Tools->Environment Editor V5R3 command. The CATIA Environment Editor appears, and looks something like this:

Note that the list of existing environments is displayed in the Environment name list. The list will contain the CATIA environments detected on your computer. Only the New and Edit commands is available at first: the other commands are grayed out. 2. To display the variables for a given environment, double-click the environment name. For example, double-click the CATIA.V5R3.B03 environment which is the name of the default global environment set up at installation. This will be the only environment name in the list after a default installation. However, once you create new environments, these will also be displayed in the list.

The variables and their values are displayed: the variable name is displayed on the left and the value (path) for the corresponding variable is displayed to the right.

Note that Edit and Delete commands are also available for editing and deleting environments. The Type field indicates one of two possible values: User: indicates that the environment was set up using your userid, is visible to you and can only be accessed by you (you cannot see anybody else's user environments) Global: indicates that the environment was set up by somebody belonging to the Administrators group, or who has the privileges assigned to the Administrators group (you can see all the global environments on your computer): this is what you will see after an initial installation on your computer. This means that you will only see in the Environment name list the names of environments you created, or which the administrator authorized you to see. You can only edit environments which belong to you. Furthermore, if you select a global environment as end user, you will be able to display an environment, but not edit it. 3. Click a variable name in the list. The name of the variable is displayed in the Name field at the bottom of the window, and the corresponding value is displayed in the Value field just below. For the purpose of illustration, the following example reflects the case of an end user displaying (and not being able to edit) a global environment:

For example, the default path for the CATDocView variable is:
C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B03doc\intel_a\doc

However, you may have installed the online documentation in a different folder.

4. If you are authorized to edit the variable, type in the new value in the Value field, then click the Set button. For example, you would type in the new path for the variable CATDocView. The value of the variable is reset in the Environment Variables field. 5. Click OK. To create an environment using the New command This task explains how to create a new environment using the CATIA Environment Editor.

1. Select the Start->Programs->Catia->Tools->Environment Editor V5R3 command.

2. Click the New button to display the following dialog box:

3. Enter the name of the environment to be created. If ou are end user, 4. Enter the path of your installation folder. The default installation folder path is:
C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B03\OS_a\

5. If you logged on as administrator, enter the environment mode. The type can be user or global (global is available only for administrators only). If you are logged on as a normal end user, the type is set automatically to "user". 6. Set the product line. In our case, this is "CATIA". 7. Click OK to create the environment. To create or customize an environment using the setcatenv command You can also customize environments using the setcatenv command. This command lets you create user environments only. The command is located in:
\install_folder\OS_a\code\bin

where "install_folder" is the name of the installation folder.

The full list of options for the setcatenv command is as follows: -e: environment file name -p: specifies the installation folder, and is mandatory (by default, it is set to the default installation folder: C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B03) -u: updates a variable by adding a new value for the variable (the previous value is kept, but is concatenated with the new value: the new value is read first). If you create a new environment, you can start a session using the new environment with the command:
cnext -env my_new_environment

where "my_new_environment" is the name of the environment you created.

Creating an environment using the setcatenv command sets up the following environment: sets up Start->Programs->CATIA by adding the shortcut for your environment and creates the shortcut for your environment on the desktop.

To delete an environment using the delcatenv command Use the command:

delcatenv -env my_environment

to delete an environment. Keep in mind that deleting an environment using the delcatenv command deletes: all the registry entries its graphical representation, in other words, how it is represented to the user on the user's desktop (desktop shortcut, shortcut in Start menu, etc.).

To Set Up Two Environments With Different Licensing Settings A situation may arise in which you have two different configurations installed on your computer, and you want to use both configuration licenses. Each time you use one of the configurations, your licensing settings are stored in the same place. This means that when you start "Configuration 1", acquire the corresponding license, then exit your session, your licensing settings are saved. When you start "Configuration 2", your previous licensing settings are retrieved, so you must acquire the new license. Each time you exit, the previous licensing settings are overwritten by the new licensing settings. This means that, when you use different configurations alternately, you have to continually reacquire the corresponding license each time you start. You can avoid this problem by editing each environment. Let's assume that the two configurations are installed on an Intel computer running Windows NT, and that you are authorized to edit each environment. The two variables of interest are: CATReferenceSettingPath CATUserSettingPath In the default environments created, let's assume each variable has the following values: Environment 1:
CATReferenceSettingPath C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B03\intel_a\resources CATUserSettingPath %USERPROFILE%\CATSettings

For example, CATUserSettingPath usually points to:

C:\Winnt\Profiles\"user"\CATSettings

where "user" is your userid. Environment 2: CATReferenceSettingPath CATUserSettingPath C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B03\intel_a\resources %USERPROFILE%\CATSettings

Note that, for the moment, the path pointed to by CATUserSettingPath is the same in both cases. Your licensing settings are saved here each time you use a configuration. 1. Select the Start->Programs->CATIA->Tools->Environment Editor V5R3 command. 2. Edit "Environment 1" and reset the value for the CATUserSettingPath variable as follows:
C:\Winnt\Profiles\"user"\CATSettings_Config1

3.. Edit "Environment 2" and reset the value for the CATUserSettingPath variable as follows:
C:\Winnt\Profiles\"user"\CATSettings_Config2

4. Start CATIA configuration 1, acquire the license and exit the session. Your license settings will now be stored in:
C:\Winnt\Profiles\"user"\CATSettings_Config1

5. Start CATIA configuration 2, acquire the license and exit the session.
C:\Winnt\Profiles\"user"\CATSettings_Config2

You will be able to use each configuration alternately, and without having to reacquire the corresponding license each time. However, you must not use the Tools->Options command.

Customizing Your Environment on UNIX

On UNIX, there is no interactive tool available for customizing values for runtime environment variables. To create or customize an environment using the setcatenv command The setcatenv command is available for customizing environments. Before running the command, set the PATH variable and LIBPATH(AIX), LD_LIBRARY_PATH (Solaris and IRIX) or SHLIB_PATH (HP-UX), or run the command as follows:
install_directory/OS_a/code/bin

where "install_directory" is the name of the installation directory, and "OS-a" is: aix_a hpux_a irix_a solaris_a. The full list of options for the setcatenv command is as follows: -e: environment file name -d: specifies the directory in which the environment file will be created ($HOME/CATEnv by default) -p: specifies the installation directory, and is mandatory (by default, set to the default installation directory: /usr/DassaultSystemes/B03). Any environment created by either an administrator or an end user using the setcatenv command is a user (not global) environment. If you want to simply reset the value for a variable, you can also use your favorite editor to edit the environment file shell scripts. If you create a new environment, you can start a session using the new environment with the command:
cnext -env my_new_environment

where "my_new_environment" is the name of the environment you created. What Is the Impact On My Environment? Creating an environment using the setcatenv command: creates in your $HOME directory the CATEnv directory and creates in this directory your user environment required to set the CATIA Version 5 runtime environment variables: CATIA.V5R3.B03.sh by default (for use with Korn or Bourne shells): the name of the environment is specified using the -e option CATIA.V5R3.B03.csh by default (for use with C shell): the name of the environment is specified using the -e option

on UNIX systems running the CDE desktop, creates in your $HOME directory the following filetree: $HOME/.dt/appmanager/my_CATIA (contains one empty file per environment created) $HOME/.dt/types/My_CATIA.dt (action description file for my_CATIA directory) $HOME/.dt/types/CATIAFiles.dt (action description file for CATIA document types) $HOME/.dt/types/"Envname".dt (action description file for environment icon) where "Envname" is the name of the environment created $HOME/.dt/icons (contains icons for CATIA document types). and creates in the CATIA directory in the Application Manager cabinet, (accessible via the front panel on UNIX systems running the CDE desktop), a new directory named "My_CATIA", and creates in this directory the user environment icon. You do not see the icon immediately. To display the icon, you must click the Application Manager icon on the CDE front panel, go into the Desktop Tools cabinet, then double-click the Reload Applications icon. You can also log on and log off to display the icon. on the Magic SGI Desktop on IRIX, creates in your $HOME/CATENV directory the following filetree: $HOME/CATENV/CATSGI/CATIA/"Envname" (file required for graphic representation of the environment in the Magic SGI desktop), where "Envname" is the name of the environment created $HOME/CATENV/CATSGI/CATIA/.ftr/DassaultSystemes.CATIA.Files.ftr (action description file for CATIA document types) $HOME/CATENV/CATSGI/CATIA/.ftr/DassaultSystemes.CATIA.Environment.ftr (action description file for environment icon) $HOME/CATENV/CATSGI/CATIA/.fti ((contains icons for CATIA document types). To delete an environment using the delcatenv command Use the command:
delcatenv -env my_environment

to delete an environment. Keep in mind that deleting an environment using the delcatenv command deletes: all the shell script files its graphical representation, in other words, how it is represented to the user on the user's desktop (CDE desktop environment, etc.).

Managing CATIA Software

Getting Information About Installed CATIA Software

This task explains how to identify the level of CATIA software (General Availability build level or service pack) installed on your computer, and which configurations and/or products have been installed. You do not need to be an administrator to obtain information about installed CATIA software: this capability is available to all users. On Windows 1. Select the Start->Programs->CATIA->Tools->Software Management V5R3 command, or run the program:
install_root\code\bin\CATSoftwareMgt.exe

where "install_root" is the name of your installation folder which is, by default:
C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B03\OS-a

where "OS-a" is: intel-a (Intel platform) win_a (Windows 95 OSR2 and Windows 98 platforms). The Dassault Systemes Software Management dialog box is displayed, and the General tab specifies the following information: Build level: specifies the CATIA software build level Service Pack Level: identifies which service packs (SPK) have been installed (under certain conditions, more than one service pack may be installed). If no service packs have been installed, the "Service Pack Level" field specifies: No Service Pack Installation Path: specifies the CATIA installation folder for the specified build level.

If a service pack has been installed, the Service Pack Level field will specify the service pack level, and the last service pack level that was committed. Note that you can have several service packs installed on your computer. For information about what committing and rolling back a service pack means, refer to "Committing and Rolling Back Service Packs". 2. Click the Installed Software tab. The installed configurations and/or products are listed:

On UNIX Assuming that the software was installed in the default installation directory, run the command:
/usr/DassaultSystemes/B03/OS_a/code/bin/CATSoftwareMgt

where "OS-a" is: aix_a hpux_a irix_a solaris_a The Dassault Systemes Software Management dialog box is displayed, along with the General tab containing the same options as on Windows (see above).

On all platforms, you can also run the command in batch:

install_root\code\bin\CATSoftwareMgt

with the following options: -L: lists installed configurations and/or products -I: checks integrity (see "Checking Integrity and Prerequisites") -P: checks prerequisites (see "Checking Integrity and Prerequisites") -C/-R: performs service pack commit or rollback; you must be administrator to use these options (see "Committing and Rolling Back Service Packs") -o logfile: sets name of output logfile (default is info.log).

Installing a Service Pack

This task explains how to install a service pack. From start to finish, this task should take approximately 15 minutes. A service pack can only be installed after installing a major CATIA release. Background information about service packs. Software fixes are distributed in the form of service packs. The service pack CD-ROM contains fixes for all configurations and products available at the time it is built. Each service pack supersedes the previous ones and may be installed on top of the released level or on top of a previous service pack. No individual corrections are delivered in between two service packs. Service packs are made available on a regular basis. Delivery is synchronized for UNIX and NT platforms. Installing a service pack also involves committing or rolling back a service pack. For more information, refer to Committing and Rolling Back Service Packs. Installing a Service Pack On Windows 1. Log on as an administrator. You must belong to the Administrators group, or have the privileges assigned to the Administrators group. Otherwise, you will not be able to start the installation. 2. Insert the CD-ROM into the drive. The installation starts automatically. Follow the instructions, and note the following: the service pack will be installed automatically in the same folder as the current CATIA release: you cannot choose to install it elsewhere you are not allowed to choose configurations or products: the service pack CD-ROM contains fixes for all configurations and products available at the time it is built. Fixes are installed for the configurations and products detected in your installation. unlike a normal CATIA installation, you are not allowed to start a CATIA session directly at the end of the installation procedure.

During the installation, you can choose to commit the service pack automatically. This is useful when you want to save disk space. For more details, refer to Committing and Rolling Back Service Packs. An installation log is created (or the existing log is updated) in the current temporary directory, located by default in: C:\TEMP\cxinst.log You can also install a service pack in batch mode using the following command: startspk [-b] [-h] [-bC] -b: batch mode without automatic commit -bC: batch mode with automatic commit -h: help. Examples: startspk: starts service pack installation using the graphic user interface startspk -b: installs the service pack without automatically committing the service pack startspk -bc: installs and automatically commits the service pack. Installing a Service Pack On Windows UNIX

1. Logon as root. 2. Insert the CD-ROM for your UNIX operating system into the drive. 3. Declare and mount the CD-ROM drive if necessary, depending on your UNIX system (as described in "Installing CATIA Version 5 on UNIX for the First Time"). 4. Enter the command:
./startSPK -s

Follow the instructions, and note the following: the service pack will be installed automatically in the same directory as the current CATIA release: on UNIX, if you installed the current CATIA release elsewhere than in the default location, you will be prompted to enter the path you are not allowed to choose configurations or products: the service pack CD-ROM contains fixes for all configurations and products available at the time it is built. Fixes are installed for the configurations and products detected in your installation. unlike a normal CATIA installation, you are not allowed to start a CATIA session directly at the end of the installation procedure. An installation log is created (or the existing log is updated) in the current temporary directory, located by default in: $HOME/CXINST.log You can also run the installation in batch mode using the following command:
startspk [-s] [-b] [-u unloaddir] [-h] [-bC]

-s: silent mode (without music) -b: batch mode without automatic commit ("-b" is useless if there is at least one argument other than "-s" ) -u: specifies the unload directory; if "-u" is not specified, the default directory is /usr/DassaultSystemes/B03 - h: displays help -bC: installs and automatically commits the service pack. Examples: or startspk -s: installs the service pack using the graphic user interface, and without music startspk -s -u /home/install/DassaultSystemes/B03 -bC: in batch mode, installs and automatically commits the service pack in /home/install/DassaultSystemes/B03
startspk

batch mode, installs in the default directory (/usr/DassaultSystemes/B03) without automatic commit startspk -u /mydirectory: in batch mode, installs in the directory "/mydirectory" without music and without automatic commit ("-b" is superfluous).

startspk -s -b: in

Committing and Rolling Back Service Packs

This task explains how to commit or roll back service packs. After installing a service pack, you may want to spend some time using the service pack for validation purposes, before making it officially available to your end users. "Committing" a service pack means applying the service pack to your CATIA installation, so that it becomes the official working level. After spending some time using the service pack for validation purposes, you may find that the service pack is not suitable. If this is the case, you can "roll back" the service pack: rolling back a service pack uninstalls the service pack, and restores the CATIA software level to the level prior to installing the service pack. As explained in "Getting Information About Installed CATIA Software", you can identify at any time the level of CATIA software on your computer. You must be an administrator to commit or roll back CATIA software. On Windows 1. Log on as an administrator. You must belong to the Administrators group, or have the privileges assigned to the Administrators group. 2. Select the Start->Programs->CATIA->Tools->Software Management V5R3 command, or run the program:
install_root\code\bin\CATSoftwareMgt.exe

where "install_root" is the name of your installation folder which is, by default:
C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B03\OS-a

where "OS-a" is: intel-a (for the Intel platform) win_a (for Windows 95 and 98). The Dassault Systemes Software Management dialog box is displayed, and the General tab is open. 3. Click the Service Pack Management tab. If no service packs are installed, the tab will inform you that no service packs are installed.

However, if a service pack is detected, the tab will inform you exactly what you can do. For example, the following tab informs you that "Service Pack 1" has been installed after a GA installation. Depending on the results of your validation, you may decide to commit the service pack, or roll back to the previous level.

4. Click the Commit button to commit the service pack, or the Rollback button to uninstall the service pack and restore the previous level. Commit and Rollback Rules Keep the following rules in mind when committing and rolling back service packs: if you install a CATIA GA level, then "Service Pack 1", and then intend to install "Service Pack 2", you must commit "Service Pack 1" before installing "Service Pack 2" let's assume you install a CATIA GA level, then "Service Pack 1", and commit the service pack; if you then add configurations or products to your installation, you will be prompted at the end of the installation to reinstall "Service Pack 1"; when you reinstall "Service Pack 1", the service pack is committed automatically.

You can also choose to commit a service pack automatically during service pack installation. The consequences of choosing to automatically commit a service pack at installation are: the service pack overwrites any previous level (GA or service pack): if you have already decided to commit the new service pack, and you do not want to keep the previous version, this allows want to save disk space once you have automatically committed the service pack, you cannot roll back to the previous level (GA or service pack) when you add products after automatically committing a service pack, the new software is also automatically committed. On UNIX 1. Logon as root. 2. Assuming that the software was installed in the default installation directory, run the command:
/usr/DassaultSystemes/B03/OS_a/code/bin/CATSoftwareMgt

where "OS-a" is: aix_a hpux_a irix_a solaris_a The Dassault Systemes Software Management dialog box is displayed, and the General tab is open. 3. Click the Service Pack Management tab, and proceed as explained for Windows (see above). The same commit and rollback rules apply on UNIX.

Checking Integrity and Prerequisites

This task explains how to check CATIA software integrity and prerequisites. You do not need to be an administrator to obtain information about installed CATIA software: this capability is available to all users, and at any time. On Windows 1. Select the Start->Programs->CATIA->Tools->Software Management V5R3 command, or run the program:
install_root\code\bin\CATSoftwareMgt.exe

where "install_root" is the name of your installation folder which is, by default:
C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B03\OS-a

where "OS-a" is: intel-a (for the Intel platform) win_a (for Windows 95 and 98). The Dassault Systemes Software Management dialog box is displayed, and the General tab is open. 2. Click the Check Integrity tab. This checks the overall integrity of your CATIA software. The message: Integrity is OK confirms there is no integrity problem. However, when the message: Integrity is KO appears, your CATIA installation has been corrupted (for example, some CATIA files are missing), it will be followed by troubleshooting information helping you to identify the problem. 3. Click the Check Prerequisites tab. This simply checks if you still have the prerequisite software required for CATIA to operate. On UNIX

1. Assuming that the software was installed in the default installation directory, run the command:
/usr/DassaultSystemes/B03/OS_a/code/bin/CATSoftwareMgt

where "OS-a" is: aix_a hpux_a irix_a solaris_a The Dassault Systemes Software Management dialog box is displayed, and the General tab is open. 2. Click the Check Integrity or Check Prerequisites tab. The checks performed are the same as on Windows (see above).

Setting Up Your Printers on UNIX

About Setting Up Printers on UNIX

You can only print a document (using either the File->Print... command or the ) if a default printer has been set up. On Windows, you print Quick Print icon using the default printer declared by your Windows system administrator. However, on UNIX, you will only be able to print once you have set up a printer. If you attempt to print on UNIX before setting up a printer, the following message appears:

The objective of this section is to show you how to set up your environment to get your printer operational, which is performed by creating and customizing a file called a printer configuration file. The role of this file is to declare your printer so it is recognized by CATIA Version 5. Once at least one printer has been declared, the above message will no longer appear. We assume that the physical printing device has been installed and connected to the system your system administrator has already declared your printer to your UNIX operating system.

Adding a Printer
This tasks explains how to set up your printer. You can only print a document on UNIX if at least one printer has been set up using the File -> Printer Setup... command. 1. Select the File->Print Setup command to display the Printer Setup dialog box. Note that the Available Printer field is empty. 2. Click the Add... button to display the Printer Properties dialog box:

3. Click on the Driver button and choose the appropriate driver for the printer.

Ask your system administrator which printers require which drivers. The list of available drivers is: PostScript HP-GL/2 RTL CGM ISO Raster Calcomp Gerber Oce Versatec Custom The following new drivers are supported: the CALS and ATA formats for CGM HP 1000 Series plotter HP-GL and IBM-GL support for pen plotters. 4. Click on the Advanced Configuration... button to configure the driver. Driver configuration options vary from one driver to another. Refer to your plotter documentation for information about the configuration options for each driver. 5. In the Paper Format group box, set the desired paper format options: default and maximum paper size, margins and orientation (portrait or landscape). 6. In the Submission Scripts group box, set the desired options activated when the print job is submitted. This group box lets you specify: the default output file name: each time you print a document, an output file is created at the location you specify in the text field the default queue name: this field lets you choose which print queue to send the print job to. The Custom buttons let you specify the location of your own submission scripts.

7. Click OK to return to the Printer Setup dialog box. A printer configuration file containing all the settings you set in the Printer Properties dialog box is created in: $HOME/CATSettings/Printers/PLOT0000.plot_cfg. The numbers of additional printers created are incremented by one, as follows: PLOT0001.plot_cfg, PLOT0002.plot_cfg, etc. The format of CATIA Version 4 plot configuration files is not compatible with the Version 5 format.

Removing a Printer
This tasks explains how to delete a printer. At least one printer must have been set up using the File -> Printer Setup... command. 1. Select the File->Print Setup command to display the Printer Setup dialog box. Note that the name of a printer is displayed in the Available printers combo box list. 2. Select the printer to be deleted from the Available printers combo box list. 3. Click the Remove button to remove the printer. The printer configuration file ($HOME/CATSettings/Printers/PLOTxxxx.plot_cfg) is deleted.

Configuring an Existing Printer

This tasks explains how to reconfigure an existing printer. At least one printer must have been set up using the File -> Printer Setup... command. 1. Select the File->Print Setup command to display the Printer Setup dialog box. Note that name of a printer is displayed in the Available printers combo box list. 2. Select the printer to be reconfigured from the Available printers combo box list. 3. Click the Configure...button. The printer is reconfigured printer configuration file ($HOME/CATSettings/Printers/PLOTxxxx.plot_cfg) is modified.

Testing the Printer

This tasks explains how to test your printer on UNIX. You need to have already set up at least one printer. 1. Select the File->Print Setup command to display the Printer Setup dialog box. 2. Click the Test button.

Using Power Input Mode

About Power Input Mode

Power input mode is a user-friendly productivity assistant allowing you to: enter numeric data more easily in editable fields and spinners (but cannot be used in combo lists); as such, it is intended as an alternative to typing values in dialog boxes (dialog boxes are however still available) enter commands directly (by typing the c: followed by the name of the command) entering selection queries using the query language available for the Edit->Search... command. Power input is available in certain (but not all) application commands. To activate power input mode, select the Tools->Options... command, click the General tab, and click the CATIA - P2 option, then restart your session. The power input field is located in the bottom right corner of the status bar:

Entering Data
This tasks shows you how to enter data more rapidly and more productively. 1. Select a command that allows you to use the power input field for data entry. For example, in the Part Design application, you could select the Chamfer command. In the lower right corner of the window, the power input field is displayed: If we zoom on the lower right corner of the window, note that: the area to the left of the power input field displays the names of the dialog box options for which power input is possible: this is the case only for editable fields and spinners (but not for combo lists) the power input field contains the default values for those options, separated by commas the icon appears to the right of the power input field: when this icon is displayed, you know that the command you are using supports power input. The dialog box remains open by default. 2. Enter the values for all the options in the power input field, making sure that you separate each entry using the separator appropriate for your language environment, then press ENTER to validate your input. Even if the cursor focus is in a document window, you do not need to click in the power input field to transfer the focus to the power input field: any characters you type will be directed to the power input field automatically Use the Tab key to scroll from the power input field in the main application window to the data input fields in application dialog boxes. Select the ESCAPE key to return the focus to the document window. This mechanism is also implemented in drafting documents when you enter text: as soon as you start typing, the focus is transferred automatically to the text editor window.

On Windows, you can set the separator you want to use. To do so, select the Start->Settings->Control Panel command, double-click the Regional Settings control, then click the Number tab. Set the separator using the List Separator option. The default is the comma (",") for the English, Japanese, Korean and simplified Chinese environments, and the semi-colon (";") for all other supported environments. On UNIX, you cannot set the separator. The separator is the comma (",") for the English, Japanese, Korean and simplified Chinese environments, and the semi-colon (";") for all other supported environments. The values you enter in the power input field are updated instantaneously in the fields in the dialog box. If the dialog box is still open, click Apply or OK in the dialog box. However, you icon. If the dialog box is no can also remove the dialog box by clicking the longer visible, pressing ENTER validates your input and executes the command (equivalent to Apply and OK). If the color of the text you enter in the power input field changes to red, this means that you have made a mistake: for example, the number of values you enter may exceed the number of options for which power input is possible. Use the up and down keyboard arrow keys if you want to recover any input you previously entered. Finally, if a dialog box provides contextual commands, right-clicking over the power input field also accesses the same commands. Using power input helps you to be more productive because it provides an alternative to using dialog boxes for inputting data. In dialog boxes, you have to click in each editable field, or use the Tab key, to move from field to field. The power input field lets you concentrate on just the data you have you enter, and thereby facilitates data input.

Running Commands
This task explains how to run commands from the power input field. 1. To run a command from the power input field, enter a command like this:
c:command_name

where command_name is the name of the command as it appears in the menus. For example, enter the following command:
c:New...

or:
c:New

to run the File->New... command. 2. Press the ENTER key to run the command. When pointing at icons, the syntax for running the associated command is displayed to the left of the power input field, to remind you that you can also run the command from the power input field. For example, when you point at the New
c:New

icon , the following message is displayed:

Using the Search Language

This section explains how to use the search language to search for objects. The search language offers almost all of the search functions available with the Edit->Search... command described in "Selecting Using the Search... Command" . Searching using this command generates a search query (expressed in the search language) displayed in the "Generated query" field of the Search dialog box. The search language can now be used both in the power input field and in the "Generated query" field of the Search dialog box. 1. Enter the search string. 2. Press the ENTER key. The searched objects are sent to the current command. If the current command is the Select command, the objects are selected. Search Language: Syntax You can search for objects using the same criteria as with the Edit->Search... command. The message catalog KeyboardInput.CATNls sets up the power input search syntax, and search language shortcuts. The localized version of this message catalog determines the exact syntax and shortcuts for each language. Separators The search language uses the following separators (whose role you will discover in the examples below): : and = (these separators are interchangeable) ! (different). Searching by Name

You can search for an object name displayed in the specification tree. This is particularly useful if you renamed objects using the Feature properties tab of the Edit->Properties command, or the Properties contextual command. The name can also contain special characters. To search for an object by its name, enter the following command:
name:object_name

or a command using an abbreviation referred to as a "shortcut" as follows:

n:object_name

where "object_name" is the name of the object. You can also use the "*" character as a wildcard to replace any number of characters. For example, the command:
name:wheel*

searches for all objects starting with the string "wheel". The message catalog KeyboardInput.CATNls sets up unambiguous default shortcuts. For example, there is no ambiguity between the shortcut "c:" (used in the power input area to enter a command), and "col:" (used for searches on color). In loclized versions of the catalog, check that there are no identical shortcuts for two different items. Searching by Type Use the Type field in the Search dialog box to display a list of types (the types are translated in each language). To search for an object by its type, enter the following command:
type:type

or:
t:type.

You can also search for types using the "." (period) as follows: For example:
Part.Pad

searches for all objects of type Pad created using the Part Design workbench. The following syntax is also allowed:
workbench.type.name= workbench.type.color=

For example:
Part.Pad.Color='Sea Green'

searches for all objects of type Pad created using the Part Design workbench, and of the color Sea Green. You can also omit certain expressions as follows:
Part.Pad

and:
.Pad

are equivalent. Similarly:

Part.Pad.Color='Sea Green'

and:
Color='Sea Green'

are also equivalent. Here are some more examples using other operators described in Using Operators:
workbench.type.name=point* workbench.type.name!=point* workbench.type.name:point*

and:
workbench.type.color='sea green' workbench.type.color!='sea green' workbench.type.color:'sea green'

The following are also allowed:

col='sea green' color='sea green' name=*1 n=*1 type=hole t=hole

Searching by Color You assign colors to objects using the Color dialog box Graphic tab, when using the Edit->Properties command or the Properties contextual command. For a reminder about color names, refer to "Displaying and Editing Graphic Properties". If you are reading a document using custom colors and created by another user, you need to load the same custom colors if you want the search command to find objects using the same colors. The names of the custom colors are "Custom 1", "Custom 2", etc. To search for an object of a specific color, enter the following command:
color:color_name

or:
col:color_name

where "color_name" is the color of the object. If the name of the color contains a blank (which is the case with most of the colors available), you can type the full name as follows:
color:Sea Green

You can also surround the blank or the color name with a single quote (by default) like this:
color:Light' 'Blue

or like this:
color:'Light Blue'

You can also search for colors using their RGB values. For example:
color:'(200,100,100)'

Searching by Product Properties You assign properties to products (and parts in products) by right-clicking an element in the specification tree and selecting the Properties command from the contextual menu, clicking the Product tab in the Properties dialog box, and setting the properties in the Product frame. The properties you can search for (the same as those you assigned to the element) are: Part Number Revision Definition Nomenclature Product Description Component Description. For example, the search queries:
Product Description:completed Product' 'Description:completed 'Product Description':completed 'Product Description'=completed

search for all elements whose Product Description contains the text "completed". The property name is not case sensitive. You can also sue the following queries:
product description:completed product' 'description:completed

Searching Objects Belonging to a Selection Set To search for an object belonging to a selection set, enter the following command:
set:selection_set_name

where "selection_set_name" is the name of the selection set. The strings "name", "type", "color" and "set" are appropriate for the English language only. The message catalog KeyboardInput.CATNls determines the exact syntax for your language. Use of Special Characters in Searches

A name can contain any of the following characters, which also play a special role in the search syntax: : , & + - ( ) " * . = blank ; ! ' < > You must use the character ' (apostrophe by default) to surround strings containing special characters and which are to be interpreted exactly. For example:
name:*'&*'*

searches for all names containing the string &*. The following line in the KeyboardInput.CATNls resource file :
Quote = "`";

specifies the default character for surrounding strings. However, you may also want to search for names containing the character ` itself. In this case, enter the character twice and make sure you place the two characters outside any string surrounded by the character `. Note also that the character ` can be used when searching for names, types, colors and selection sets. For example:
name:*''*

searches for all names containing a single `. Using Operators The supported operators are: &, +, and - (for AND, OR and EXCEPT respectively) and ( ). Blanks are not considered as separators. They may be surrounded by ', but this is not mandatory.

The following examples:

name:*wheel `&' door&type:Part name:*wheel `&' door & type:Part name:*'wheel&door' & type:Part name:* `wheel&door'& type:Part name:*wheel`&'door &type:Part

all search for parts whose names end with "wheel&door". The command:
name:*wheel' '

searches for names ending with "wheel ". The command:

name:' 'wheel*

searches for names beginning with " wheel ". The command:
name:wheel1

+ name:wheel2

searches for two objects named "wheel1" and "wheel2". Upper and Lower Case When searching for names, if the value is entered in lower case, the case is ignored. If there is at least one upper case character, the case is taken into account. Priority There is no priority among operators, but there is a priority in their order of appearance (from left to right). For example, the query:
type:Part & name:toto + type:Hole & Color:Black

is interpreted as:
type:Part & (name:toto + (type:Hole & Color:Black) )

and thus searches for elements of type "Part" among the objects in the document that are "black holes" and named "toto". To avoid ambiguity, use parentheses like this:

type:Part & (name:toto + (type:Hole & Color:Black) )

to obtain the same result. Using Search Filters You can use the same search filters (except In List) as with the Edit->Search... command, by using the context keywords "all", "in", "from" and "sel": all: searches the whole specification tree from top to bottom, to find objects created using all workbenches. in: the search will locate the appropriate elements in the active object and in the workbench you are currently using from: searches the elements in the active object to the bottom of the tree. For example, in a Part document, both parts and sketches are searched. sel: if you already selected objects before selecting the Search... command, this option searches from the selected objects to the bottom of the tree. The default is "in". Context keywords must always be placed at the end of the search string, and after the separator "," like this:
type:Hole, all

The separator is the comma (",") for the English, Japanese, Korean and simplified Chinese environments, and the semi-colon (";") for all other supported environments.

Using and Customizing Fonts

About Fonts
This section contains principally conceptual information about font support in general, identifies which areas of the CATIA Version 5 software are concerned by font support, and explains how you can customize fonts. The areas of the software which allow font customization are: user interface: menu names, command names, tooltips, dialog box names and texts, etc. specification tree texts texts you enter in certain applications, and which reference fonts: a typical example is the text you enter in drawing documents created using the Generative Drafting product You will also find information about how, in certain contexts, the text you see in the geometry area may not look exactly the same when you print. And finally, if you used the CATFONT utility in CATIA Version 4 to customize your own fonts, you will also find information about how to recover the fonts for use in Version 5.

Customizing User Interface Fonts on Windows

This task explains how to customize user interface fonts on Windows. 1. Select the Start->Settings->Control Panel command, then click the Appearance tab (if it is not displayed by default). The following dialog box appears:

2. Use the Item list to select an item of the user interface you want to customize, or click on a user interface item in the area in the center of the dialog box. For example, select the items: Menu Message Box if you want to customize menu command, message box, dialog box and tooltip text fonts. 3. Select the desired font, font size and color. 4. Click Apply, then OK. 5. If you have a CATIA Version 5 session open, exit the session and restart to see the changes take effect.

Customizing User Interface Fonts on UNIX

This task explains how to customize user interface fonts on UNIX. 1. Go to the directory:
Install_directory/resources/msgcatalog/

where "Install_directory" is the root installation directory you chose when installing the software. If you installed the software at the default location, you would go to the following directory:
/usr/Dassault Systemes/B03/OS_a/resources/msgcatalog

if you are using the English language. A subdirectory is provided for each language supported. Go to the appropriate subdirectory if you are using a language other than English. 2. Edit the file named "Dialog". The "Dialog" file contains resource declarations for fonts (and foreground and background colors) for certain user interface components. The file is delivered at installation and is ready for use as is. Note that you can declare Motif fonts only. 3. Customize the last line of each user interface component declaration if you want to change the font and the font size. 4. If you have a CATIA Version 5 session open, exit the session and restart to see the changes take effect. Make sure you exported the LANG variable for the desired locale before restarting a session.

Customizing Fonts for Displaying Texts

This task explains how to customize the fonts used, for example, to display: texts in the specification tree constraint texts in the Sketcher, Part Design, Assembly workbenches and, in general, all 2D texts. Note that system fonts are used for displaying these types of text. This does not concern texts you enter in drawing documents created using the Generative Drafting product. On Windows 1. Select the Start->Settings->Control Panel command, click the Display control then click the Appearance tab (if it is not displayed by default). 2. In the Item list, select the Message Box item, or click inside the Message Box item (on Message Text) in the area in the center of the dialog box. 3. Select the desired font, font size and color. 4. Click Apply, then OK. 5. If you have a CATIA Version 5 session open, exit the session and restart to see the changes take effect. On UNIX 1. Go to the directory:
Install_directory/resources/msgcatalog

where "Install_directory" is the root installation directory you chose when installing the software. If you installed the software at the default location, you would go to the following directory:
/usr/Dassault Systemes/B03/OS_a/resources/msgcatalog

if you are using the English language. A subdirectory is provided for each language supported. Go to the appropriate subdirectory if you are using a language other than English.

2. Edit the file named "Visualization". The "Visualization" file contains resource declarations for fonts for displaying annotation texts. Each font is declared using six identical declarations which differ only in the font size. This is required to allow end users to zoom the text size. The range of font sizes allows end users to zoom within the limits of those font sizes. The file is delivered at installation and is ready for use as is. Note that you can declare Motif fonts only. The Visualization file for the DBCS language (Japanese, Korean and Simplified Chinese) environments contains two lines for each declaration: one line for the SBCS character set, and one line for the DBCS character set. 3. Customize each line if you want to change the font. 4. If you have a CATIA Version 5 session open, exit the session and restart to see the changes take effect. Make sure you exported the LANG variable for the desired locale before restarting a session. If you exchange documents with a site using a different language, text display may contain "garbage" in 2D areas such as the specification tree and in editable fields. As explained above, specification tree texts, for example, are displayed using system fonts. If you do not have the same fonts installed on both sites, the text will not be lost: it will just not be displayed correctly. To display all text correctly, you must do the following on the receiving site: install and activate the appropriate locale for reading the document make sure that the appropriate system fonts are installed and declared correctly on the receiving site. Text in the geometry area points to CATIA Version 4, Bitstream or custom fonts. Make sure that the appropriate fonts are installed and declared correctly on the receiving site.

Customizing Fonts for Displaying Geometry Area Texts

This task explains how to choose fonted texts displayed in the geometry area, for example, when using the Generative Drafting product, and lists the fonts you can choose from. You need access to the Generative Drafting product license to follow this scenario which shows you how to enter text in a drawing and choose a font for the text. The objective is to present the list of fonts supported. 1. Open a drawing you created using the Generative Drafting product.

2. Click the

icon, then click a point in the drawing to position the text.

The Text Editor dialog box is displayed. 3. Use the Text Editor dialog box to write the text, justify it, specify the text height and define the anchor point, then click anywhere outside the Text Editor window, but inside the CATIA application window. The Text Editor dialog box disappears. 4. Point to the text, right-click and select the Properties command. The Properties dialog box is displayed: 5. Click the Font tab. The Font tab includes controls for setting the font, font style and size.

Which Font Formats Are Supported? CATIA Version 5 provides the following font formats: PostScript Type 1 format PostScript CID (rearranged fonts are not supported) CATIA Version 4 FONT format. With respect to the PostScript Type 1 font format, note that on Windows only, if a TrueType version of the font exists or has been created, the TrueType version of the font can be used to optimize visualization quality.

Which Fonts Are Provided? The following fonts are supported and are installed ready for use without further customization when you install CATIA Version 5: all default stroke fonts delivered previously with CATIA Version 4 22 Bitstream Type 1 fonts an extra font (customized by Bitstream): CATIA Symbols; this font contains the symbols from Version 4 fonts. Note that the Bitstream fonts are delivered in several different styles (depending on the font), whereas the CATIA Version 4 fonts are delivered in regular style only. Furthermore, the 22 Bitstream fonts support ISO-8859-1 environments only. Note that no PostScript CID fonts are provided. For Russian, Polish and Czech environments, no Type 1 fonts are provided, only Version 4 fonts. For Japanese, Korean, Taiwanese and Chinese environments, no CID fonts are provided, only Version 4 fonts. Which Bitstream Fonts Are Supported? The Bitstream fonts are:

Font Name Swis721 BT

Swis721 LtCn BT Swis721 BdOulBT Monospac821 BT

Dutch801 Rm BT

Courier10 BT

Attribute File Name roman Swiss.pfb italic SwissI.pfb bold SwissB.pfb bold italic SwissBI.pfb light condensed SwissCL.pfb light condensed italic SwissCLI.pfb bold outline SwiOuB.pfb roman Monos.pfb italic MonosI.pfb bold MonosB.pfb bold italic MonosBI.pfb roman Dutch.pfb italic DutchI.pfb bold DutchB.pfb bold italic DutchBI.pfb roman Coure.pfb italic CoureI.pfb

bold bold italic UniversalMath1 BT regular SymbolMono BT regular SymbolProp BT regular

CoureB.pfb CoureBI.pfb Mathe.pfb SymbM.pfb SymbP.pfb

Note that: the Swiss 721 Bitstream font family is Bitstream's version of Helvetica the Monospace 821 Bitstream font family is Bitstream's version of Helvetica Monospaced the Dutch 801 Bitstream font family is Bitstream's version of Times Roman the CATIA Symbols font (not in the above list) contains the symbols from Version 4 fonts. For each of the Bitstream fonts, the following files are delivered in the location referenced by the CATFontPath variable: in the Postscript folder or subdirectory: .pfb, .inf, .pfm, .afm in the ExtraFiles folder or subdirectory: .ttf. Note: On Windows only, installing CATIA Version 5 also installs in the ExtraFiles environment the equivalent fonts in TrueType format. The TrueType font format offers enhanced visualization quality The installation adds the fonts (in TrueType format) to the list of system fonts you can view by selecting the Start->Settings->Control Panel command and double-clicking the Fonts control. Which Version 4 Fonts Are Provided? The following Version 4 fonts are supported and are installed ready for use without further customization when you install CATIA Version 5: SSS1.font, SSS2.font, SSS3.font, SSS4.font: 4 simplex sans serif fonts ROM1.font, ROM2.font, ROM3.font: 3 roman fonts GOTH.font: 1 Gothic font SYM1.font, SYM2.font, SYM3.font, SYM4.font: 4 symbol fonts KANJ.font: Kanji font (Japanese) Regarding the KANJ font, from now on, halfwidth Katakana characters are displayed with a smaller width than the width with which they were displayed in CATIA Version 4 KOHG.font: Hangeul font (Korean) TRCH.font: Traditional Chinese font SICH.font: Simplified Chinese font.

Note that: SYM1 contains annotation and tolerance symbols, and plot markup characters SYM2 contains ISO symbols fonts SYM3 contains welding symbols SYM4 contains graphic and mathematical symbols as well as miscellaneous technical symbols.

Adding Extra PostScript Fonts

This section explains how to add extra PostScript Type 1 fonts. A large choice of PostScript or TrueType fonts is available from Bitstream Inc. (http://bitstream.com). You can address questions about ordering Bitstream fonts to: http://catia_support@bitstream.com 1. Copy the new fonts to your CATIA Version 5 environment in:
install_root\resources\fonts\PostScript

where "install_root" is the installation folder (Windows) or directory (UNIX). For Type 1 fonts, the following files are required: ".pfb" or ".pfa" font files ".afm" and ".inf" files. To achieve enhanced font visualization (Windows only), if the associated TrueType font does not exist, you can ask the system to generate it from the PostScript files (the following file types are needed: .pfb, .afm, .inf). 2. To do so, select the Start->Settings->Control Panel command, double-click the Fonts control, then select the File->Install->New Font... command. 3. Select the font, and when prompted, check the three options, notably the first option in the dialog box: "Convert Type1 to TrueType", then click OK. If an agreement exists between the font supplier and Microsoft, the system will then generate the corresponding TrueType font. If not, the font will not be generated. 4. Edit the file:
install_root\resources\fonts\PostScriptRelatedTrueType

to map the PostScript file name with the full name of the TrueType equivalent. The "full name" refers to the name of the font visible when selecting the Start->Settings->Control Panel command and double-clicking the Fonts control. If you already have the TrueType fonts, you can simply install them. To do so, select the Start->Settings->Control Panel command, double-click the Fonts control, then select the File->Install->New Font... command and select the fonts to be installed. Note about CID Fonts For CID fonts, the following files are required: the CID font file (with the ".cid" suffix) the CMAP file associated with UNICODE encoding (with the ".cmap" suffix) the ".afm" file.

Understanding Differences Between Font Display and Printed Output

This section contains information about minor differences you may notice between the way text is displayed in the geometry area and how it looks in printed output. Text Display In general, there is a slight difference in how text is displayed between Windows NT and UNIX: on Windows NT, text is displayed using TrueType fonts, whereas Type 1 Postscript fonts are used on UNIX. Differences between Text Display and Printed Output When printing on printers using the drivers listed below, you can expect the following results:

Driver GDI

Font Used for Printing On Windows NT TrueType N.A. Any differences between displayed and printed text depend on how your System Administrator set up your printer. Your printer may be set up in one of three ways: the printer has all the required memory and fonts the printer does not have the fonts, but the PostScript file contains fonts

Font Used for Printing On UNIX

Discretization is applied to Drafting texts. For 2D texts (for example, in the specification tree), if the CATIA - P2 setting is active, printing the text produces a bitmap, whereas in all other cases, texts are printed using the font referenced in the following resource file:
Install_folder/resources/msgcatalog/Print

PostScript

By default, the font is Helvetica. For DBCS languages, discretization is applied to 2D texts.

or you may have to map your printer to a specific font. For example, to view your printer properties in a CATIA Version 5 session, select the File->Print command click the Properties... button and view the printer properties on the Advanced tab. CGM HP-GL2, HP-RTL CalComp C907 Oce N.A. Graphics GPR50 Versatec: VCGL and VGS 2.0 VRF

Discretization is applied to texts

Recovering Custom Fonts Developed Using CATIA Version 4

This task explains how to use CATIA Version 4 FONT files and set them up in your CATIA Version 5 environment. For more information about CATIA Version 4 FONT files, refer to your CATFONT Version 4 utility documentation. 1. Make sure that the fonts you created are in the FONT format (described using the UNICODE code key) and not in the FONTDATA format (described using the EBCDIC code key). The internal font format we recommend from CATIA Version 4 Release 1.8 onwards is described using UNICODE codes. If you did not already migrate your user FONTDATA files to FONT files and FONT CODE files, you must do so using the CATFONT utility using, as a minimum level, CATIA Version 4 Release 1.8. Regarding FONT CODE names, refer to your CATFONT utility documentation for more details. Note that the following is no longer supported: the font described with proportional format the grid defined by five numbers. In both cases, the associated orders are ignored. Note that none of the CATIA Version 4 basic delivered fonts used any of these options. 2. Copy the Version 4 FONT files to your CATIA Version 5 environment in:
install_folder\resources\fonts\Stroke

where "install_folder" is the installation folder (Windows) or directory (UNIX). 3. Copy the FONT CODE files to your CATIA Version 5 environment in:
install_folder\reffiles\NLS\fontcode

4. Declare your Version 4 FONTLIB names by referencing them in the following file:
install_folder\resources\fonts\V4FontInteroperability

This file maps to a Version 4 FONTLIB name, the FONT and FONT CODE associated with it. Regarding Korean fonts, since there are differences in Korean ideogram UNICODE codes between the UNICODE used in Version 4 and Version 5, no Version 4 user-defined Korean font can be used directly in Version 5.

Using Knowlegeware Capabilities

The tools that are most often used in product development need to be capable of capturing knowledge, and they must allow product developers to apply that knowledge to their product designs. CATIA Version 5, in addition to embodying a significant new architecture provides some very interesting capabilities that allow designers to drive their design processes from associative specifications and to integrate specifications into their product development processes. It gives product developers ways to create specifications and rules, save them, and reuse them. The CATIA Knowledgeware capabilities are divided into four products (the Infrastructure product, the Knowledge Advisor product, the Expert Knowledge product and the Generative Knowledge product). Note that you will make the best use of the features which are described below by using them coupled with the Knowledge Advisor product. Here are the knowledgeware features that can be created with the Infrastructure product. Click the hyperlinks on figure below to display the list of interactive tasks whereby you can create and manipulate these features. The principles behind these features are explained in: About Parameters About Formulas About Design Tables In figure below, click any of the links to display the related summary of tasks. Parameters

Formulas

Rules
(see the Knowledge Advisor product)

Checks
(see the Knowledge Advisor product)

Design Table

About Parameters
When you create a part like the hollow cylinder of our "Getting Started" example, you often start by creating a sketch, then you create a pad by extruding the initial sketch, then you add other features to the pad created. The final document is made up of features which define the intrinsic properties of the document. Removing one of these features results in a modification of the document. These features are called parameters. Parameters play a prominent role in knowledgeware applications. They are features that can be constrained by relations and they can also be used as the arguments of a relation. In addition to these parameters, CATIA allows you to create user parameters. These user parameters are extra pieces of information added to a document. User Parameter Types User parameters can be of various types: Real Integer String Boolean Length Angle Time Mass Volume Density Area Moment of inertia Energy Force Inertia Mass flow rate Moment Pressure Angular stiffness Temperature Linear mass Linear stiffness Volumetric flow rate Frequency Electric power Voltage Electric resistance Electric intensity

User parameters are very handy in knowledgeware applications: they can be used to add specific information to a document they can be defined or constrained by relations they can be used as the arguments of a relation. A given relation may take as its arguments both types of parameters (intrinsic and user). User parameters can be assigned single or multiple values. Displaying Parameters in the Specification Tree The user parameters are displayed in the specification tree only if the Tools->Options->Part->Display->Parameters box is checked. The user parameter list contains at least the Material parameter. Its initial value is set to None.

The user parameter values are displayed in the specification tree only if the Tools->Option>Knowledge->Parameter Tree View->With Value box is checked. Copy/Pasting Parameters The Tools->Options->Knowledge->Pasting Parameters check boxes allow you to: paste a parameter without the formula which defines it. For example: Holeplus= 15 = Diameter + 10 will be pasted as Real.i = 15 (if the With Value box is checked) paste a parameter as well as the formula which defines it, but only if the parameters referred to in the formula are also selected in the copy. For example: Holeplus= 15 = Diameter + 10 will be pasted as Real.i = 15 if the Diameter parameter does not belong to the items selected for the copy but HolePlus will be pasted as Real.i = 15 = Real.j + 10 if Diameter is selected in the copy (use multi-selection). paste a parameter as well as the formula. Holeplus= 15 = Diameter + 10 will be pasted as Real.i = Diameter + 10 Parameters and National Support Languages CATIA users working with non-latin characters should check the Tools->Options>Knowledge->Parameter Names->Surrounded by ' oprion. Otherwise, parameter names should have to be renamed in latin characters when used in formulas. Importing User Parameters User parameters can be imported from an external file. This external file can be either an Excel file(on Windows NT) or a tabulated text file. Here are examples of import files in an Excel format and in a tabulated text format .

Here are the formatting rules to be applied: Column 1 Parameter names Column 2 Parameter values. Multiple values are allowed. Values should then be separate by a ";". The imported value is the one delimited by the "<" and ">" tags. Use the Tab key to skip from one column to the other in a tabulated text file. Column 3 Formula. If no formula is specified, the third column should be left empty. In a tabulated text file, just press the Tab key twice from column 2 to leave column 3 empty. Column 4 Optional comment.

Parameter Tasks
Create a user parameter Select a type in the . Edit/modify a user parameter Select the parameter to be edited in the "Formulas" dialog box, then modify its value in the "Edit name, value or formula" field . or or In the specification tree, double-click the parameter to be edited, then modify its value in the "Edit Parameter" editor. In the specification tree, right-click the parameter to be edited, then select the Parameter.object->Definition function from the contextual menu. list, then click

Add a comment to a user parameter In the "Formulas" dialog box, right-click the value field in "Edit name, value or formula", then select 'Edit Comment...' from the contextual menu. or Whatever the edition box, right-click the value field(s), then select 'Edit comment...' from the contextual menu.

Add a tolerance to a magnitude type parameter In the "Formulas" dialog box, right-click the value field in "Edit name, value or formula" , then select 'Add Tolerance' from the contextual menu. or Whatever the edition box, right-click the value field(s), then select 'Add Tolerance...' from the contextual menu.

Specify lower and upper bounds In the "Formulas" dialog box, right-click the value field in "Edit name, value or formula", then select 'Add Range' from the contextual menu. or Whatever the edition box, right-click the value field(s), then select 'Add Range...' from the contextual menu.

Specify an increment/decrement amount In the "Formulas" dialog box, right-click the value field in "Edit name, value or formula", then select 'Change Step' from the contextual menu. or Whatever the edition box, right-click the value field(s), then select 'Change Step...' from the contextual menu.

Specify the Material parameter value Select the Material parameter in the specification tree, then click . This parameter can only be applied tp a part and not to the features making up the part. or Double-click the Material parameter in the specification tree, then enter the material value in the dialog box. In the "Formulas" dialog box, select the Material parameter in the parameter list, then modify its value in "Edit name, value or formula".

or

Import parameters In the "Formulas" dialog box, click Import.... A file selection dialog box is displayed. Select either a .xls file(Windows NT only) or a .txt file. Update the Mechanical_Property parameters Select the Properties->Mass option from the feature contextual menu and click OK. Delete a parameter In the "Formulas" dialog box, select the parameter to be deleted, then click 'Delete Parameter' .

Creating and Editing a Parameter

A document is defined by features called parameters. When you create a document, you define interactively a number of parameters. In order to add information to a document, you can create new parameters that can be used later on when defining formulas, rules or checks (for those of you using the Knowledge Advisor). Refer to About Parameters for a further information. Here, we are going to create a time parameter (corresponding for example to the time required to machine the part).

1. Open the KwrStartDocument.CATPart document. 2. Click the Formula icon . The "Formulas" dialog box is displayed. 3. Select the Time item with 'Single Value' in the 'New Parameter of type' list, then click 'New Parameter of type'. The new parameter appears in 'Edit name, value or formula'. Note that a parameter can be assigned multiple values. You just have to select the 'Multiple values' option at parameter creation and enter the values one-by-one to specify the value list. 4. Replace the Time.1 name with Machining_Time and assign the 1000s value to this parameter. Then click Apply. The Machining_Time parameter is added to the specification tree. The dialog box is modified as follows:

5. Click OK to terminate the dialog. 6. To edit the parameter you have just created, you can:

either, double-click on the Machining_Time parameter in the specification tree. This will display an "Edit Parameter" box that you can use to modify your parameter value. or, in the specification tree, select the Machining_Time.object->Definition function from the contextual menu. or, in the "Formulas" dialog box, select the Machining_Time parameter, then modify its value in 'Edit name, value or formula'. The resulting document is KwrParam0.CATPart. The parameter list displayed in the "Formulas" dialog box depends: on the current feature. For example, if you select Pad.1 in the KwrStartDocument.CATPart specification tree, the list will contain only the Pad.1 parameters. If you select the document global feature by clicking KwrStartDocument, all the document parameters will be displayed in the list. on the option selected for the Filter field of the "Formulas" dialog box. Setting the All option displays all the parameters of the current feature. Setting the User option displays only the parameters you have added to your document with the 'New Parameter of type' button. When editing a parameter, a number of functions can be accessed from the contextual menu of the value field(s). These functions allow you to add attributes to the parameter and to manipulate the formula which constrains the parameter (when this formula exists). In addition, when a parameter value is constrained by a formula, the "Edit Parameter" dialog box displays a formula icon that allows you to edit the formula. When a parameter value is driven from a design table , the "Edit Parameter" dialog box displays a design table icon that allows you to edit the design table. To display parameter values in the geometry area, you must have the "Formulas" dialog box open and select a feature in the specification tree. Selecting a parameter in the parameter list will highlight this parameter in the geometry area.

Parameter Comments and other Parameter Attributes

To enrich the definition of a parameter, you can add some attributes to it. The attributes you can add to a parameter depend on the parameter type. These attributes can be specified in two ways: 1. either from the contextual menu of any edition box. For example, if you edit a pad, the contextual menu of the value fields provides you with functions to add parameter attributes 2. or from the 'Edit name, value or formula' contextual menu of the "Formulas" dialog box.

The second method is described below.

Adding Comments
Comments can be added to all parameter types. 1. In the "Formulas" dialog box, right-click the value field in 'Edit name, value or formula'. 2. Select the Edit Comment... function from the contextual menu 3. Enter your comments in the dialog box which is displayed.

Adding a Tolerance
The tolerance attribute can only be added to magnitude type parameters.

1. In the "Formulas" dialog box, right-click the value field in 'Edit name, value or formula'. 2. Select the Tolerance function from the contextual menu. Then select Edit. A dialog box is displayed. The default values are those specified in the Tools->Options->Tolerance tab for the Length and Angle parameters. 3. Enter the maximum and minimum tolerance values.

Modifying the Increment/Decrement Amount

In the parameter value field of 'Edit name, value or formula', the arrow buttons can be used to increment or decrement values by a certain amount. You can modify the amount being incremented or decremented. 1. In the "Formulas" dialog box, right-click the value field in 'Edit name, value or formula'. 2. Select the 'Change step' function from the contextual menu. 3. Select one of the amount displayed. 4. If the new amount you want to apply to the value field is not displayed, select 'new one' and enter the new amount in the box which is displayed.

5. Click Enter to apply the new amount to the value field. Note that, in addition to the initial increment/decrement amount (1 in the figure above) and to the 'new one' option, the 'Change step' option displays the list of increment/decrement amounts which have already been declared.

Specifying Lower and Upper Bounds

Specifying lower and upper bounds provides you with a means to be warned whenever a parameter value is out of range.

1. Select the 'Add Range' function from the contextual menu. 2. In the dialog box which is displayed, enter the upper and lower bound values. 3. Click OK. If the current parameter value is out of range, a message is displayed. CATIA proposes to replace the current value with one of the bounds you have specified.

Specifying the Material Parameter Value

Whatever your document, the Material parameter is always displayed in the specification tree. By default, its value is set to None. The Mechanical_Property features are calculated from the Material value. You need to specify a material to set the values of the Mechanical_Property features. 1. Open the KwrStartDocument.CATPart document. The Material parameter appears by default in the specification tree. Its value is set to None. Double-clicking the Material feature in the specification tree displays the following dialog box

: Here are the values displayed in the parameter list when clicking .

2. Click the KwrStartDocument feature in the specification tree. 3. Click the icon in the standard toolbar to display the available material library. 4. Select the Metal->Iron material.

5. Click Apply. The Iron feature is added to the specification tree. Now, double-clicking the Material feature in the specification tree displays the following dialog box

: And here are the values displayed in the parameter list when clicking .

6. Click OK in the "Edit Parameter" and "Formulas" dialog boxes. 7. Keep your document open and go to Valuating the Mechanical_Property Parameters.

Importing Parameters
Parameters and parameter values can be imported from a text file or from an Excel file (Windows NT). See About Parameters for more information on the import file format. 1. Open the KwrStartDocument.CATPart. 2. Click the Formula icon . The "Formulas" dialog box is displayed. 3. Click Import.... A file selection dialog box is displayed. 4. Select either the ExCompanyFile0.xls file(Windows NT only) or the TxCompanyFile0.txt file. Then click Open. The list of parameters to be imported into the KwrStartDocument.CATPart document is displayed.

5. Click OK to import all the parameters from the input file to the KwrStartDocument.CATPart document. The imported parameters are now displayed in the parameter list of the "Formulas" dialog box and in the specification tree.

6. Click OK to terminate the dialog. The resulting document is KwrImport.CATPart.

Updating the Mechanical_Property Parameters

Once the Material value has been specified, the Mechanical_Property parameters are automatically updated when the Properties option is selected in the contextual menu. This is what you have to do to display the updated Volume, Mass and WetArea properties after you have assigned a value to the Material parameter.

1. Open the Properties dialog box from the contextual menu. 2. Select the Mass tab. The document mechanical properties have been updated from the value assigned to the Material parameter. 3. Click OK to go back to your document. 4. Click the Formula icon values are updated. . In the parameter list, the mechanical property

5. Click OK to terminate the dialog. The resulting document is KwrMaterial0.CATPart.

Deleting a Parameter
The only parameters that you can delete in a knowledgeware application are those created by the 'New Parameter of type' button. You can delete a parameter: 1. either from the contextual menu. The Material parameter cannot be deleted. 2. or by using the 'Delete Parameter' button of the "Formulas" dialog box. To do so: 1. In the Parameter list of the "Formulas" dialog box, select the parameter to delete 2. Click Delete Parameter. A message prompts you to confirm the deletion. 3. Click Yes. The parameter deleted should no longer appears in the specification tree. In the KwrParam0.CATPart document, the only parameter you can delete is the Machining_Time parameter.

About Formulas
Formulas are features used to define or constrain a parameter. A formula is a relation that you write with parameters, operators and functions. The left part of the relation is the parameter to be constrained, the right part is a statement. Once it has been created, a formula can be manipulated like any other feature from its contextual manu.

Displaying Formulas in the Specification Tree

Formulas are displayed in the specification tree only if the Tools->Options->Part->Display->Relations box is checked.

In addition, whenever a user parameter is constrained by a formula, the formula is displayed with the parameter it constrains if the Tools->Options->General->Knowledge->Parameter Tree View->With Formula box is checked.

The Activity Parameter

A formula is a feature which is assigned a parameter called the activity. The activity value is of boolean type and is defined as follows: Activity value Parameter value Relation icon in the specification tree If a formula is created for a parameter which not already constrained by another formula, the activity of the new formula is set to true by default. A parameter can be constrained by several formulas, but only one formula can be active at a time. Before activating a formula on a given parameter, you must deactivate the other formulas defined on the same parameter. false Does not depend on the formula true Is calculated from the formula

Importing Formulas
Parameters as well as the associated formulas can be imported from an external file. Refer to About Parameters and Importing Parameters for more information on how to import formulas.

Formula Tasks
Create a formula In the "Formulas" dialog box, select the parameter to be constrained, then click 'Add Formula'. Enter the formula in the "Formula Editor". or In the "Formulas" dialog box, select the parameter to be constrained, then enter the formula in "Edit name, value or formula". In the "Formulas" dialog box, double-click the parameter to be constrained and enter the formula in the "Formula Editor". When editing a parameter, right-click the value field(s), then select Edit formula... from the contextual menu.

or

or

Edit/modify a formula In the parameter list of the "Formulas" dialog box, select the parameter defined by the formula, then modify the formula in "Edit name, value or formula" . or In the specification tree, right-click the formula to be edited, then select the Formula.object->Definition function from the contextual menu. In the specification tree, double-click the formula to be edited. In the specification tree, double-click the user parameter, then click the f(x) button in the "Edit Parameter" dialog box. When editing a parameter, right-click the value field(s), then select Formula->Edit from the contextual menu.

or or or

Activate/deactivate a formula In the parameter list of the "Formulas" dialog box, select the parameter which is constrained by the formula to (de)activate and use the Activate/Deactivate check box right of the "Edit name, value or formula" field. In the parameter list of the "Formulas" dialog box, select the formula/activity parameter and modify its value in "Edit name, value or formula".

or

In the specification tree, right-click the formula whose activity is to be modified, then select the Formula.object->(De)activate function from the contextual menu. When editing a parameter constrained by a formula, right-click the value field(s), then select the Formula->(De)activate function from the contextual menu.

or

Import parameters and formulas In the "Formulas" dialog box, click 'Import', then specify the import file path. The import file should be either a .txt file or a .xls file. Delete a formula In the parameter list of the "Formulas" dialog box, select the parameter which is constrained by the formula to be deleted, then click 'Delete Formula'. or or In the specification tree, right-click the formula to be deleted, then select the Delete function from the contextual menu. When editing a parameter constrained by a formula, right-click the value field(s), then select the Formula->Delete function from the contextual menu.

Creating and Editing a Formula

CATIA Version 5 allows you to define a document parameter with respect to other parameters. The relation which defines how a parameter value is calculated from other parameter values is called a formula. This task explains how to create a formula specifying that the external radius of a hollow cylinder is twice its internal diameter. Make sure the Relations option is active in the Tools -> Options -> Part -> Display tab. Note that the radius of a sketch can be defined by a formula provided it is declared as a constraint ( ). 1. Open the KwrStartDocument.CATPart. 2. Click the Formula icon . The "Formulas" dialog box is displayed. 3. Add the formula to the pad radius parameter. To do this, you can follow one of the three methods described below:
Method 1

1. Select the PartBody\Sketch.1\Radius.3\Radius in the parameter list. 2. Enter directly the 2 * PartBody\Hole.1\Diameter relation in the right part of the 'Edit name, value or formula' field. Go to Writing Formulas for tips and tricks for writing formulas. 3. Press the Tab key or the Enter Key. 1. Double-click the PartBody\Sketch.1\Radius.3\Radius parameter in the parameter list. The "Formula Editor" is displayed.

Method 2

2. Enter the 2 * PartBody\Hole.1\Diameter relation in the formula field. Go to Writing Formulas for information on how to use the Wizard. If needed, use the icon to erase a formula. 3. Click OK in the "Formula Editor".
Method 3

1. Select the PartBody\Sketch.1\Radius.3\Radius in the parameter list. 2. Click 'Add Formula'. The "Formula Editor" is displayed. 3. Enter the 2 * PartBody\Hole.1\Diameter relation in the formula icon to erase a formula. Go to Writing field. If needed, use the Formulas for tips and tricks for writing formulas. 4. Click OK in the "Formula Editor".

At this stage of the dialog: the Formula.1 relation is added to the specification tree. in the "Formulas" dialog box: the formula is added to the parameter list in the parameter list, the PartBody\Sketch.1\Radius.3\Radius parameter is now defined by a formula in the 'Edit name, value or formula field', the parameter value is now grayed out. The formula appears in the right part of the field. In the geometry area, a parameter which is constrained by a formula is indicated by an icon.

4. Click Apply to update the document in the geometry area. 5. Click OK to terminate the dialog. The resulting document is KwrFormula0.CATPart.

Activating and Deactivating a Formula

A parameter value can be defined by a number of formulas. But only one formula can be active at a time. By default, a formula is active at creation but, if a formula defines a parameter which is already constrained by another formula, you will be asked whether the new formula: should be activated and the other one deactivated (if previously activated) should be deactivated should be cancelled (no formula created). A formula can be activated or deactivated: either from the "Formulas" dialog box, or from the contextual menu, or by a rule execution. Here is a scenario illustrating how to activate and deactivate a formula. 1. Open the KwrFormula1.CATPart. Two formulas are added to the document. One defines the PartBody\Sketch.1\Radius.3\Radius parameter with respect the hole diameter, the other defines the hole diameter with respect to the Pad limits. Both formulas are active. 2. Click the Formula icon , select the PartBody\Sketch.1\Radius.3\Radius parameter, then click 'Add Formula'. 3. Enter the PartBody\Sketch.1\Radius.3\Radius = 4 * PartBody\Hole.1\Diameter relation in the "Formula Editor". 4. Click Yes. As the Pad radius is already constrained by the Formula.1 relation, a dialog box asks you: either to deactivate Formula.1 and to create Formula.3 as active or to keep Formula.1 active and to create Formula.3 as inactive or to cancel the Formula.3 creation. 5. Click Yes to create the Formula.3 relation as active and deactivate the Formula.1 relation. Deactivate Formula.3 by using one of the three methods below: Method 1 Set the Relations\Formula.3\Activity value to false

Method 2 Use the Activate/Deactivate check box

Method 3 1. Click OK to exit the "Formulas" dialog box. 2. Click the Formula.3 relation in the specification tree. 3. Select the Formula.3 object -> Deactivate option from the contextual menu.

6. Re-activate Formula.1 by using one of the three methods above. 7. Click OK to terminate the dialog. The resulting document is KwrFormula2.CATPart.

Importing Formulas
Formulas are imported with the parameters they define. See About Parameters for more information on the import file format. When a parameter is defined by a formula, units should be mentioned in column 2. Examples of import files with formulas are provided in the ExCompanyFile0.xls and TxCompanyFile0.txt tables.

Deleting a Formula
You can delete a formula in three ways: 1. In the specification tree, right-click the formula to be deleted, then select the Delete function from the contextual menu. 2. In the parameter list of the "Formulas" dialog box, select the parameter constrained by the formula to be deleted, then click 'Delete Formula'. A message asks you to confirm the deletion. Click Yes. The formula deleted should no longer appears in the specification tree. 3. When editing a parameter constrained by a formula, right-click the value field and select the Formula->Delete function from the contextual menu.

About Design Tables

A design table provides you with a means to create and manage component families. These components can be for example mechanical parts just differing in their parameter values. Screws are a good example of mechanical parts that can be described by a design table. To simplify, imagine they all described by four parameters: the head width, the head height, the body width and the body height. The sets of four parameter values that can be assigned to a screw can be easily regrouped in a design table. This design table has as many columns as screw parameters and as many rows as sets of parameter values. In a design table, a set of parameter values is called a configuration and it is registered in a row. A design table is a tool mainly intended to ease the definition of mechanical parts. It is provided to all CATIA users. But you will make the best use of it in a Knowledge Advisor application. A design table can be created from a CATIA document, the document data is then exported to the design table. It can also be applied to a document, the document data is then imported from the design table. The purpose of the design table is to drive the parameters of a CATIA document from external values. These values are stored in the form of a table either in a Microsoft Excel file on Windows or in a tabulated text file. When using a design table the trick is to associate the right document parameters with the right table parameters. The design table columns may not all correspond to your document parameters and you may decide to apply only part of the design table values to your document. By creating associations, you declare what document parameters you want to link with what table columns. The design table becomes a more powerful tool when it is used with the Knowledge Advisor. You are provided with functions to read the design table parameters. These design table functions can be used when programming your checks and rules. Using these functions spares you all the association operations.

The Excel Sheet Format (on Windows)

The values mentioned in the sheet cells have to be expressed in appropriate units. Otherwise, the right values won't be associated with the document parameters. If no unit is mentioned within a cell: the unit taken into account is the one mentioned in the first row and if no unit is specified in the first row, the unit taken into account is the relevant MKS system unit. Here is an example of an Excel sheet:

The Tabulated Text File Format

Here is an example of a tabulated file format. You can use your favorite text editor to create this design table. Use the Tab key to skip from one column to the other. Unit rules are the same as for the Excel sheets.

The CATIA Design Table

Once it has been read and processed by CATIA, the design table looks something like this:

Design Table Tasks

Create a design table from the document parameter values Check the option "Create a design table with current parameter values". Select the parameters to insert, then specify the .xls (Windows) or .txt file where the design table is to be created. Create a design table from a pre-existing file Check the option "Create a design table from a pre-existing file". Specify the file containing the design table data, then create the necessary associations. Edit a design table In the specification tree, double-click the design table.

or

In the specification tree, right-click the design table to be edited, then select the DesignTable.object->Edition function from the contextual menu. If a parameter is constrained by a design table, double-click it in the specification tree, then click the design table icon in the "Edit parameter" dialog box. In the specification tree, right-click the design table to be deleted, then select the Delete function from the contextual menu.

or

or

Delete a design table In the specification tree, right-click the design table to be deleted, then select the Delete function from the contextual menu.

Program the design table access

CellAsReal Returns the contents of a cell located in a column intended for real values. CellAsBoolean Returns the contents of a cell located in a column intended for boolean values. CellAsString Returns the contents of a cell located in a column. CloserInfConfig Returns the configuration which contains the largest values less or equal to the values of the given arguments. CloserSupConfig Returns the configuration which contains the smallest values grreater or equal to the values of the given arguments. CloserValueInfInColumn Scans the values of a column and returns the smallest cell value which is the nearest to a specified one. CloserValueSupInColumn Scans the values of a column and returns the greatest cell value which is the nearest to a specified one. LocateInColumn Returns the index of the first row which contains a specified value. MaxInColumn Returns the greatest of a column values. MinInColumn Returns the smallest of a column values. Question Displays a message in a dialog box, waits for the user to click a button and returns a value indicating which button the user clicked.

Creating a Design Table with the Current Parameter Values

An external design table is created from parameters belonging to the current document. You just have to select the parameters you want to insert in the design table.

1. Open the KwrStartDocument.CATPart document. 2. Click the Design Table icon in the standard toolbar.

The "Creation of a Design Table" dialog box is displayed. Enter a name (DesignTable0 in the example below) and a comment for the design table.

3. Check the 'Create a design table with current parameter values' option. Click OK. The 'Select parameters to insert' dialog box is displayed. 4. In the 'Parameters to insert' list, select the PartBody\Pad.1\FirstLimit\Length then click Add. Repeat the same operation with the PartBody\Pad.1\SecondLimit\Length item. Both items are displayed in the 'Inserted parameters' list.

5. Click OK. A file selection box is displayed. 6. Specify the pathname of the design table to be created. Click OK in the file selection dialog box.

The DesignTable0 feature is added to the specification tree and a dialog box displays the newly created design table. This design table contains only one configuration. By default it is active.

7. Click Edit table... to start an Excel application (under Windows NT) or open the text editor under Unix. Replace the PartBody\Pad.1\FirstLimit\Length parameter value with 80mm. 8. Save your Excel or .txt file and close your application. 9. Click Apply into the CATIA design table dialog, the document is updated as well as the CATIA design table. 10. Click Cancel if you want to undo your last interaction. Otherwise click OK. KwrDesignTable0.CATPart is the resulting document. KwrCreatedDesignTable.xls is the design table created. A design table can only be created from non-constrained parameters, i.e. from parameters which are neither referred to in an active design table nor used in any other active relation. If you keep the 'Activity' option checked for DesignTable0 and try to create another design table, you will have to select the parameters to add to your second design table among a restricted parameter list. Uncheck the 'Activity' option if you want to deactivate a design table and reuse its parameters in another design table.

Creating a Design Table from a Pre-existing File

A design table can be created from a pre-existing file: either by associating automatically the document parameters with the table columns. All the parameters common to your document and the input file columns are added to the design table or by associating one by one the document parameters with the input file columns.

Associating Automatically Table Columns with Parameters

1. Open the KwrStartDocument.CATPart document. Design Table icon in the standard toolbar. 2. Click the The "Creation of a Design Table" dialog box is displayed. Enter a name (DesignTable1 for example) and a comment. 3. Check the 'Create a design table from a pre-existing file' option. Click OK. 4. Select the KwrBallBearing.xls file. Click Open. The following dialog box is displayed.

5. Click Yes. The Material parameter is the only one which is common to the document parameters and to the external design table. The following design table is created. The '<' and '>' symbols denote the current configuration.

6. Select the configuration you want to apply to the document (line 5 for example). Click Apply. The Iron parameter value is displayed in the specification tree. 7. Click OK to end the design table creation. KwrDesignTable1.CATPart is the resulting document.

Associating One by One Table Columns with Parameters

1. Open the KwrStartDocument.CATPart document. Design Table icon in the standard toolbar. 2. Click the The "Creation of a Design Table" dialog box is displayed. Enter a name (DesignTable2 for example) and a comment. 3. Check the 'Create a design table from a pre-existing file' option. Click OK. A file selection panel is displayed. 4. Select the KwrBallBearing.xls file. Click Open. The "Automatic associations ?" dialog box is displayed. 5. Click No. The following dialog box is displayed.

Now, you have to associate one by one the document parameters with the design table columns. 6. Click the 'Associations' option. The table design dialog box now displays side by side the document parameter list and the input file columns. 7. In the 'Parameters' list, select the PartBody\Hole.1\Diameter item. In the 'Columns' list, select the d parameter. Then click Associate. A parameter couple is now displayed in the 'Associations between parameters and columns' list. 8. Repeat the same operation for the Material parameter.

Selecting a parameter or an association in the list highlights the corresponding values in the geometry area. The parameter list can be filtered: either by clicking on a feature (either in the specification tree or in the geometry area). All the parameter values of the selected feature (and children) are highlighted in the geometry area. The parameter list displays only the parameters of the selected features (and children). by specifying a string in the 'Filter Name' field. For example, typing *ength* displays all Length parameters by specifying a type in the 'Filter Type' field. The 'Create parameters...' button allows you to create automatically parameters and associations for items of the 'Columns' list. The 'Rename associated parameters' button replaces the parameter name with the column name. 9. Click OK to end the DesignTable2 creation dialog. The DesignTable2 feature is added as a relation to the specification tree. Double-click DesignTable2 in the specification to edit the table. By default, the configuration <1> is applied to the document. A new material (Aluminum) is applied to the document and the hole diameter is modified. KwrDesignTable2.CATPart is the resulting document. You can select another configuration and apply it to your document. As long as a design table is active, the parameters which are declared in it are constrained parameters and you are not allowed to modify them. Double-clicking a design table in the specification tree displays the design table with its set of configurations and allows you to select a new configuration.

Programming the Design Table Access

CATIA provides you with functions to access the values of a design table. These functions are described below. You will have to use them with other functions and parameters in formulas, rules or checks (for those of you using the Knowledge Advisor product). CellAsReal CellAsBoolean CellAsString CloserInfConfig CloserSupConfig CloserValueInfInColumn CloserValueSupInColumn LocateInColumn MaxInColumn MinInColumn Question You don't need to create associations interactively to use these functions. In the design table function documentation, you can access code samples by clicking 'Sample code'. Click 'Design Table' to display the related design table. When you find an interesting sample, you can Copy/Paste it to your formula, rule or check editor. The KwrProgramDT.CATPart document illustrates how to use the design table access functions. Values returned by functions must be declared as user parameters before being used in relations.

CellAsReal Function
Description

Code sample Input design table

Returns the contents of a cell located in a column intended for real values. Returns zero if the cell does not contain a real or if the function parameters are not properly specified (see remarks).
Syntax

CellAsReal(DesignTableName, RowNumber, ColumnNumber) The CellAsReal function has three arguments:

Arguments Description

DesignTableName Required. Name of the design table you want to read. This name is the string which identifies the design table in the specification tree. Should be put in quotes. RowNumber ColumnNumber Remarks Required. Line or configuration number. Integer from 1 to n. Required. Number or index of the table column. Integer from 1 to n.

The real which is returned by the function should be added to your document as a user parameter. The CellAsReal function returns a nil value: q when the design table passed as its first argument does not exist q when the row or column numbers are out of range or not specified as integers.

CellAsBoolean Function
Description

Code sample Input design table

Returns the contents of a cell located in a column intended for boolean values. Returns false if the cell does not contain a boolean or if the function parameters are not properly specified (see remarks).
Syntax

CellAsBoolean(DesignTableName, RowNumber, ColumnNumber) The CellAsBoolean function has three arguments:

Arguments Description

DesignTableName Required. Name of the design table you want to read. This name is the string which identifies the design table. Should be put in quotes. RowNumber ColumnNumber Remarks Required. Line or configuration number. Integer from 1 to n. Required. Number or index of the table column. Integer from 1 to n.

The boolean which is returned by the function should be added to your document as a user parameter. The CellAsBoolean function returns a false value: q when the design table passed as its first argument does not exist q when the row or column numbers are out of range or not specified as integers.

CellAsString Function
Description

Code sample Input design table

Returns the contents of a cell located in a column. Returns an empty string if the cell is empty or if the function parameters are not properly specified (see remarks).
Syntax

CellAsString(DesignTableName, RowNumber, ColumnNumber) The CellAsString function has three arguments:

Arguments Description

DesignTableName Required. Name of the design table you want to read. This name is the string which identifies the design table in the specification tree. Should be put in quotes. RowNumber ColumnNumber Remarks Required. Line or configuration number. Integer from 1 to n. Required. Number or index of the table column. Integer from 1 to n.

The string which is returned by the function should be added to your document as a user parameter. The CellAsString function returns an empty string: q when the design table passed as its first argument does not exist q when the row or column numbers are out of range or not specified as integers.

CloserInfConfig Function
Description

Returns the configuration which contains the largest values less or equal to the values of the given arguments. When several configurations meet this condition, the function sorts out the possible configurations with respect to the column order as it is specified in the argument list.
Syntax

CloserInfConfig(DesignTableName, RowName1, Value1, RowName2, Value2 ... ) The CloserInfConfig function takes the following arguments:
Argument DesignTableName RowNamei Valuei Example Description Required. Should be put in quotes. Should be put in quotes. At least, one couple RowName/Value is required Required. You should specify the units.

Given the design table below: SketchRadius(mm) 1 2 3 4 120 130 120 140 PadLim1(mm) 60 50 60 50 PadLim2(mm) 10 30 20 40

The statement below returns 3:

CloserInfConfig("DT1", "PadLim1", 60mm, "SketchRadius", 130mm, "PadLim2", 40mm)

The values of lines 1 , 2 and 3 are all less or equal to the values specified in the function arguments. q As the first parameter specified in the argument list is "PadLim1", the function scans the lines 1, 2 and 3 and searches for the largest "PadLim1" value which is less or equal to 60 mm. Two configurations meet the condition: configuration 1 and configuration 3. q As the second parameter specified is "SketchRadius", the function scans the configurations 1 and 3 and searches for the largest "SketchRadius" value less or equal to 130 mm. Again, the function finds two configurations meeting the criteria. q Then it rescans lines 1 and 3 and searches for the largest "PadLim2" value less or equal to 40mm. The result is line 3.

CloserSupConfig Function
Description

Returns the configuration which contains the smallest values grreater or equal to the values of the given arguments. When several configurations meet this condition, the function sorts out the possible configurations with respect to the column order as it is specified in the argument list.
Syntax

CloserSupConfig(DesignTableName, RowName1, Value1, RowName2, Value2 ... ) The CloserSupConfig function takes the following arguments:
Argument DesignTableName RowNamei Valuei Example Description Required. Should be put in quotes. Should be put in quotes. At least, one couple RowName/Value is required Required. You should specify the units.

Given the design table below: SketchRadius(mm) 1 2 3 4 120 130 120 140 PadLim1(mm) 60 50 60 50 PadLim2(mm) 10 30 25 40

The statement below returns 3:

CloserSupConfig("DT1", "PadLim1", 60mm, "SketchRadius", 120mm, "PadLim2", 20mm)

CloserValueInfInColumn Function
Description

Code sample Input design table

Scans the values of a column and returns the smallest cell value which is the nearest to a specified one. Returns 0 if no value is found or if the function arguments are not properly specified (see remarks).
Syntax

CloserValueInfInColumn(DesignTableName, ColumnNumber, RealValue) The CloserValueInfInColumn function has three arguments:

Arguments Description

DesignTableName Required. Name of the design table you want to read. This name is the string which identifies the design table in the specification tree. Should be put in quotes. ColumnNumber RealValue Remarks Required. Number or index of the table column. Integer from 1 to n. Required. Value searched for. Should be a real.

The CloserValueInfInColumn function returns 0: q when the design table passed as its first argument does not exist q when the row or column numbers are out of range or not specified as integers.

CloserValueSupInColumn Function
Description

Code sample Input design table

Scans the values of a column and returns the greatest cell value which is the nearest to a specified one. Returns 0 if no value is found or if the function arguments are not properly specified (see remarks).
Syntax

CloserValueSupInColumn(DesignTableName, ColumnNumber, RealValue) The CloserValueSupInColumn function has three arguments:

Arguments Description

DesignTableName Required. Name of the design table you want to read. Should be put in quotes. ColumnNumber RealValue Remarks Required. Number or index of the table column. Integer from 1 to n. Required. Value searched for. Should be a real.

The CloserValueSupInColumn function returns 0: q when the design table passed as its first argument does not exist q when the row or column numbers are out of range or not specified as integers.

LocateInColumn Function
Description

Code sample Input design table

Returns the index of the first row which contains a specified value. Returns zero if the value is not found or if the function arguments are not properly specified (see remarks).
Syntax

LocateInColumn(DesignTableName, ColumnNumber,Value) The LocateInColumn function has three arguments:

Arguments Description

DesignTableName Required. Name of the design table you want to read. This name is the string which identifies the design table in the specification tree. Should be put in quotes. ColumnNumber Value Remarks Required. Number or index of the table column. Integer from 1 to n. Required. Value searched for. Can be a string or a boolean

The LocateInColumn function returns 0: q when the design table passed as its first argument does not exist q when the row or column numbers are out of range or not specified as integers.

MaxInColumn Function
Description

Code sample Input design table

Returns the greatest of a column values. Returns 0 if the column does not contain numerical values or if the function arguments are not properly specified (see remarks).
Syntax

MaxInColumn(DesignTableName, ColumnNumber) The MaxInColumn function has two arguments:

Arguments Description

DesignTableName Required. Name of the design table you want to read. This name is the string which identifies the design table in the specification tree. Should be put in quotes. ColumnNumber Remarks Required. Number or index of the table column. Integer from 1 to n.

The MaxInColumn function returns 0: q when the design table passed as its first argument does not exist q when the row or column numbers are out of range or not specified as integers.

MinInColumn Function
Description

Code sample Input design table

Returns the smallest of a column values. Returns 0 if the column does not contain numerical values or if the function arguments are not properly specified (see remarks).
Syntax

MinInColumn(DesignTableName, ColumnNumber) The MinInColumn function has two arguments:

Arguments Description

DesignTableName Required. Name of the design table you want to read. This name is the string which identifies the design table in the specification tree. Should be put in quotes. ColumnNumber Remarks Required. Number or index of the table column. Integer from 1 to n.

The MinInColumn function returns 0: q when the design table passed as its first argument does not exist q when the row or column numbers are out of range or not specified as integers.

Question Function
Description

Displays a message in a dialog box, waits for the user to click a button and returns a value indicating which button the user clicked (true if Yes was clicked, false if No was clicked)
Syntax

Question(String [# String1 # String2 ..., Param1Name, Param2Name, ...] ) The Question function takes one required argument and several optional arguments depending on whether parameter values are to be displayed in the message.
Argument String # String1, Param1Name... Description Required. String to be displayed in the dialog box (should be put in quotes). Optional. When parameter values are to be displayed within the message, the arguments should be specified as follows: q one string in quotes including a # symbol wherever a parameter value is to be displayed
q

as many [, parameter name] statements as parameter values declared with a "#" in the message.

Use the "|" symbol to insert a carriage return in a prompt.

Example

Boolean2 = Question("SketchRadius is # | Do you want to change this value ?",PartBody\Sketch.1\Radius.3\Radius )

Using a Design Table

A design table is a feature that you create either from your document parameters or from external data. No matter the existence of external data, you must create the design table in CATIA. The design table creation process includes the following steps: Creating a design table from a pre-existing file 1. select the pre-existing file containing the raw data. 2. create the associations between the document parameters and the external table columns. You can choose to create these associations automatically. 3. edit the CATIA design table generated. 4. select a configuration in the generated design table. You can modify the default configuration proposed by CATIA. 5. apply the design table feature to your document. or Creating a design table from current parameter values 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. create a table from the document parameters. select the parameters to add to the design table. specify a file to contain the design table generated. edit the CATIA design table generated. apply the design table to your document. A design table is a knowledgeware feature which behaves like any CATIA feature. For example, you can edit it from the specification tree by double-clicking it or by selecting the feature.object->Definition function from the contextual menu. When a parameter is constrained by a design table, the "Edit Parameter" dialog box which is displayed when you double-click it in the specification tree, gives you an access to the design table through the design table icon.

Using Catalogs

About Catalogs
This section tells you what you need to know about catalogs. Users often need a way of storing and classifying the many objects they have at their disposal, whether they be screws, ball bearings or computer parts. These objects may number tens of thousands, each with its own specific characteristics such as shape, color, size, diameter, length, standard, etc. To facilitate fast and easy retrieval of such objects thus avoiding time-wasting redesign CATIA Version 5 offers the possibility of creating catalogs. These can either be created from scratch or through the conversion of CATIA Version 4 libraries. For details about creation from scratch see Creating a Catalog. To find out more about the conversion of V4 libraries see "Converting CATIA Version 4 Libraries into CATIA Version 5 Catalogs" in the CATIA - V4 Integration User's Guide. A CATIA V5 catalog is in the form of a tree structure made up of chapters. Each chapter describes in a more or less precise way a family . The example given below is a family of fasteners which is a generic family comprising screws, nuts, etc. If we take one of its chapters, for example, SCREWS you can see that the entities it refers to can be described using keywords such as a reference, a type, a diameter, a length, etc. In the example given, the chapter FASTENERS is a generic chapter referencing terminal subchapters (SCREWS, NUTS, etc.) which, in turn, reference entities which are in fact CATIA Version 5 documents such as CATPart and CATProduct. After catalog creation, a search by keyword allows you to find the entities that come closest to your requirements. Obviously, the more criteria you use the easier it is to narrow down the search for as satisfactory a result as possible.

You can see that in the catalog's tree structure there is one chapter called ALL FASTENERS which references five end chapters: SCREWS, NUTS, WASHERS, BOLTS and PINS. You can of course define more levels in the catalog's tree structure than shown above. There are two important points to bear in mind: Any chapter can be referenced by one or more other chapters. This means that you have more than one way of accessing a catalog entity. Any chapter can be considered to be an entry point into a catalog. Finally, catalogs can be incorporated into the CATIA - Team PDM database. For more information about this product, see the CATIA - Team PDM User's Guide.

Creating a Catalog
This task explains how to create a catalog. Have the files ALL_FASTENERS.csv, SCREWS csv, and BuildCatalog.CATScript in the /Online/Samples/Infrastructure directory. 1. Open the file ALL_FASTENERS.csv. It looks like this:

2. Now open the file SCREWS.csv. It looks like this:

The file ALL_FASTENERS.csv contains the information required to create a non-terminal chapter i.e. a chapter which references subchapters (CHAPTER is specified in cell 1A with its name ALL_FASTENERS in 1B). The names of the catalog documents containing the referenced chapters must also be given (SCREWS and NUTS with their paths in 4C and 5C). In this particular example, these two families of entities are described in ALL.FASTENERS by a keyword named FASTENERS and identified by the names SCREWS and NUTS (in cells 4B and 5B). An example of what one of the end chapters could look like is given in the file SCREWS.csv. For each chapter (terminal or not) you must create an Excel file and save it in the .csv format (making sure that the cells are separated by a comma or semi-colon). Note the following: The first cell is reserved for the declaration of the chapter type: CHAPTER for a non-terminal chapter referencing subchapters or ENDCHAPTER for a terminal chapter referencing one or more entities. The second cell is reserved for the name of the chapter to be generated. ScrewIcon in column C refers to the name of the icon you use to identify the chapter to be generated. For more information see Using Icons at the end of this task.

The mandatory items are Keywords to define the names of the keywords associated with the chapter and Types to define their type. The types allowed are Real, String, Integer, Boolean and the magnitudes LENGTH, MASS, ANGLE, etc. After Keywords and Types, each line represents a description of the constituent entities i.e. their keyword values and their location. The values attributed to the magnitudes are assumed to be in the default unit (mm for LENGTH, g for MASS, etc). The CATIA V5 document names in the last column of the description line (in our example, the CATPart documents in column F of SCREWS.csv) can be preceded by their location, otherwise an attempt is made to find these documents based on the Search Order... command. Do not use the quote symbol (") in any cell (chapter name, keyword name, keyword value) to enable queries on your chapter. In the query syntax, this symbol is used exclusively to isolate keywords. Example: "DESIGNATION :"=="CHC" On Windows: 3. Open an empty Excel file and, with the aid of the ALL_FASTENERS.csv file supplied, complete the table giving all the keywords, types and catalog names required for the creation of the chapter. 4. Open a second empty Excel file and, with the aid of the SCREWS.csv file supplied, complete the table giving all the criteria required for the classification of the entities to be included in the chapter you want to create. 5. Once you have completed the Excel file save it in the csv format making sure it is comma or semi-colon delimited. On UNIX: The csv format is a text format recognized by UNIX. Any Excel file opened on Windows and saved in the csv format can subsequently be used on UNIX. However, if you prefer to work exclusively on UNIX you can use any text editor provided you use the same syntax as the csv format i.e. cell separation by comma or semi-colon. The catalog batch builder requires the creation of a csv file per chapter which results in the creation of a catalog document per chapter. 6. Before being able to use the CATScript file in order to run the batch operation you must make sure the CclTypeLib library is loaded. This library declares the catalog creation method. To do this, select the Tools->Options... command. The Options dialog box appears with the General category selected in the left-hand column. 7. Click the !Automation! tab. The following dialog box appears:

8. If the CclTypeLib library is not in the Selected list click on the Add button and retrieve the library from intel_a\code\bin. Make sure it is in the Selected list before clicking OK. 9. Open the file BuildCatalog.CATScript and provide the correct information where you see an arrow. The contents look like this:

Language="VBSCRIPT" Sub CATMain() ' Define the absolute path of the input csv file csvFile ="...\Online\Samples\Infrastructure\FASTENERS.csv" ' Define the absolute path of the output catalog file catalogFile ="...\FASTENERS.catalog" ' Creates a document document of type CatalogDocument Dim Catalog As Document Set Catalog=CATIA.Documents.Add("CatalogDocument") ' Calls the CreateCatalogFromcsv method on Catalog to create the catalog Catalog.CreateCatalogFromcsv csvFile , catalogFile ' Closes the document Catalog.Close End Sub

As you can see, this file, written in the VBScript language, contains the information required to batch-generate a .catalog file in the location you specify. It can be used on both Windows and UNIX. If you want to use it, copy it and change the csvFile and catalogFile paths. In the example above the CATScript file contains just one set of instructions for the batch-generation of one catalog. However, a CATScript file can of course include several series of instructions for the generation of several catalogs. 10. You are now ready to run the batch operation. Select the Tools ->Macro->Macros command. The following dialog box appears:

11. Select the appropriate CATScript file. Make sure that at the bottom of the box External File is selected indicating the location of the macro. Click on Run. This batch operation will generate: a report in the same location as the catalog file, allowing you to check verify successful creation of the catalog:

Creating ...\SCREWS.catalog From ...\Online\Samples\Infrastructure\SCREWS.csv ------------------------Terminal Chapter Creation -------------------------

Creating chapter of name SCREWS Chapter's associated icon : Envelope Chapter's associated dictionary type : ScrewType Creating keyword DESIGNATION of String type Creating keyword TYPE of String type Creating keyword DIAMETER of Real type Creating keyword LENGTH of LENGTH type 9 descriptions have been created -----------------------Batch successfully ended ------------------------

and a catalog with the name originally given in the Excel file, SCREWS.catalog. You are advised to keep the csv files used for catalog generation as no changes can be made to the catalog without completely regenerating it in the way described above.

12. If you want to open the catalog you have just created see Navigating Through a Catalog. Using icons If you prefer not to use the default icons supplied with the catalog application, you can associate one of your own with each chapter. You can do that by putting: either the complete path indicating the location of the icon or just the name of the icon (without the .bmp extension) in the cell (containing ScrewIcon above), i.e. the cell just to the right of the chapter name. If for whatever reason the icon you wish to use is not found no icon will appear, neither the default icon nor of course the icon you wanted to associate yourself. Entering the complete path has the disadvantage of presenting problems when exporting the catalog to another site. Entering just the name means that you must put all your icons in a single folder or directory which you must create (and not in the CATIA filetree). You must then concatenate the folder/directory location by resetting the CATIA environment variable "CATGraphicPath" in your current environment to point to the folder/directory. When exporting the catalog, you then only have to reset the variable specifying the receiving site. For more information about customizing environments, see "Managing Environments". Defining subchapter, product and part location in the .csv file Bear in mind the following: You can use a relative path for the SCREWS.catalog or DATA/HC_CU_M05-05.CATPart (if the parts are located in a subdirectory of the one containing SCREWS.catalog). In such cases, the current directory and Search Order function allows the catalog to retrieve these files. This approach has the advantage of making it easier to move catalogs to another site. You can also use an absolute path such as E:\CATALOG\SCREWS.catalog.

Navigating Through a Catalog

This task explains how to navigate through catalogs. 1. In a CATIA V5 session, open a catalog, the FASTENERS.catalog that you created in Creating a Catalog for example. The FASTENERS chapter, the only chapter contained in the FASTENERS.catalog appears in a catalog navigator. 2. Double-click on ALL FASTENERS. The entities contained in the chapter selected then appear in the catalog navigator as shown:

Default icons Two default icons are used: the folder icon for non-terminal chapters the sheet icon for terminal chapters. To find out how to use other icons, see Using Icons. Accessing catalog entities Double-clicking on a non-terminal chapter displays, in the navigator, all the chapters referenced by the non-terminal chapter. Double-clicking on a terminal chapter displays its contents in the form of a table. 2. Double-click on an end chapter name or icon. The following dialog box appears listing the entities contained in the chapter selected:

3. To open an entity double-click it or select it and click on the Open button. If you want you can now edit the entity just like any other V5 document. If the chapter contains a large number of entities you can either use the scrollbar or enter a row number in the Go to Row field. You can also narrow the selection criteria using the keywords you originally chose. To do this see Making a Query in a Catalog.

Making a Query In a Catalog

This task explains how to make a query in a catalog. If a chapter contains a large number of entities one of the most effective ways of finding the entities you need is to narrow the selection criteria by means of the keywords you initially used to create the catalog. Have the SCREWS.catalog open. 1. Double-click the chapter name or icon. The following dialog box appears listing the entities contained in the chapter selected:

2. In the Query field at the top of the dialog box enter: (x.DIAMETER==4)AND(x.TYPE=="FHC") The only entity now left in the list is the one whose type is FHC and whose diameter is 4:

Here is the list of operators you can use: "<>": is not equal "==": is equal ">=": is greater than or equal to "<=": is lower than or equal to "<": is lower than ">": is greater than "or": or "and": and If a keyword includes characters other than upper or lowercase alphabet characters and numbers from 0 through 9 the name must begin and end with double quotes. 3. If at any time you wish to redisplay the whole list of entities just click on the Reset button. 4. When you have identified the entity you require you can: either edit it by selecting the line where it appears and clicking the Open button or copy it into a CATProduct document (see "Inserting CATPart or CATProduct Documents from a Catalog" in the CATIA - Assembly Design User's Guide).

Workbench Description
CATIA Version 5 lets you create and manage parts, assemblies, drawings and CATIA Version 4 models in documents. There is a specific document type for each type of data you create with CATIA Version 5. CATIA Version 5 uses a multiple document interface (MDI), meaning that you can manipulate several documents at the same time. You can even view the contents of the same document in several windows at the same time. Opening a specific type of document activates the workbench and the associated workbench toolbar containing all the tools you need to edit the document, so the CATIA Version 5 application window looks a little different depending on what type of document you are editing. The same applies to the contents of the menu bar and the commands on pulldown menus. This section contains the description of the icons and menus specific to the CATIA Object Manager workbench. These commands are discussed in greater details elsewhere in the guide. The main application window looks like this (click the sensitive areas to see the related documentation):

The section is organized as follows:

Infrastructure Menu Bar

This section presents the main menu bar available when you run the application and before creating or opening a document.

Start

File

Edit

View

Insert Tools Windows

Help

Start
The Start menu is a navigation tool intended to help you toggle between different workshops. The contents of the Start menu vary according to the confogurations and/or products installed. For more information about the Start menu, refer to "Accessing the Navigation Tools".

File
For... See... New... Creating New Documents New Creating a New Document from an Existing One from... Open... Opening Existing Documents Close Closing Documents Save Save As Saving Existing Documents Saving Documents For the First Time or Under Another Name Saving Documents In Other Formats Saving All Documents

Save All

Print... Customizing Print Settings Before Printing Your Documents Desk... Using the FileDesk Workbench Send To Transferring CATIA Version 5 Data

Edit
For... Undo Redo Cut Copy Paste See... Undoing Actions Recovering Last Action Undone Cutting and Pasting Objects Copying and Pasting Objects Cutting and Pasting Objects Copying and Pasting Objects Deleting Objects Selecting Using the Search... Command

Delete Search...

Selection Sets... Storing Selections Using Selection Sets Define Selection Storing Selections Using Set Selection Sets Links... Properties... Editing Document Links Displaying and Editing Graphic Properties

View
For... Toolbars Geometry See... Viewing and Hiding Toolbars Setting Document Window Layout Preferences Setting Document Window Layout Preferences

Specifications

Compass Reset Compass

About the 3D Compass Manipulating Objects Using the Mouse and Compass Using the Overview on Specifications Overview the Specification Tree Using the Geometry Geometry Overview Overview Fitting All Geometry in Fit All In the Geometry Area Zooming In On An Area Zoom Area Zooming In Zoom In Out Zooming Out Panning Pan Rotating Rotate Looking At Objects Modify->Look At Turning Your Head To Modify->Turn Head, Zoom In, View An Object Zoom Out, Normal Zooming In View Zooming Out Viewing Along a Normal to a Plane Using Standard and Named Views... User-Defined Views Using Rendering Styles Render Style Navigation Mode Navigating Setting Lighting Effects Lighting... Setting Depth Effects Depth Effect... Viewing Objects against Ground the Ground Magnifying Magnifier... Hiding and Showing Hide/Show Objects Using the Full Screen Full Screen

Tools
For... Formula... Image See... Using Knowledgeware Capabilities Capturing and Managing Images for the Album Recording, Running and Editing Macros Customizing Toolbars Customizing Settings Creating a Document Search Order

Macro Customize... Options... Search Order...

Window
For... New Window Tile Horizontally Tile Vertically Cascade See... Using Document Windows Using Document Windows Using Document Windows Using Document Windows

Help
For... See... CATIA V5.3 Help Getting Contextual Help Contents, Index and Accessing the Online Help Search Library Using the What's This? What's This? Command Accessing the Dassault User Galaxy Systmes User Galaxy

About CATIA V5.3

Displaying Copyright Information

Standard Toolbar

See Creating New Documents See Opening Existing Documents See Saving Existing Documents See Printing a Document Quickly without Customizing Print Settings See Cutting and Pasting Objects See Copying and Pasting Objects See Cutting and Pasting Objects, and Copying and Pasting Objects See Undoing Actions See Recovering Last Action Undone See About Formulas and About Parameters See About the Design Table See Using the What's This? Command

View Toolbar
The View toolbar appears in three different configurations. This is the default View toolbar:

This is the View toolbar in Walk mode:

This is the View toolbar in Fly mode:

See Navigating in Fly Mode See Navigating in Fly Mode See Navigating in Walk Mode See Navigating in Examine Mode See Fitting All Geometry in the Geometry Area See Turning Your Head To View An Object See Navigating in Fly Mode, Navigating in Walk Mode See Navigating in Fly Mode, Navigating in Walk Mode See Viewing Along a Normal to a Plane See Using Standard Views See Using Standard Views See Using Standard Views

See Using Standard Views See Using Standard Views See Using Standard Views See Using Standard Views See Panning See Rotating See Zooming In See Zooming Out See Wireframe (NHR) See Hidden Line Removal (HLR) See Quick Hidden Line Removal (HRD) See Shading (SHD) See Shading with Edges (SHD+E) See Customizing the View Mode See Hiding Objects See Displaying Hidden Objects

Capture Toolbar

See Capturing Simple Images See Capturing Simple Images See Saving Images to Other Formats See Printing Images from the Album See Copying Images to the Clipboard (Windows Only) See Capturing Simple Images

Viewing and Hiding Toolbars

Method 1 1. Select View->Toolbars. The list of current toolbars is displayed. Currently visible toolbars are indicated by a tick symbol to the left of the toolbar name.

2. In the list, click the toolbar you want to view or hide. Note that: you can detach toolbars from the application window border by dragging the double line to the left of the toolbar: you can drag the toolbar anywhere around the screen, then dock the toolbar in the same or in another location by dragging it onto the the application window border you can drag a tool icon from a workbench toolbar, and drop it onto a selected object: this is a quicker way to run a command. You can also drag and drop an object onto an object: for example, copy a fillet on a part.

Method 2 1. Right-click any icon in any toolbar. The list of current toolbars is displayed. Currently visible toolbars are indicated by a tick symbol to the left of the toolbar name.

2. Select the Customize... command to display the Customize dialog box.

3. Click the Toolbars tab, then toggle the Hide or Show button to hide or show the toolbar.

Customizing

Customizing Toolbars and Workbenches

Customizing a Toolbar by Dragging and Dropping

This task shows how to customize a toolbar by dragging and dropping a command onto the toolbar to add the command, and dragging a command away from a toolbar to delete the command. 1. Right-click any icon in any toolbar to display the list of toolbars. For example, the following toolbar list appears when no documents are open: 2. Select the Customize... command to display the Customize dialog box. The dialog box contains the following tabs: Start: customizes the Start menu and workbench access icons (as described in "Accessing the Navigation Tools") User Workbenches: lets you create your own workbenches Toolbars: lists the currently visible toolbars (default) Commands: lists the commands you can drag and drop onto a toolbar. Options: contains general customization options. You can also display the Customize dialog box by selecting the View->Toolbars->Customize... command. With the Toolbars tab open, double-clicking any icon highlights, in the toolbars list, the toolbar the icon belongs to. Double-clicking any toolbar also highlights the toolbar name, allowing you to identify it. 3. Click the Commands tab to list the commands available. The Categories list allows you to filter the listed commands by category: the category is the name of the menu in the menu bar. For example, selecting the Edit category in the Categories list displays in the commands list all the commands likely to appear on the Edit menu.

The category All Commands lists all commands available. You can also select the Select command. If you created macros, the macro names are also listed. You can then add a macros to a toolbar. 4. Select a command from the command list. In this example, the Capture... command has been selected. Note that the icon for the command is displayed at the bottom of the dialog box, along with a short help message explaining the role of the icon.

5. Drag the command from the command list to the toolbar to which you want to add the command. 6. Drop the command onto the desired toolbar. In our example, the icon for the Image Capture... command has been added to the standard toolbar: 7. To delete a command from a toolbar using the drag-and-drop mechanism, drag the command and drop it back inside the list of commands in the Customize dialog box. You can also drag and drop commands which do not have icons: in this case, the command name appears in the toolbar. Your customization is stored automatically in the FrameConfig.settings file: you recover it if you exit and restart. For more information about settings, refer to "About Settings" .

Managing User-Defined Toolbars

This tasks shows how to create, rename, delete, restore, hide and show user-defined toolbars 1. Right-click any icon in any toolbar to display the list of toolbars and associated commands. For example, the following toolbar list appears when no documents are open: 2. Select the Customize... command to display the Customize dialog box, and click the Toolbars tab if it is not already activated. The Toolbars tab lists the currently available toolbars, and provides the commands for: creating new toolbars renaming toolbars deleting toolbars restoring the original content of selected toolbars.

3. To create a new toolbar, click the New... button. The New Toolbar dialog box appears with a default toolbar name (NewToolBar001), and an empty toolbar appears:

4. Enter the name of the new toolbar, then click OK. The new toolbar is added to the bottom of the list, and an empty toolbar is added to the right of the main application window. In our example, the toolbar "MyToolBar" has been added to the list:

5. Click the Command tab and drag and drop commands onto the new toolbar. In our example, the toolbar "MyToolBar" contains three icons:

6. To rename a user-defined toolbar, click the Toolbar tab again, select a toolbar, click the Rename... button and enter the new name, then click OK. 7. To delete a user-defined toolbar, click the Toolbar tab again, select a toolbar, click the Delete... button, then click OK. 8. To restore the original contents of a toolbar, click the Toolbar tab again, select a toolbar, click the Restore... button, then click OK. The Restore All... button restores the original contents of all toolbars. 9. To hide or display a user-defined toolbar, click the Toolbar tab again, select a toolbar, and click the Hide or Show button to toggle toolbar display on or off, then click OK.

Creating User-Defined Workbenches

This task explains how to create and customize workbenches. 1. Right-click any icon in any toolbar to display the list of toolbars. For example, the following toolbar list appears when no documents are open:

2. Select the Customize... command to display the Customize dialog box. You can also display the Customize dialog box by selecting the View->Toolbars->Customize... command.

3. Click the User Workbenches tab. Note that the New... option will be available only if there is an active workbench: if no document is open, the New... option will not be available.

4. Click the New... option to display the New User Workbench dialog box:

5. Enter the name for your workbench, then click the OK button. In our example, let's assume the name of the user workbench is "My Workbench". Clicking the OK button adds the workbench name to the list...

... deactivates the current workbench, and activates "My Workbench", represented by the icon top right: 6. Click the Toolbars tab, then click the New... option to start adding toolbars to "My Workbench". The New Toolbar dialog box and an empty toolbar are displayed:

In the New Toolbar dialog box: the Workbenches list contains a list of all workbenches related to the current working context: in our example, a CATPart document was open when we created "My Workbench", so the list contains all workbenches that could possibly be activated in a CATPart document. the Toolbars list contains the toolbars belonging to the selected workbench. 7. Name the new toolbar to be included in your workbench. 8. Select a workbench from the Workbench list. The toolbars belonging to the selected workbench are displayed in the Toolbars list. 9. Select a toolbar. The contents of the toolbar are added to your empty toolbar, for example:

10. Click OK, and close the Customize dialog box. You can then drag your new toolbar and dock it to the right of the CATIA window so that your workshop now looks like this:

Note that your user-defined workbench will remain active after it is created, until you activate another workbench. Your new workbench is added to: the top of the Start menu (and to the Favorites list in the Start menu tab) the "Welcome to CATIA V5.2" dialog box, which appears when you start a session, or when you click the icon representing the current workbench. the list of workbench icons accessed by right-clicking the current workbench icon.

Customizing Settings

Infrastructure

About Settings
CATIA Version 5 creates two types of data: application data contained in the documents you create and setting files which are non-editable There are two types of settings: temporary settings permanent settings. Temporary settings contain settings of a temporary nature: album screen captures and roll file information, and are created in a location referenced by the CATTemp variable. The default location is the folder C:Winnt\Profiles\username\CATTemp on Windows NT (where "username" is your logon id), or the CATTemp directory in your home directory on UNIX. CATTemp contains two folders or directories: Album: contains screen captures created using the Tools->Image->Capture... command CNext01.roll: roll file. Permanent setting files store customization you perform mainly using the various tabs provided by the Tools->Options... command. For example, application window customization, background colors, part and print settings, etc. These files are created in a location referenced by the CATUserSettingPath variable. The default location is the folder C:Winnt\Profiles\username\CATSettings on Windows NT (where "username" is your logon id), or the CATSettings directory in your home directory (UNIX). Permanent setting files are identified by the suffix: *.settings. Deleting either types of files deletes your customization. On Microsoft Windows95 OSR2 and Windows 98, there in no user-specific folder for storing user settings. Settings for all CATIA users on the same computer are stored in the folders C:\%WINDIR\CATSettings and C:\%WINDIR\CATTemp, where "%WINDIR" is the name of the folder in which Microsoft Windows95 OSR2 or Windows 98 are installed. For example, this will commonly be: C:\Windows\CATSettings C:\Windows\CATTemp

If you start a session in administrator mode using a specific environment, you can lock settings so that other users running a session with the same environment inherit those settings and cannot change them. For full details how to do so, refer to Locking Settings.

Locking Settings
This task explains how to run a session in administrator mode for the purpose of locking settings so that other users running a session with the same environment inherit those settings and cannot change them. Note, however, that not all settings can be locked. By default, there is "zero administration" of settings: user settings are stored in the CATSettings environment as explained in About Settings. The scenario walks you through a procedure useful for locking settings for users of the default environment created at installation. This is a useful procedure if you interested in locking settings, but do not want to multiply environments on the same computer. The scenario described reflects the Windows platform only, but the feature is also supported on UNIX. Do not confuse running a session in administrator mode (a CATIA concept) with logging on as administrator (a system concept). Scenario 1: Locking Settings for the Default Global Environment 1. Log on as an administrator. You must belong to the Administrators group, or have the privileges assigned to the Administrators group. For the purposes of this particular scenario only, you need to log on as administrator because you are going to modify the default global environment (CATIA V5R3). 2. Select the Start->Programs->Catia->Tools->Environment Editor V5R3 command to display the CATIA Environment Editor. You will see two environments with the same name:
CATIA.V5R3.B03 CATIA.V5R3.B03 User Global

3. Select the CATIA.V5R3.B03 user environment, then press the Delete button to delete it. 4. Double-click the CATIA.V5R3.B03 environment to display the corresponding environment variables. 5. Locate the following environment variable: CATReferenceSettingPath Note that the default setting for this variable is empty: 6. Reset the variable so that it points to an existing folder, for example:
CATReferenceSettingPath E:\home\users\administrator\LockSettings

then click Set, then OK to save and exit the environment editor. This folder will contain the setting locks you will create later. The folder access rights must be set up for read access only for end users, and read/write for the person creating the setting locks. 7. Run a CATIA session using the following command:
cnext -env CATIA.V5R3.B03 -admin

A session is started using the default user environment. 8. Select the Tools->Options... command. The "Options" dialog box is displayed. Note that a lock symbol like this appears opposite each option in the General tab:

Lock symbols are not available in all setting tabs 9. To set the locks, click on one the appropriate lock symbols. For example, click the lock symbol for the User Interface Style option:

The lock symbol now looks like this:

Because the user interface style was set to CATIA - P2, end users running this environment will not be able to change this setting. 10. Click OK to confirm. The lock settings are stored in the folder referenced by the CATReferenceSettingPath environment variable you reset earlier. 11. Exit CATIA. An end user who starts a CATIA session with the normal startup commands (but not the cnext -env CATIA.V5R3.B03 -admin command) and using the same environment, will see this after selecting the Tools->Options... command:

The lock symbol now looks like this:

Because the user interface style was set to "CATIA - P2", end users running this environment will not be able to change this setting to "CATIA - P1". Scenario 2: Locking Settings for User Environments You do not necessarily have to log on as administrator to customize an environment and set locks on settings. End users can, of course, customize their own user environments to reset the CATReferenceSettingPath environment variable, start CATIA using the command:
cnext -env myenv -admin

where "myenv" is the name of the user environment, then lock settings in the same way as described in their first scenario. Similarly, all end users starting a CATIA session with the normal startup commands and using the same environment will inherit the locked settings. Scenario 3: Concatenating Settings Locks

Different users may want to set different types of locks at different levels for a variety of reasons. If several users set locks in different folders using the same environment, end users of the same environment will inherit the all the locks set by those administrators. To implement this solution, you must concatenate several CATReferenceSettingPath values as illustrated below:

In this example: one administrator (starting CATIA in administration mode) locks settings in "Environment 1" at the site level on the same site, two administrators (also starting CATIA in administration mode) in two different workshops lock settings in "Environment 2" and "Environment 3" respectively users 1 and 2 run CATIA with "Environment 2" and inherit the setting locks in "Environment 1" and "Environment 2" respectively users 3 and 4 run CATIA with "Environment 3" and inherit the setting locks in "Environment 1" and "Environment 3" respectively.

General
This task explains how to customize general-purpose settings. 1. Select the Tools->Options... command. 2. Select the General category (to the left), then the General tab:

User Interface Style CATIA - P1: sets the P1 user interface style, and is available for both CATIA - P1 and CATIA - P2 users CATIA - P2: sets the P2 user interface style, and is available for CATIA - P2 users only. Save Automatic save every ... minutes: save frequency value in minutes if you want the current document to be saved at regular intervals. Update Check the type of part update you wish: Manual: you wish to control your update operations. Automatic: parts are updated automatically Stop update on first error: the application stops constructing the part once it detects a problem.

Loading Referenced Documents By default, the Load referenced documents option is checked. This means that when a father document is loaded, the child documents it points to are also loaded. However, if you uncheck this option, only the father document is actually loaded when you open it. A typical case of this would be a CATProduct document, i.e. the father document pointing to CATPart documents i.e. the child documents. If you open a father document containing unloaded child documents you can load one or more of these documents using the File->Desk command (see Using the FileDesk Workbench). CATIA Documentation Location The Doc Installation Path field displays the current location of the CATIA online documentation. By default, the online documentation is located in:
C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B03doc

Enter the path where the documentation is installed. Note that, if you install the documentation on the network, you can map a drive and enter the appropriate path in this field. UNC (Universal Naming Convention) syntax is also supported. Refer to "Doc Installation Path" for more details. 3. Click OK to confirm.

Customizing Compatibility Settings

This task shows you how to customize Compatibility settings. 1. Select the Tools->Options... command. The Options dialog box appears with the General category selected in the left-hand column. 2. Click the Compatibility tab. The following dialog box appears.

In CATIA Version 4, certain information was specified by means of the parameter settings in the declaration files. These declaration parameters are no longer supported in CATIA Version 5 and there is no way to transfer them automatically to CATIA Version 5. Such information must be provided by means of the Options dialog box shown above, before attempting to read Version 4 data. The Options dialog box lets you:

display faces and surfaces visible in shading mode in CATIA Version 4 open CATIA Version 4 models referencing an external PROJECT file specify the code page identifying unlabeled data declare the code page to be stored in the CATIA data to be written when saving CATIA Version 5 CATPart documents as CATIA Version 4 models. Displaying faces and surfaces visible in shading mode in CATIA Version 4 In V4, the display attribute CURRENT DISPLAY MODE SENSITIVE enables you to decide whether to display the hidden parts or not. In Version 5, by default, only faces and surfaces that were in shading mode in Version 4 are shown in models displayed by means of the CATIA Site Navigator. To display all faces and surfaces, you must therefore disable the CURRENT DISPLAY MODE SENSITIVE attribute. 3. To do this, in the Conversion part of the Options dialog box, check the box Display elements with the Display Mode Sensitive attrinbute off.

Opening CATIA Version 4 models referencing an external PROJECT file In V4, certain model data must be contained in a PROJECT file which can either be internal to the model or external. If it is external, the only way to access such data is to provide Version 5 with precise information about the PROJECT file's whereabouts. 4. Enter, in the PROJECT File Path field, the location of the PROJECT file referenced by the V4 model you wish to display. Make sure you complete this field before displaying a Version 4 model. If you do not specify the PROJECT file path before opening the model, a warning message will appear. You can display such models on Windows and on UNIX. If you want to display the model on Windows, the address to be specified should look something like this: http://NTmachinename/path/PRJfilename Note that the external PROJECT file referenced by the model can only be on UNIX. Also, you must first make sure an http server has been installed on the machine where the PROJECT file resides. The address to be specified should look something like this: http://NTmachinename/path/PRJfilename On UNIX, just specify the path, for example: /u/users/username/PRJfilename The following reference tables in the PROJECT files can now be accessed in CATIA Version 5: attribute and class tables annotations/dimensions. There are no restrictions as regards the PROJECT file's code page. However, you must make sure that the code pages of the model and the PROJECT file are compatible. Specifying the code page identifying unlabeled data In V4, the declaration parameter catsite.DEFAULT_DS_CODE_PAGE declares the language to identify the data read if this data is not labeled (i.e. if it is just labeled EBCDIC or ASCII, and not labeled with a standard code page such as ISO8859-x, IBM-392, EUC-KR, EUC-CN, and so forth). For Version 4 data that is not labeled with a standard code page (for example, ASCII-DS-xxx or EBCDIC-DS-xxx) other than US English, you must specify the appropriate language from the list provided.

5. To do this, click on the DS_DEFAULT_CODE_PAGE list in the V4 Declarations part of the dialog box and select the appropriate language.

Declaring the writing code page when saving CATIA Version 5 CATPart documents as CATIA Version 4 models In V4, the declaration parameter catsite.WRITING_CODE_PAGE declares the code page to be stored in the CATIA data to be written. The writing code page ISO-8859-1 is the default value so normally, unless another code page was already specified, you can go ahead with the save.

6. However, if you want to use a writing code page other than ISO-8859-1, open the WRITING_CODE_PAGE list in the V4 Declarations part of the dialog box (indicated by the arrow above), select the appropriate code page and click OK.

7. Click OK to confirm.

Customizing Knowledgeware
This task shows you how to customize the parameters defined in your document. 1. Select the Tools -> Options command. The Options dialog box is displayed. 2. Click the Knowledge tab. This tab lets you customize the way parameters are displayed in the specification tree. Check Tools->Option>Knowledge->Parameter Tree View->With Value to display the parameter values in the specification tree. Check the Tools->Option>Knowledge->Parameter Tree View->With Formula to display the formulas which constrain the parameter in the specification tree. The Tools->Options->Knowledge->Pasting Parameters check boxes allow you to: paste a parameter without the formula which defines it. For example: Holeplus= 15 = Diameter + 10 will be pasted as Real.i = 15 (if the With Value box is checked) paste a parameter as well as the formula which defines it, but only if the parameters referred to in the formula are also selected in the copy. For example: Holeplus= 15 = Diameter + 10 will be pasted as Real.i = 15 if the Diameter parameter does not belong to the items selected for the copy but HolePlus will be pasted as Real.i = 15 = Real.j + 10 if Diameter is selected in the copy (use multi-selection). paste a parameter as well as the formula. Holeplus= 15 = Diameter + 10 will be pasted as
Real.i = Diameter + 10

CATIA users working with non-latin characters should check the Tools->Options>Knowledge->Parameter Names->Surrounded by ' option. Otherwise, parameter names should have to be renamed in latin characters when used in formulas.

Licensing
This task explains how to reserve product licenses during a session using the License Manager. Refer to "Reserving Licenses Using the License Manager" for more information.

Performance
This task explains how to customize display performance settings. 1. Select the Tools->Options... command. 2. In the General category, click the Performance tab:

3D Accuracy and 2D Accuracy The accuracy setting controls the tessellation of surfaces (the surfaces of your geometry are built using a mesh of polygons). You have two choices: Fixed: sets a fixed sag value for calculating tessellation on all objects, which does not vary with object size: a low value (close to 1) means that a very fine mesh is used to render surfaces, but the drawback is that geometry will be redrawn more slowly when using the viewing tools a high value (close to 10) means that a very coarse mesh is used, but the advantage is that geometry will be redrawn more quickly.

Proportional to element size Tessellation is calculated according to object size: the larger the object, the coarser the tessellation. For the same sag value, the tessellation on small objects will always be finer than on large objects. The sag value used to calculate the tessellation of each object is calculated is as follows:
sag x radius of sphere/100

where: "sag" is the sag value you set using the slider (between 0.1 and 1) "radius of sphere" is the radius of a sphere encompassing the object entirely (this value is obviously higher on larger objects). The preview area to the right show you the effect of each setting. 2D accuracy settings are the same as for 3D. Level of Details (P2 only) You do not always need to view a high level of detail in your geometry all the time. You can use the Static and When Moving settings to add or remove display quality: Static: even if you do not want to move geometry, it is often useful to remove details you do not need to see. Set a low value if you want to see all the details, or a high value to remove details. While Moving: you will be able to move large parts more quickly if you set While Moving to a high value. When you release the mouse after moving the part, the normal level of detail will be redisplayed. In both cases, the higher the value, the lower the level of detail. Normally, you set Static to a low value, and While Moving to a high value. The added value is increased display performance. Transparency Quality Low (Screen Door): similar to viewing an object through a mesh or a screen. Use this setting when you need to look at objects through another transparent object. This mode is also recommended for increased display performance. High (Alpha Blending): similar to looking through clear glass. Use this setting when you need to view several transparent objects located at different depths of a scene. For example, looking through a car windscreen at other opaque objects inside the car. Note, however, that this mode is computation-intensive and consequently has an adverse affect on display performance. Note that you also need to set the transparency coefficient on selected objects using the Edit->Properties command or Properties command on the contextual menu, by dragging the Transparency slider on the Graphic tab. Refer to Displaying and Editing Graphic Properties for more information. Frames per second Check the Activate button if you want to control the minimum number of frames per second (frame rate) during animations (zooming, moving, flying,... etc.). The frame rate varies from 1 to 30. Setting a low frame rate keeps a maximum number of details visible, but animations are less smooth and fluid; setting a high frame rate limits visible details, but provides smoother, more fluid animations. This option is particularly useful, for example, in Fly mode: when flying within large objects, you may not need to see all the details, but you want to navigate through the object in as smooth a manner as possible. Show Outline (wherever possible) This option is useful if you always want to display outlines for parts created from surfaces of revolution, for example, shafts, and cylinders. This setting determines whether you see outlines when using the NHR and Shading + Edges modes.

Whereas edge display is computed by your workstation's graphic adapter, outline display is computed by the display software. Note that, in large assemblies, displaying outlines may affect display performance. You may want to switch outline display off in this case. Show Hidden Edges (whenever possible) Displays or hides the hidden edges of selected objects.

For example, when the hidden edges of this object are not displayed, it looks like this:

.. and like this when the hidden edges are displayed:

3. Click OK to confirm.

Setting Specification Tree Options

This task explains how to set specification tree display.

You need to have MultiBodyAssembly.CATPart open in the /doc/samples/V4Integration directory.

1. Select the Tools->Options... command. The Options dialog box appears with the General category selected in the left-hand column: 2. Select the Tree tab to display the document layout options. In the Tree Type section of the dialog box, you will notice that the option Classical Windows Style is selected by default. This is the conventional way of displaying the specification tree.

3. Select OK to see what the Classical Windows Style looks like:

This option might, for example, be useful when working on solids and assemblies. 4. Reselect the Tools->Options... command but this time select the Structure option:

5. Reselect the Tools->Options... command but this time select the Constructive Historic option:

6. If the whole of the tree is not displayed, you may have to enlarge the window. Alternatively, you can reduce the length of tree item names. To do this, go back to the Tools->Options... dialog box and select the Fixed Size option in the Tree Item Size section. The default number of characters is 8. You can of course specify the number you wish.

7. You can also display the Constructive Historic option horizontally. To do this, go back to the Tools->Options... dialog box and select the Horizontal option in the Tree Orientation section. The tree will then look something like this:

This option might, for example, be useful when working on solids and surfaces. 8. Reselect the Tools->Options... command but this time select the Relational option.

As you can see, this option shows all possible relations between the different items that go to make up the part.

9. You can also display the Relational option horizontally. To do this, go back to the Tools->Options... dialog box and select the Horizontal option in the Tree Orientation section:

This option could, for example, be used for surface creation. You can also change the background colors using the Visualization tab via the Tools->Options... function. If the specification tree prevents you from seeing the geometry, you can move the tree by first clicking the reference axis (the geometry is displayed in low highlighting mode), then dragging the tree to a new location using the middle mouse button.

Customizing Units
This task explains how to customize units. 1. Select the Tools->Options... command. The Units tab options appear with the General category selected in the left-hand column. 2. Select the Unit tab. CATIA lets you define or redefine: the default unit and the display of values for magnitude type parameters. In the upper part of the dialog box, the default unit along with its symbol is displayed for each magnitude:

In the lower part of the dialog box, the 'Dimension Display' check boxes allow you to define: whether you want to display trailing zeros the upper and lower limits for using an exponential notation how many decimal places to display . 3. If you want to redefine a default unit: 1. Select the line with the magnitude whose unit is to be redefined. The list of available units for this magnitude is displayed right below the magnitude list (the magnitude name is grayed out). For example, if you want to redefine the Length unit, the list of available units is:

4. 5. 6.

7.

2. select the unit you want to define as new default unit in the selection list (in the example above, the Inch has been selected). The magnitude definition is updated in the magnitude list right above. If you want to display trailing zeros, check the 'Display Trailing Zeros' box. Example: a 10 mm value will be converted in 10.000 mm if the number of decimal places is set to 3. If you want to redefine the decimal places, check the appropriate options. Example: a 10.571 mm will be converted to 10.57 mm if the number of decimal places is set to 2. If you want to define the exponential notation limits, enter the value under and below which you want to display a magnitude type parameter in an exponential form. Example1: 105700 mm will be displayed as 1.06e+005mm if the upper limit for an exponential notation is set to 5. Example2: 0.000057 mm will be displayed as 5.70e-005mm if the lower limit for an exponential notation is set to 4. Click OK to confirm your choice.

The new settings will apply immediately both to documents already loaded and to those subsequently loaded.The default values for length, mass and time are millimeters, kilos and seconds.

Customizing Visualization Settings

This task explains how to customize display visualization settings. 1. Select the Tools->Options... command. 2. Click the Visualization tab:

The Performance tab lets you customize: Graduated color background

This option activates a graduated color background in all open documents, and in the Preview and workbench list areas of the Visualization tab itself. For example, this document uses a graduated color

background. The color becomes gradually lighter towards the bottom of the document:

...but this document uses a normal color background:

Background: sets background color in all open document windows Selected element, Low-intensity highlighting and Preselected element linetype: set colors of selected elements and low-intensity elements, and the linetype used to display preselected elements. Refer to "Preselecting and Selecting Using the Pointer" for a discussion of preselection and selection techniques Update needed: sets the color of objects to be updated; refer to the Part Design documentation for more information about updating objects Handles: sets manipulator handle colors. Graphic manipulators are displayed on certain objects (planar patches, holes, ...) for the purpose of moving the objects more easily. Refer to "Moving Objects Using the 3D Compass" for more information about how the compass is used on examples of where manipulators are used. Display all elements using Z-buffer depth: activates the Z-buffer so that all elements hide each other. When activated, all elements including lines and planes (usually displayed in front of other elements) are displayed at their true depth in the 3D scene. When deactivated, lines and planes are always displayed in front of other elements. Preselect in geometry view: activates preselection highlighting. As you point to objects, different parts of the objects are highlighted in the geometry area, and the object name is highlighted in the specification tree.

Display preselection navigator after ... second(s): sets the amount of time, in seconds, which elapses before the preselection navigator appears after pointing at an object. Refer to "Selecting Using the Preselection Navigator" for more information about how to use the preselection navigator. For more information about navigating in fly mode, refer to "Navigating in Fly Mode". Highlight faces and edges: controls the way faces and edges are prehighlighted and highlighted. How elements are prehighlighted and highlighted: is determined by whether you are in Design mode (editing an element in the context of an assembly) or in Visualization mode and varies according to the current visualization mode: shading with edges. shading, wireframe (NHR), dynamic hidden line removal (HRD). Note that some minor differences in the way elements are highlighted are noticeable using the HRD mode. The default prehighlight and highlight colors are different, and can be customized using the Visualization tab. By default, faces and edges are highlighted. Depending on the element type, elements may or may not be displayed using the Z-buffer. The following examples use the shading mode. When you are editing an object, a selected face is highlighted like this:

... and a selected edge is highlighted like this:

If you select the Pad or the PartBody in the specification tree, the whole object is highlighted like this:

If you are in Visualization mode in an assembly, the whole object is highlighted. Display manipulation bounding box: when clicking on an object, displays a box around the selected object if it uses manipulators:

Objects using manipulators can be manipulated by the 3D compass . For more information about manipulating objects using the 3D compass, refer to "Manipulating Objects Using the Mouse and Compass". Limit display of manipulators on individual elements in multi-selection to ... elements: sets a limit on the number of elements selected in multi-selection mode (using the selection trap) on which manipulators can be displayed. You can select more elements than the limit (for example, by using the CTRL key to extend the selection), but any elements selected over the limit cannot be manipulated. This option is useful, for example, in the Drafting application when selecting large numbers of elements. Gravitational effects when navigating: fixes the X, Y or Z axis during navigation.While turning in Fly mode, this creates the impression that the user viewpoint tilts or banks with respect to the fixed axis, as in a real plane. Animation during viewpoint navigation: set this option if you want viewpoint changes in certain contexts to be animated. To see an example of the effect of this option, check the option, then select a plane and click the Sketcher icon. The selected plane is slowly rotated until parallel to the screen just like during an animation. If you do not check this option, the selected plane is set parallel to the screen immediately (without the animation effect). Anti-aliasing: activates anti-aliasing on all edges and lines.

Anti-aliasing makes jagged lines and edges appear smoother:

... and when switched off, edges and lines look jagged:

3. Click OK to confirm, or Reset... and OK again to reset default settings.

Part Design

Customizing General Settings

This task shows you how to set general settings to be used in the Part Design workbench. 1. Select the Tools -> Options... command. 2. Click Part in the list of objects to the left of the Options dialog box. 3. Click the General tab. The tab appears, containing two categories of options: External References Delete Operation External References 4. Checking the Keep link with selected object option lets you maintain the links between external references, copied elements for example, and their origins when you are editing these elements. This option is used as you are editing parts included in assemblies. For more about designing parts in assembly context, refer to the CATIA- Assembly Design User's Guide Version 5. If later you need to cut the link between external references and their origin, you just need to use the Isolate command.

5. Check Synchronize all external references for update to make sure that CATIA updates elements copied from other parts. Synchronizing assumes that all modifications to the other parts affect external references included in your part. If this option is deactivated, the application will update your part only. 6. Check Create external references in Show mode to define the visualization mode for the elements while they are being created.

Delete Operation 7. Check Display the Delete dialog box if you wish to access filters for deletion (see Deleting Features). 8. Check Delete referenced sketches if you wish to delete sketches associated to features while you are deleting those features. Sketches will be deleted only if they are exclusive, which means that if they are shared by other features, they will not be deleted. 9. Click OK to confirm the operation and quit the dialog box.

Customizing Measurement Display

This task shows you how to set general settings to be used in the Part Design workbench. 1. Select Tools -> Options... . 2. Click Product in the list of objects to the left of the Options dialog box.

3. Click the DMU Navigator tab. The tab lets you customize the measurement display: number of decimal places after the decimal point for length, angle, area and volume measurements 4. To set the default measurement display, enter the number of decimal places you want to see displayed after the decimal point; for example for length measurements, enter 4 to display 20.4235 5. Repeat the above for angle, area and volume measurements 6. Click OK to confirm the operation and quit the dialog box.

Customizing Constraints
This task shows you how to customize the display and style of the constraints defined in your document. 1. Select the Tools->Options command. The Options dialog box is displayed. The tab available by default provides general options. 2. In the General category, click the Symbols tab. This tab lets you customize: Constraint Style Dimension Style

Constraint Style 3. To set the colors defining the status of the constraints, click the arrow in the appropriate constraint type combo box. For instance, you can define a new color for resolved constraints. A list appears containing the current color and the colors available by default. 4. Choose any of these colors.

5. If you prefer to customize colors, click the More Colors option at the bottom of the color list to access the color palette. The Color dialog box appears, allowing you to define the colors of your choice: In the Basic Colors area, the first sixteen colors (in the top two rows) are the same as those at the top of the previous list. The remaining four rows contain extra colors. The empty boxes below are reserved for your own custom colors.

6. Click Define Custom Colors to expand the Color dialog box. The full color palette and color customization tools are displayed. The colored area with the cross represents a color spectrum. 7. To define a new color, click anywhere in the colored area or drag the cross inside the spectrum to instantaneously change the color in the small box below the spectrum.

8. Use the slider to adjust your color. This makes the brightness of the custom color vary. The HSL (Hue, Saturation and Luminance) and RGB (Red, Green and Blue) values vary according to where the cross is located. You can also enter HSL and RGB values in the fields provided to suit your exact color specifications.

9. Once you are happy with the color, click the Add to Custom Colors option to add the custom color. 10. Click Apply to return to the original color palette. 11. Click on the custom color to apply it to the constraint type. 12. Now, to choose between the constraints you wish to see or not in the geometry area, click the Filter button. The dialog box that appears contains all of the constraints which can be defined for the geometry. 13. Check the Conditional Filter option. You can now specify how you wish to filter constraints in the Status Filter frame. Three options are available. 14. Check the Filter unverified constraints option. 15. Uncheck the constraints to which you want to apply the option. 16. Click Apply to confirm the operation and close the dialog box.

Dimension Style 17. Now, you are going to customize the Dimension Style. You can choose between three sizes: Small Medium Large Set the Scale option to Large. This defines the size of the symbols for tangency and parallelism constraints. 18. Check Displays iconified constraint elements. This option increases the number of graphic symbols you can see in the geometry area. For example, you can see symmetry axes. 19. Check Highlight pointed elements to make sure the application highlights the constrained elements when their constraints are pointed to. 20. Enter a value to define the gap between construction lines and geometric elements. For example, enter 5mm.

The gap is of 2mm by default.

The glyph previews the new gap.

21. Enter a value to define the overrun between construction lines and geometric elements. For example, enter 9mm The glyph previews the new overrun.

22. Click OK to confirm the operation and quit the Options dialog box.

Assembly Design

Setting the Update of Assembly Constraints

This task will show you how to define the update of Assembly constraints: You can set an automatic or a manual update. You can update only the active level of the active component or all the levels of the active component. 1. Select Tools -> Options.... The Options dialog box appears. 2. Click General to the left of the dialog box, then the General tab.

3. Check Automatic or Manual update. The manual option lets you decide when you need to update your design. 4. Check Stop update on first error to make sure the application stops the process as soon as an error has been detected. 5. Now still in the Options dialog box click Product to the left of the dialog box, then the Assembly tab. Two options for customizing update operations are available.

6. Check Active level or All the levels. All levels allows you to update all the constraints defined on all the levels of the active component.

Customizing Constraint Appearance

This task will show you how to set the appearance of constraints and dimensions. 1. Select Tools -> Options.... 2. Click General to the left of the dialog box, then the tab Symbols. This tab lets you set the Constraint Style, the Dimension Style and preview your settings in the Preview glyph. The Preview glyph displays your preferences as you are specifying them

Constraint Style 3. To set the colors where appropriate click the arrow of the constraint type combo box. You can define a personal color too. See CATIAInfrastructure User's Guide Version 5 for more information. 4. Click the Filter button to access the options of display.

The Constraints Filter dialog box contains all the constraints which can be defined for the geometry.

5. Check the constraints you wish to display and click OK to confirm. Dimension Style 6. Set the option you wish to define the size of the graphic symbols used for representing constraints. You can set: Small Medium Large 7. Check Displays iconified constraint elements. This option increases the number of graphic symbols you can see in the geometry area. For example, you can see symmetry axes.

8. Check Highlight pointed elements to make sure the application highlights constrained elements when their constraints are pointed to. 9. Enter a value to define the gap between construction lines and geometric elements. For example, enter 5mm. The gap is of 2mmm by default. The glyph previews the new gap.

10. Enter a value to define the overrun between construction lines and geometric elements. For example, enter 9mm The glyph previews the new overrun.

11. Click OK to confirm the operation and quit the dialog box.

Setting Paste Component Behavior

This task will show you how to set the paste component behavior. You can paste one or several components without the assembly constraints applying to them. You can paste one or several components with the assembly constraints applying to them, only after the Copy command. You can paste one or several components with the assembly constraints applying to them, only after the Cut command. You can paste one or several components always with the assembly constraints applying to them. 1. Select Tools -> Options.... 2. Click Product to the left of the dialog box, then the tab Assembly.

3. Check the desired behavior.

Displaying the Bounding Box

This task will show you how to display the Bounding Box. This box encloses the part to let you focus on it. 1. Select Tools -> Options... 2. Click Product to the left of the dialog box, then the tab Assembly.

3. Check Visible if you wish to use the bounding box. Remember, the bounding box is visible after double-clicking the component.

Setting Constraint Creation

This task will show you how to define the way of setting constraints. Either using all the geometrical elements or only published geometrical elements. For more information about publication, refer to Managing the Component Publication. 1. Select Tools -> Options... 2. Click Product to the left of the dialog box, then the tab Assembly.

3.To create constraints with published geometrical elements only, check Only use the published geometry.

Setting Warning Message Display

This task shows you how to control the display of a warning message that appears when moving components. 1. Select Tools -> Options... 2. Click Product to the left of the dialog box, then the tab Assembly. 3. If you want to see a message indicating that you are moving fixed together components, check the option Display warning. The message will appear whenever you will apply the following commands to fixed together components: compass snap translation or rotation manipulate

4. Click OK to confirm the operation and quit the dialog box.

Setting the Autoconstraint Command

The Autoconstraint mode is based on a ordered list of constraints to be created by the application. This task shows you how to reorder the list of constraints having priority when applying the autoconstraint mode to the selected geometrical elements. 1. Select Tools -> Options... 2. Click Product to the left of the dialog box, then the tab Assembly. 3. Select the constraint type you wish to reorder. 4. Click the arrows to the right of the selection to reorder the selected constraint.

Using the Cache Memory

The data cache directory defines the disk space used for the saving of conversions of models to cgr files. One or more data cache directories can be defined. This task shows you how to customize the cache memory settings. You can set the Cache Activation. You can define the Cache Location. You can define the Cache Size. You can use the Time Stamp. 1. Select Tools -> Options... The Options dialog box appears. 2. Click Product to the left of the dialog box, then the Cache Management tab.

3. Check the Work with the cache system option to activate the cache memory. If activated, the first time models are inserted, they will be converted to cgr files and saved in the data cache memory. V4 models will be loaded in your assembly in design mode. 4. Enter the path you need to locate the cache system. Click the Browse button to navigate through files and locate the file you want. The default directory is your home directory under UNIX and the USERPROFILE directory under Windows. 5. Repeat the previous procedure to locate the released cache memory.

6. Enter the maximum size for the cache memory. The unit is MB. 7. Set the Check timestamps option. If activated, this option checks the model's timestamp and if different from the timestamp of cgr files in the data cache, converts the model to cgr files. If timestamps are the same, no conversion is done and cgr files in the data cache are loaded. If deactivated, no check is run and cgr files in the data cache are systematically loaded. 8. Click Ok to confirm. Note that you need to exit and restart to see the effects of customization.

Defining the Default Part Number

This task will show you how to define the default part number for the component you need to import. You can define the Part Number through a manual input when you insert a new document. 1. Select Tools -> Options... 2. Click Product to the left of the dialog box, then the tab Product Structure.

3. Check Manual input if you wish to assign the name you wish to the component you insert into the assembly.

Setting the Representation

This task shows you how to set the representation appearance. 1. Select Tools -> Options... 2. Click Product to the left of the dialog box, then the Product Structure tab.

3. Check Only the representation in the specification tree to make sure the application displays the representation in the tree only, not in the geometry area. This option is valid when creating geometry.

Setting the Specification Tree

This task will show you how to customize the specification tree appearance. 1. Select Tools -> Options... 2. Click Product to the left of the dialog box, then the tab Product Structure.

3. Check the display options you need: Automatic Expand to display the tree totally expanded Constraints to display the constraints and dimensions defined in the document Parameters to display the parameters defined using the Formula command Relations to display the relations defined using the Formula command For more information about parameters and relations, refer to CATIA Knowledge Advisor User's Guide Version 5

Dynamic Sketcher

Customizing Constraints
This task shows you how to customize the display and style of the constraints defined in your document. 1. Select the Tools -> Options command. The Options dialog box is displayed. The tab available by default provides general options. 2. Click the Symbols tab. This tab lets you customize: Constraint Style Dimension Style

Constraint Style 3. To set the colors defining the status of the constraints, click the arrow in the appropriate constraint type combo box. For instance, you can define a new color for resolved constraints. A list appears containing the current color and the colors available by default. 4. Choose any of these colors.

5. If you prefer to customize colors, click the More Colors option at the bottom of the color list to access the color palette. The Color dialog box appears, allowing you to define the colors of your choice: In the Basic Colors area, the first sixteen colors (in the top two rows) are the same as those at the top of the previous list. The remaining four rows contain extra colors. The empty boxes below are reserved for your own custom colors.

6. Click Define Custom Colors to expand the Color dialog box. The full color palette and color customization tools are displayed. The colored area with the cross represents a color spectrum. 7. To define a new color, click anywhere in the colored area or drag the cross inside the spectrum to instantaneously change the color in the small box below the spectrum.

8. Use the slider to adjust your color. This makes the brightness of the custom color vary. The HSL (Hue, Saturation and Luminance) and RGB (Red, Green and Blue) values vary according to where the cross is located. You can also enter HSL and RGB values in the fields provided to suit your exact color specifications.

9. Once you are happy with the color, click the Add to Custom Colors option to add the custom color. 10. Click Apply to return to the original color palette.

11. Click on the custom color to apply it to the constraint type. 12. Now, to choose between the constraints you wish to see or not in the geometry area, click the Filter button. The dialog box that appears contains all of the constraints which can be defined for the geometry. 13. Check the Conditional Filter option. You can now specify how you wish to filter constraints in the Status Filter frame. Three options are available. 14. Check the Filter unverified constraints option. 15. Uncheck the constraints to which you want to apply the option. 16. Click Apply to confirm the operation and close the dialog box. Dimension Style 17. Now, you are going to customize the Dimension Style. You can choose between three sizes: Small Medium Large Set the Scale option to Large. This defines the size of the symbols for tangency and parallelism constraints. 18. Check Displays iconified constraint elements. This option increases the number of graphic symbols you can see in the geometry area. For example, you can see symmetry axes. 19. Check Highlight pointed elements to make sure the application highlights the constrained elements when their constraints are pointed to. 20. Enter a value to define the gap between construction lines and geometric elements. For example, enter 5mm. The gap is of 2mm by default. The glyph previews the new gap.

21. Enter a value to define the overrun between construction lines and geometric elements. For example, enter 9mm The glyph previews the new overrun.

22. Click OK to confirm the operation and quit the Options dialog box

Setting a Grid
The Sketcher grid will help you sketch your profile on some circumstances. For example, the grid will make it easier to sketch a profile requiring parallel lines. This task shows how to define a grid. 1. Select the Tools -> Options command to display the Options dialog box.

2. Click Part in the list of objects to the left of the Options dialog box. The Sketcher tab appears, containing four sets of options: Grid Sketch Plane (see Setting the Sketch Plane) Geometry (see Customizing Geometry Creation) Autodetection (see Customizing Autodetection)

3. To define your grid, enter the values of your choice in the Primary spacing and Graduations fields. The Primary spacing option lets you define the spacing between the major lines of the grid. The Graduations field lets you set the number of graduations between the major lines of the grid, which actually consists in defining a secondary grid. 4. Click the Display box to display the grid in your session. You will note that this capability is also available in the Sketcher Options toolbar.

5. Check the Snap to point option if your sketch needs to begin or end on the points of the grid.

6. Once you have chosen all of your options, click OK to confirm the operations. CATIA applies these options.

Setting the Sketch Plane

This task shows you the options provided by CATIA to customize the sketch plane. These capabilities prove quite helpful. 1. Select Tools -> Options... to display the Options dialog box.

2. Click Part in the list of objects to the left of the Options dialog box. The Sketcher tab appears, containing four sets of options: Grid (see Setting a Grid) Sketch Plane Geometry (see Customizing Geometry Creation) Autodetection (see Customizing Autodetection)

3. In the Sketch Plane frame, check the Shade sketch plane option. This lets you view the sketch plane in the Sketcher workbench. However, note that the grid must be displayed too to see the shaded plane.

The sketch plane is shaded in the Sketcher workbench.

4. Now, check Position sketch plane parallel to screen to make sure that each time you will enter the Sketcher workbench, the sketch plane will have the right position. 5. Once you have chosen all of your options, click OK to confirm the operation.

Customizing Geometry Creation

When sketching circles or ellipses, you may prefer not to create their centers. CATIA lets you decide what you really want to create. 1. Select the Tools -> Options... command.

2. Click Part in the list of objects to the left of the Options dialog box. The Sketcher tab appears, containing four sets of options: Grid (see Setting a Grid) Sketch Plane (see Setting the Sketch Plane) Geometry Autodetection (see Customizing Autodetection)

Geometry 3. By default, the Create circle and ellipse centers option is on. Just uncheck it if you do not need to create centers when sketching. 4. Click OK to confirm the operation and quit the dialog box.

Customizing Autodetection
As you create more and more elements, Autodetection detects multiple directions and positions, and more and more relationships with existing elements. This may lead to confusion due to the rapid highlighting of several different detection possibilities as you point the cursor at different elements in rapid succession. Consequently, you can decide to filter out undesired detections. This task shows how to do so: 1. Select Tools -> Options... 2. Click Part in the list of objects to the left of the Options dialog box.

The Sketcher tab appears, containing four categories of options: Grid (see Setting a Grid) Sketch Plane (see Setting the Sketch Plane) Geometry (see Customizing Geometry Creation) Autodetection The Autodetection category provides these options: Support lines and circles Alignment Parallelism, perpendicularity and tangency Horizontality and verticality 3. Uncheck the elements you do not wish to detect when sketching.

4. Note that you can create or not the constraints detected by the Autodetection tool. If all of the detection options are unchecked, the Create detected constraints option is not available.

5. Click OK to confirm the operation and quit the dialog box. Disabling Autodetection completely is particularly useful when your screen is full of elements: in this case, it may be a good idea to disable Autodetection to concentrate only on the geometry.

Interactive Drafting

Setting the Grid

The grid will help you create your profile on some circumstances. For example, the grid will make it easier to draw a profile requiring parallel lines. This task shows how to define a grid. 1. Select the Tools->Options command to display the Options dialog box. 2. Click Drafting in the list of objects to the left of the Options dialog box. Select the General tab, containing three sets of options: Ruler (see Customizing General Settings) Grid Rotation (see Customizing General Settings) Grid 3. To define your grid, enter the values of your choice in the Primary fields. The Primary spacing option lets you define the spacing between the major lines of the grid. The Graduations field lets you set the number of graduations between the major lines of the grid, which actually consists in defining a secondary grid. 4. Click the Display box to display the grid in your session. You will note that this capability is also available in the Interactive Drafting Options toolbar.

5. Check the Snap to point option if the geometry needs to begin or end on the points of the grid.

6. Once you have chosen all of your options, click OK to confirm the operations. CATIA applies these options.

Customizing Constraints
This task shows you how to customize constraints. 1. Select the Tools -> Options... command. 2. Click Drafting in the list of objects to the left of the Options dialog box. Select the Geometry tab appears, containing four sets of options: Geometry (see Customizing Geometry creation) Autodetection (see Customizing Autodetection) Constraints Creation Constraints Visualization Constraints Creation 2. Check this option to automatically create detected and feature-based constraints. Constraints Visualization 3. Check this option to visualize the logical constraints specific to the elements. 4. Modify the reference size if needed. 5. To set the constraints color, click the arrow in the combo box. 6. Choose any of these colors.

Note that if the Visualize constraints option is unchecked, the elements are not available. You can also access these two options from the Tools toolbar.

7.Click OK to confirm your operation and quit the dialog box.

Customizing Geometry Creation

When creating circles or ellipses, you may prefer not to create their centers. CATIA lets you decide what you really want to create. 1. Select the Tools -> Options... command. 2. Click Drafting in the list of objects to the left of the Options dialog box. Select the Geometry tab appears, containing four sets of options: Geometry Autodetection (see Customizing Autodetection) Constraints Creation (See Constraints Visualization Geometry By default, the create circle and ellipse centers option is on. 3.Just uncheck it if you do not need to create centers when drawing. 4. Click OK to confirm the operation and quit the dialog box.

Customizing General Settings

This task shows you how to set general settings to be used in the Interacive Drafting workbench. 1. Select the Tools -> Options... command. 2. Click Drafting in the list of objects to the left of the Options dialog box. 3. Click the General tab.

The Tab appears containing three categories of options: Ruler Grid (See Setting a Grid) Rotation

Ruler 4. Checking the ruler option displays the ruler in your sheet. It means you visualize the cursor coordinates as you are drawing. You can modify the ruler unit using

the drawing ruler dialog box : Rotation 5. Check the Rotation Snap Angle to define an angle for rotating elements. This option is used to rotate text elements (text,frame,or leader). Enter the desired angle and click OK to confirm your operation

Customizing Autodetection
As you create more and more elements, Autodetection detects multiple directions and positions, and more and more relationships with existing elements. This may lead to confusion due to the rapid highlighting of several different detection possibilities as you point the cursor at different elements in rapid succession. Consequently, you can decide to filter out undesired detections. This task shows how to do so. 1. Select Tools -> Options... . 2. Click Drafting in the list of objects to the left of the Options dialog box.

The Drafting tab appears, containing four categories of options: Geometry (see Customizing Geometry Creation) Autodetection Constraints Creation (see Customizing Constraints) Constraints Visualization (see Customizing Constraints) The Autodetection category provides these options: Support lines and circles Alignment Parallelism, perpendicularity and tangency Horizontality and verticality 3. Uncheck the elements you do not wish to detect when drawing. 4. Note that you can create or not the constraints detected by the Autodetection tool. 5. Click OK to confirm the operation and quit the dialog box. Disabling Autodetection completely is particularly useful when your screen is full of elements: in this case, it may be a good idea to disable Autodetection to concentrate only on the geometry.

Customizing Company Standard Management

This task shows you how to edit the list of the parameters values which impact the representaion of the texts and dimensions. 1. Enter install_root/reffiles/Drafting. 2. Enter one of the following files ISO.CatDrawStandard ANSI.CatDrawStandard JIS.CatDrawStandard

Generative Drafting

About Default Settings

This paragraph will give you information on how to set given parameters that will be used as default parameters. 1. Right-click the element or view whose parameters are to be set as default. 2. Select the Properties option from the displayed contextual menu. 3. Select the Graphic label from the Properties dialog box. 4. Activate the Set as default option from the dialog box

The Set as default option is applied to particular parameters, not to the whole default parameters. More precisely, the following parameters can be set as default: Sheet: format and scale View: HLR, scale and rotation Dimension: length, distance, angle or radius Text: style

Customizing General Settings

This task shows you how to set general settings to be used in the Interacive Drafting workbench. 1. Select the Tools -> Options... command. 2. Click Drafting in the list of objects to the left of the Options dialog box. 3. Click the General tab.

The Tab appears containing three categories of options: Ruler Grid (See Setting a Grid) Rotation

Ruler 4. Checking the ruler option displays the ruler in your sheet. It means you visualize the cursor coordinates as you are drawing. You can modify the ruler unit using

the drawing ruler dialog box : Rotation 5. Check the Rotation Snap Angle to define an angle for rotating elements. This option is used to rotate text elements (text,frame,or leader). Enter the desired angle and click OK to confirm your operation

Customizing Dimension Generation

This task will show how to control the dimension generation whenever you need to update sheets. 1. Select the Tools -> Options command to display the Options dialog box. 2. Click Drafting in the list of objects to the left of the Options dialog box. The Generation tab appears, containing three sets of options: View Creation,Geometry Generation, Dimension Generation..

3. Check the Generate dimensions when updating the sheet option. Once activated, this option makes the application automatically generate dimensions each time you update the sheet. 4. Click OK to confirm the operation.

Customizing View Creation

This task will show you how to determine the elements you wish to generate when creating a view. 1. Select the Tools -> Options command to display the Options dialog box. 2. Click Drafting in the list of objects to the left of the Options dialog box. The Drafting tab appears, containing four sets of options: Dimension Generation View Creation Grid Autodetection 3. The application provides three options to customize the View creation. The first option deals with projection modes. Checking the Create projection views using first angle standard option allows you to locate the left view on the right. Checking the Create projection views using third angle standard option allows to locate the left view on the left. 4. The other options, that is View name, and Scaling factor are activated by default, meaning that these elements are automatically generated by the application when creating views. Just uncheck these options if you do not need these elements. 5. Click OK to confirm the operation.

Setting the Grid

The grid will help you create your profile on some circumstances. For example, the grid will make it easier to draw a profile requiring parallel lines. This task shows how to define a grid. 1. Select the Tools->Options command to display the Options dialog box. 2. Click Drafting in the list of objects to the left of the Options dialog box. Select the General tab, containing three sets of options: Ruler (see Customizing General Settings) Grid Rotation (see Customizing General Settings) Grid 3. To define your grid, enter the values of your choice in the Primary fields. The Primary spacing option lets you define the spacing between the major lines of the grid. The Graduations field lets you set the number of graduations between the major lines of the grid, which actually consists in defining a secondary grid. 4. Click the Display box to display the grid in your session. You will note that this capability is also available via the Interactive Drafting Options toolbar.

5. Check the Snap to point option if the geometry needs to begin or end on the points of the grid.

6. Once you have chosen all of your options, click OK to confirm the operations. CATIA applies these options.

Customizing Autodetection
As you create more and more elements, Autodetection detects multiple directions and positions, and more and more relationships with existing elements. This may lead to confusion due to the rapid highlighting of several different detection possibilities as you point the cursor at different elements in rapid succession. Consequently, you can decide to filter out undesired detections. This task shows how to do so: 1. Select Tools -> Options... 2. Click Drafting in the list of objects to the left of the Options dialog box.

The Drafting tab appears, containing four categories of options: Geometry (see Customizing Geometry Creation) Autodetection Constraints Creation (see Customizing Constraints) Constraints visualization (see Customizing Constraints) The Autodetection category provides these options: Support lines and circles Alignment Parallelism, perpendicularity and tangency Horizontality and verticality 3. Uncheck the elements you do not wish to detect when drawing 4. Note that you can create or not the constraints detected by the Autodetection tool. 5. Click OK to confirm the operation and quit the dialog box. Disabling Autodetection completely is particularly useful when your screen is full of elements: in this case, it may be a good idea to disable Autodetection to concentrate only on the geometry.

Customizing Constraints
This task shows you how to customize constraints. 1. Select the Tools -> Options... command. 2. Click Drafting in the list of objects to the left of the Options dialog box. Select the Geometry tab appears, containing four sets of options: Geometry (see Customizing Geometry creation) Autodetection (see Customizing Autodetection) Constraints Creation Constraints Visualization Constraints Creation 3. Check this option to automatically create detected and feature-based constraints. Constraints Visualization 4. Check this option to visualize the logical constraints specific to the elements. 5. Modify the reference size if needed. 6. To set the constraints color, click the arrow in the combo box. 7. Choose any of these colors.

Note that if the Visualize constraints option is unchecked, the elements are not available. You can also access these two options from the Tools toolbar.

8. Click OK to confirm your operation and quit the dialog box.

Customizing Geometry Creation

When creating circles or ellipses, you may prefer not to create their centers. CATIA lets you decide what you really want to create. 1. Select the Tools -> Options... command. 2. Click Drafting in the list of objects to the left of the Options dialog box. Select the Geometry tab appears, containing four sets of options: Geometry Autodetection (see Customizing Autodetection) Constraints Creation (See Constraints Visualization By default, the create circle and ellipse centers option is on. Geometry 3. Just uncheck it if you do not need to create centers when drawing. 4. Click OK to confirm the operation and quit the dialog box.

Customizing the Drawing Background Color

This task is accomplished in one minute. This task will show you how to modify the drawing background color. 1. Select the Tools -> Options command to display the Options dialog box. 2. Click Drafting in the list of objects to the left of the Options dialog box. 3. Click the General tab. The Options dialog box appears. As shown opposite, you can customize the color type. 4. Click OK to confirm the operation.

This is what you get if you do as detailed above:

You can modify the background colors at any time.

Viewing FreeStyle Shaper Elements

This task explains how to display FreeStyle Shaper and FreeStyle Optimizer elements in the specification tree. Open any document from the Samples/freestyle directory. 1. Select the Tools -> Options command. The Options dialog box is displayed. 2. Click Part in the list of objects to the left of the Options dialog box, then click the Display tab. This tab lets you decide what should be displayed in the specification tree. 3. Activate the Reference elements to visualize all type of elements created using the FreeStyle Shaper and FreeStyle Optimizer

4. Click OK to confirm setting these options.

DMU Navigator

Customizing DMU Navigator Settings

This task explains how to customize DMU Navigator settings. A DMU Navigator document 1. Select the Tools->Options... command. The Options dialog box appears

2. Click Product in the left-hand box 3. Click the DMU Navigator tab

The DMU Navigator tab lets you customize: The appearance of the hyperlink cue Measurement display: number of decimal places after the decimal point for length, angle, area and volume measurements Automatic display of preview windows 4. Set Hyperlink Representation to Symbol, Name or both: ). By default, all hyperlink cues are graphical ( If you click the Name checkbox, all hyperlink cues will be textual. The name you give the link in the Manage Hyperlink dialog box when you create it will appear. You can add hyperlinks to your document and then use them to jump to a variety of locations, for example, to a marketing presentation, a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet or a HTML page on the intranet. 5. To set the default measurement display, enter the number of decimal places you want to see displayed after the decimal point; for example for length measurements, enter 4 to display 20.4235 6. Repeat the above for angle, area and volume measurements 7. Click preview checkboxes as appropriate to change the automatic display setting of preview windows when creating cameras, manipulating objects, etc. By default, preview windows are automatically displayed. 8. Click OK in the dialog box when done.

Customizing Data Cache Settings

The data cache directory (CATCache) defines the disk space used for the saving of conversions of models to cgr files. One or more data cache directories can be defined. If you work with the cache system on, when you re-access the saved model in a subsequent session, the application will use the entry in the data cache, thereby reducing access time. This task explains how to customize data cache settings A DMU Navigator document 1. Select the Tools->Options... command. The Options dialog box appears

2. Click Product in the left-hand box 3. Click the Cache Management tab

4. Turn the cache activation mode on or off: Work with the cache system box checked: the data cache is active and any cgr files in the directories currently listed in the cache location will be accessed. The local data cache is browsed first before the released data cache locations. The first time models are inserted, they will be converted to cgr files and saved in the data cache. By default, the activation mode is set to on. Work with the cache system box unchecked: the data cache is inactive. Cgr files in the data cache will not be accessed and models will be converted each time they are inserted. 5. (Optional) Enter the paths identifying the cache locations: Browse buttons let you locate the file you want. The user can enter the path to his own local cache location as well as one or more paths to released cache locations. The default directory is the user's home directory under UNIX and the USERPROFILE directory under Windows. 6. (Optional) Set the maximum size for the cache The default size is 10 MB. 7. (Optional) Set the Check timestamp option: The Check timestamp option, if clicked, checks the model's timestamp and if different from the timestamp of cgr files in the data cache, converts the model to cgr files. If timestamps are the same, no conversion is done and cgr files in the data cache are loaded. Turning this option off means that no check is run and cgr files in the data cache are systematically loaded. 8. Note that you need to exit and restart to see the effects of customization, so click OK to confirm.

Loading the Product Structure Only

You can load the product structure only without associated 3D representations and then specify which 3D representations to insert. This task explains how to load the product structure without the associated 3D representations.

An empty DMU Navigator document 1. Select the Tools->Options... command. The Options dialog box appears 2. Click Product in the left-hand box 3. Click the ProductStructure tab

4. Click No representation activated to load the product structure only 5. Click OK to confirm. When inserting components, only the product structure will be loaded. You can then specify which 3D representations you want to be activated by right-clicking the desired item in the specification tree and selecting Representation -> Activate from the contextual menu.

Customizing the Ground

A reference plane serves to locate the ground when navigating. You can fix the X, Y or Z axis (axis perpendicular to the ground) during navigation.While turning in Fly mode, this creates the impression that the user viewpoint tilts or banks with respect to the fixed axis, as in a real plane. This task explains how to customize the ground. A DMU Navigator document 1. Select the Tools->Options... command. The Options dialog box appears 2. Click the Visualization tab

3. Click the Gravitational effects during navigation checkbox to activate this option 4. Click X, Y or Z to fix the axis perpendicular to the reference plane. While turning in Fly mode, this creates the impression that the user viewpoint tilts or banks with respect to the fixed axis, as in a real plane. Note: The z-axis is the default axis. The ground corresponds to the xy reference plane. 5. Click OK to confirm.

Customizing External Format Import

You can now easily import a CAD part which is not directly supported by DMU Navigator. DMU Navigator runs a background converter that will output one of the following formats: cgr; pdb (Deneb part) vrml stl. The CAD part files you want to import must have the .prt extension (.asm for Assemblies). You can import various types of CAD Parts into a CATProduct. For more details please refer to the DMU Navigator User's Guide. This task explains how to customize the import settings. You imported a CAD Part through the Insert ->Existing Component command. 1. Select the Tools->Options... command. The Options dialog box appears 2. Click Product in the left-hand box . 3. Click the External Formats tab. The corresponding Part Import box, (depending on the configuration) displays below the Standard Formats Import box.

4. Modify the settings as desired. 5. Click OK to confirm your operation.

DMU Space Analysis

Customizing DMU Navigator Settings

This task explains how to customize DMU Navigator settings. 1. Select Tools -> Options from the menu bar: The Options dialog box appears 2. Click Product in the left-hand box 3. Click the DMU Navigator tab

The DMU Navigator tab lets you customize: Measurement display: number of decimal places after the decimal point for length, angle, area and volume measurements Automatic display of preview windows. 4. To set the default measurement display, enter the number of decimal places you want to see displayed after the decimal point; for example for length measurements, enter 4 to display 20.4235 5. Repeat the above for angle, area and volume measurements. 6. Click preview checkboxes as appropriate to change the automatic display setting of preview windows during interference analyses, distance measurements and sectioning, etc. By default, preview windows are automatically displayed. 7. Click OK in the dialog box when done

Customizing DMU Sectioning Settings

This task explains how to customize sectioning settings. 1. Select Tools -> Options from the menu bar: The Options dialog box appears 2. Click Product in the left-hand box 3. Click the DMU Sectioning tab

The DMU Sectioning tab lets you customize: Section plane settings Section grid settings Display of the results window 4. Set default section plane settings: Normal X,Y,Z: specifies the absolute axis along which you want to orient the normal vector of the section plane (master plane in the case of slices and boxes) Origin: locates the center of the plane at absolute coordinates 0,0,0 or at the center of the bounding sphere around the products in the selection you defined 5. Set default grid options: Absolute mode: sets grid coordinates with respect to the absolute axis system of the document Relative mode: places the center of the grid on the center of the section plane (master plane in the case of slices and boxes) Style: sets the grid representation to lines or crosses Automatic filtering: if clicked, automatically adjusts the level of detail of the grid display when you zoom in and out Steps: specifies the spacing between grid lines. The default value is 100. Units are current units set using Tools -> Options. 6. Click results window checkboxes as desired to: Automatically display a results window Always display the 2D view in the results window 7. Click OK in the dialog box when done

Customizing DMU Clash Settings

This task explains how to customize the clash settings of the Clash command. 1. Select Tools -> Options from the menu bar: The Options dialog box appears 2. Click Product in the left-hand box 3. Click the DMU Clash tab

The DMU Clash tab lets you customize: Information retrieval for comparison purposes Display of the results window Display in the results box Default computation type and clearance value Detailed computation mode

4. Click one of the retrieve information options to compare current clash results with: Previous clash computation results Results stored in VPM No comparison (default setting) 5. Click the Automatically open checkbox to display a results window automatically 6. Set the default display in the Results box of the Check Clash dialog box: Click List by conflict or List by product to display List by Conflict or List by Product tabs as desired. By default, the List by conflict tab is displayed. By default, the first line is automatically selected in the List by Conflict or List by Product tab. Click the First line automatically selected checkbox to de-activate this option. 7. Set the default computation type in the drop-down list and, if necessary, the default clearance value 8. Set the detailed computation mode to: Triangles, curves and penetration depth or minimum distance Curves and penetration depth or minimum distance Penetration depth or minimum distance No detailed computation The detailed computation mode defines what is computed when you select a conflict or product in the Results box. Element analysis in Detailed Results and Visualization boxes is only available if you select one of the first two options. Note: The graphics display and storage of the triangular representation is costly and may adversely affect performance. 9. Click OK in the dialog box when done

Managing an Alternate Shape

This task will show you how to manage representations as alternate shapes automatically. 1. Select the Tools->Options... command. The Options dialog box appears 2. Click Product in the left-hand box 3. Click the DMU Optimizer tab

3. Select the required representation, for example Offset. 4. Customize the representation settings as required: Manage as alternate shape : if activated, you manage automatically your result as a new representation Activate Shape : if activated the Offset representation is the one visualized in the session. Default Shape : if activated the Default shape is the one loaded when opening the product 5. Click Ok to confirm your operation After a new offset calculation, if you right-click the product and select Manage representations, the Manage representation dialog box is automatically updated with the offset representation.

Plant Layout
This task explains how to specify which Plant Layout elements are displayed in the specification tree. 1. From the menu bar, select Tools -> Options.

The Options dialog box is displayed. 2. Select the Product catetory from the left column of the dialog box.

3. Select the Plant Layout tab.

4. Change the settings as desired: To change the grid step, select the input field and key in a new value. For all other options, select the button next to an element to include it in or exclude it from the specification tree. In the example above, Contours and Grid Planes have not been selected, so these elements would not be displayed in the specification tree. 5. Click OK to accept the new settings.

V4 Integration

Customizing IGES Settings

This task shows you how to customize IGES settings.

1. Select the Tools->Options... command. 2. Select the Part category in the left-hand column and click the IGES tab.

In the EXPORT section you will see that you can choose from several options: The default Standard option and the BSpline option allow you to select which curve and surface types you want to be generated. If you leave the default Standard option selected the curve and surface types created in the Part are kept as is. If you select the BSpline option (which was also available in V4) all curves and surfaces are converted into B-splines. The default Surface option and the Wireframe option allow you to select the representation mode. If you select Surface (which is also used in V4) solid decomposition will be identical in both the original model and the resulting file. Only the surfacic decomposition of the original model is stored. Wireframe is a new option in CATIA Version 5 and should be used if you want 3D visualization of solid edges to be identical in both the original model and the resulting file. Only the wireframe decomposition of the original model is stored.This may be useful in cases where curves are the only form of input accepted. You may wish to round digits up or down to 7, 8, 9 or 10 digits. If so, check the Round up/down real number option and use the Number of digits list provided.

If you are happy with the settings you have selected and do not want the Save as igs dialog box to appear the next time you save (for more information refer to "Exporting CATPart Data to an IGES File" in the CATIA - V4 Integration User's Guide), check the Do not show dialog box option. 3. Click OK.

Customizing Enovia/CDMA Settings on UNIX Only

This task shows you how to set the automatic highlight for the identification of models in a PSN graph from a CATIA Version 5 session and vice-versa. 1. Select the Tools->Options... command. When it appears, select the Product category in the list on the left. 2. Click the Enovia/CDMA tab.

3. Check the box indicated by the arrow above. Now, whenever you select one or more models in a PSN graph they are automatically highlighted in the CATIA V5 session. When selected in a CATIA V5 session they are automatically highlighted in the corresponding PSN graph.

What You Need Before Installing CATIA Version 5

Hardware Requirements
Common Hardware Requirements
The following requirements are common to all operating systems supported by CATIA Version 5 Release 3. System unit and graphic requirements are platform specific and are detailed in the topics that follow. Disk drive: an internal or external disk drive is required to store program executables, program data, usage environment and paging space (minimum recommended size : 2 GB). 128 MB of main memory is the minimum required. 256 MB of main memory is required for a productive environment. Requirements may be greater when large amount of data are used. CD-ROM drive is required for program installation and access to the online documentation, which can optionally be downloaded to disk. A graphic color display, compatible with selected graphic adapter (minimum recommended size for usability reasons is 17 inches; 800x600 minimum resolution required on Windows workstations; 1280x1024 minimum resolution required on UNIX workstations). When selecting a graphic adapter, hardware texturing capability is strongly recommended when using CATIA Version 5 products that use texture mapping, in which case the amount of RAM has to be adequate for the number and complexity of textures to be used. Keyboard: a specific keyboard compatible with selected installation locale may be required for NLS support. Pointing device: 3-button mouse. On Windows 95, Windows 98 or Windows NT workstations, a 2-button mouse may alternatively be used (the third button is emulated with a keyboard sequence). The 3-button mouse is recommended for usability reasons. Optional components and features: SpaceBall and SpaceMouse can be used, in addition to the mouse, to perform graphic manipulations (zoom, pan, rotate, etc.); necessary drivers are delivered with the device. In addition to CATIA P2 Products, this support also available with following products: CATIA - DMU NAVIGATOR 1 (DN1) CATIA - DMU SPACE ANALYSIS (SP1) The robustness of the overall solution is dependant on the robustness of the operating system and the hardware environment used. Windows NT and UNIX hardware configurations certified by Dassault Systemes for running CATIA Navigator products are published at:

http://www.catia.com Although CATIA Navigator products might run on other configurations or other graphic adapters, incidents specific to these configurations or adapters would not be accepted for support.

Windows 95 or Windows 98
Important: Windows 95 and Windows 98 apply only to CATIA Platform 1 (P1). Windows 95 and Windows 98 clients can run only with Windows NT or UNIX license servers. System Unit Intel Pentium II or Pentium III-based workstations running Microsoft Windows 95 OSR2 or Windows 98 (P1 solutions only). Graphic Adapter An OpenGL-capable graphic adapter is required. Note that graphic performance on local transformations (panning, zooming, rotating model) will depend on the selected graphic adapter. This graphic adapter should have the following capabilities : 16 bits, high color, double buffered visual 16 bits Z-buffer (when hardware accelerated) Stencil buffer (1 bit) minimum supported resolution is 800x600; a resolution of 1280x1024 is recommended for usability reasons hardware texturing capabilities are strongly recommended when using CATIA Version 5 Release 3 products allowing texture mapping, in which case the amount of texture RAM has to be adequate with the numbers and complexity of textures to be used. Tested Graphic Adapters on Windows 95 or Windows 98 Whereas Dassault Systemes has certified complete configurations (workstation model and graphic adapter) for CATIA Version 5 running on Windows NT. Only generic graphic adapters that have been tested on Windows 95 and Windows 98 will be documented. The updated list of these adapters is published on the CATIA V5 web site: http://www.catia.com

Windows NT
System Unit Pentium II or Pentium III-based workstations running Microsoft Windows NT Workstation version 4.0. Note: Beginning with Release 3, CATIA Version 5 will no longer support Windows NT on DEC Alpha Personal Workstations. Graphic Adapter A graphic adapter with a 3D OpenGL accelerator is required. Note that graphic performance on viewing functions (panning, zooming, rotating) will depend on the selected graphic adapter. The graphic adapter should have the following capabilities: 24 bits, true color, double buffered visual 24 bits Z-buffer stencil buffer minimum supported resolution: 800x600; a resolution of 1280x1024 is recommended for usability reasons . Network Adapter

An active LAN adapter (Ethernet or Token Ring, installed and configured) is required
for licensing purposes. Supported Configurations An updated list of hardware configurations, certified at Dassault Systmes for running CATIA Version 5 products, is published on the CATIA V5 Web site at URL: http://www.catia.com/nt.html

IBM AIX
System Unit Any RS/6000, based on PowerPC 604 (166 MHz minimum clock speed), Power2 or Power3 processor families, supported on AIX Version 4 Release 3.0, 3.1 or 3.2 provided that requirements described below are met. Graphic Adapter

One of the following graphic adapters is required: GXT500P GXT550P GXT800P GXT800M GXT2000P GXT3000P

HP-UX
System Unit Any B-Class or C-Class or J-Class workstation supported on HP-UX Version 10.20 A.C.E. 4 (Workstation Additional Core Enhancements for HP-UX 10.20 - July 1997) provided that the requirements described below are met. Graphic Adapter One of the following graphic adapters is required: Visualize-FX2 Visualize-FX4 Visualize-FX6

SGI IRIX
System Unit Any O2, Indigo2, Octane or Onyx2 workstations based on R5000, R10000 or R12000 processors, supported on IRIX 6.5, provided that requirements described below are met. Graphic Adapter One of the following graphic adapters is required: Integrated graphic adapters on O2 workstations Solid Impact, or SI/SE Super Solid Impact, or SSI/SSE High Impact Maximum Impact. or MXI/MXE InfiniteReality

Sun Solaris
System Unit Any Ultra1, Ultra2, Ultra10, Ultra30 or Ultra60 workstation based on UltraSPARC processor, supported on Solaris 2.6.0 or Solaris 7, provided that requirements described below are met. Graphic Adapter One of the following graphic adapters is required: Creator3D Creator3D Series III Elite 3D Model M3 (Ultra10-440 Mhz workstations only) Elite 3D Model M3 and M6 (Ultra60 workstations).

Basic Software Requirements

Common Software Requirements
Refer to the Program Directory or contact your IBM Support Center, for appropriate corrective service to apply to the software described in the topics that follow. Windows 95 or Windows 98 (CATIA P1 products only) Note: The Windows 95 and Windows 98 environments apply only to CATIA Platform 1 (P1). Windows 95 and Windows 98 clients can run only with Windows NT or UNIX license servers. The following components at the minimum indicated level are required: Microsoft Windows 95 OSR2, or Windows 98, with the following components: A Microsoft implementation of OpenGL libraries is delivered with Windows 95 OSR2 or Windows 98; these libraries may be updated depending on selected graphic adapter, when installing the graphic adapter and associated drivers. Dassault Systmes will provide recommendations related to driver levels based on tested graphic adapters through the CATIA V5 Web site at URL: http://www.catia.com/ A localized version of the operating system may be required when the selected installation locale differs from Latin1. CATIA P2 products do not operate on Windows95 or Windows98.

Windows NT
The following components at the minimum indicated level are required: Microsoft Windows NT Workstation Version 4.0 at Pack 4 Service level, with the following components: Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 delivers an implementation of OpenGL libraries; these libraries may be updated depending on the selected graphic adapter, when installing the graphic adapter and associated drivers. Dassault Systmes will provide recommendations related to driver levels based on certified configurations through the CATIA V5 Web site at URL: http://www.catia.com/ a localized version of the operating system may be required when the selected installation locale differs from Latin1 (for example, for the Japanese language environment) Microsoft Windows NT Terminal Server is not supported.

IBM AIX
The following components at the minimum indicated level are required: AIX Version 4 Release 3.0, 3.1 or 3.2, including: IBM C++ for AIX Compiler Application Runtime (5648-A81) at minimum level 3.6.4. C++ Runtime is shipped with the AIX Operating System. IBM XL Fortran Runtime Environment for AIX (5765-C11), at minimum level 5.1.0 OpenGL and GL3.2 Runtime Environment (delivered with AIX 4.3 operating systems).

HP-UX
The following components at the minimum indicated level are required: HP-UX Version 10.20 A.C.E. 4 (Workstation Additional Core Enhancements for HP-UX 10.20 - July 1999), including: ANSI C++ Runtime Environment (aC++, delivered with HP-UX 10.20 A.C.E. 4) HP FORTRAN Runtime Environment (delivered with the operating system) HP-UX 700 OpenGL 3D API Runtime Environment A localized version of the operating system may be required when the selected installation locale differs from ISO code pages.

SGI IRIX
The following components at the minimum indicated level are required: IRIX 6.5.2m, including: C, C++ and Fortran77 standard execution environment (delivered with the operating system) OpenGL (delivered with IRIX execution environment) WorldView is required when the selected installation locale differs from ISO-1.

Sun Solaris

The following components at the minimum indicated level are required: Sun Solaris 2.6.0 or Solaris 7, including: C and C++ runtime environment (delivered with the operating system) OpenGL runtime environment (delivered with the operating system) the Fortran runtime environment is delivered with CATIA Version 5 a localized version may be required when the selected installation locale differs from ISO-1.

Additional Software Requirements

Specific Software Requirements CATIA - V4 INTEGRATION 2 (V4I) Requires, on the CATIA Version 5 client, for interoperability with CATIA Version 4 CDM and ENOVIAVPM 1, either (depending whether the database server is a IBM DB2 or an ORACLE server): IBM DB2 Universal Database Version 5.2 (for AIX, HP-UX, IRIX or Solaris clients) ORACLE Version 8.0.4 (for AIX, HP-UX, Solaris clients); ORACLE Version 8.0.5 (for IRIX clients) CATIA Version 4 CDM and ENOVIAVPM 1 interoperability is available through CATIA - V4 INTEGRATION 2 (V4I), for following products: CATIA - ASSEMBLY DESIGN 2 (ASD) CATIA - DMU KINEMATICS SIMULATOR 2 (KIN)

Access to Online Documentation

Online documentation and User GALAXY (online product marketing information) are delivered in HTML format. An HTML browser is required to access this documentation: In a UNIX environment (AIX, HP-UX, IRIX, Solaris): AIX, HP-UX, IRIX, Solaris: Netscape Navigator at minimum level 4.5 In a Windows environment (Windows 95, Windows 98 or Windows NT), either: Microsoft Internet Explorer (delivered with Windows NT 4.0), at minimum level 4.01, Service Pack 1 or, Netscape Navigator at minimum level 4.5. PDF documentation (Portable Document Format) is delivered in addition to HTML documentation. Printing and browsing of this documentation requires Adobe Acrobat Reader at minimum level 3.0. Adobe Acrobat Reader Version 3.0 may be downloaded from:
http://www.adobe.com/prodindex/acrobat/readstep.html)

Although access to the online documentation might work on other HTML browsers, incidents specific to other browsers than the above- mentioned products are not eligible for support.

Licensing
Windows NT workstations must have a LAN Card (Ethernet or Token Ring) and TCP/IP installed and properly configured, even in the case of nodelock licensing, but there is no need to have the workstations connected to the network. No additional software is required when accessing nodelock licenses on Windows NT. IBM License Use Management 4.5.5 (LUM) is required, on UNIX and Microsoft Windows95, Windows98 and Windows NT platforms, to access concurrent licenses across a network. IBM License Use Management may be obtained, at no charge, from: ftp://ftp.software.ibm.com/software/lum For Windows 95 and Windows 98 clients, the license server must be a UNIX or Windows NT server. IBM License Use Management High-Availability Licensing (HAL) enables you to set up an environment in which there is a very high degree of certainty that concurrent licenses will be available, even if a network license server goes down. When you use this option, you create a cluster of network license servers. A cluster is a group of from 3 to 12 network license servers that jointly serve vendor-managed concurrent licenses that are enrolled on the cluster rather than on an individual server. If you decide not to use HAL, when the server goes down, your CATIA session remains active and another license is requested from another license server. If the license is granted, the total number of licenses granted is increased by one. With HAL, if the license is granted, the total numbers of licenses granted stays the same. For more information about High-Availability Licensing, refer to the LUM documentation: "Using License Use Management Runtime" for your platform. If you install CATIA on a computer running Microsoft Windows NT Server, Terminal Server Edition Version 4.0 SP4, you can configure your computer as a Microsoft Terminal Server Client. This will allow you to run CATIA on the Terminal Server, but export the display of the CATIA session to your local computer (much the same way as when exporting a display on UNIX). When you use this feature, a network license is used.

Macro Replay Capabilities

In a Windows 95, Windows 98 or Windows NT environment, Visual Basic Script (VB Script), at minimum level 3.1 is required for Macro replay capabilities. VB Script libraries at level 3.1.0.2124 are delivered with Internet Explorer 4.01 SP1.

Printer and Plotter Support

Windows 95, Windows 98 or Windows NT Support of Printers and plotters on Windows NT is performed through the availability, for the targeted printers/plotters, of the corresponding vendors' drivers, compatible with Windows NT 4.0. Please contact the appropriate printer/plotter vendor for support. UNIX CATIA Version 5 Release 3 provides support for the following main plotter/printer languages: CalComp C907 CGM-ISO, ATA, CALS Hewlett Packard HP-GL/2-RTL and HP-GL or IBM-GL subsets OCE Graphics GPR50: VDF plotting routines Versatec: VCGL: Versatec Graphics Software VGS 2.0 VRF: Versatec Graphics Software, VGS 2.0 Postscript.

CATIA Version 5 Software Requirements

The CATIA Version 5 range is composed of three sets of solutions, two of which are available at Version 5 Release 3: CATIA P1 and CATIA P2. As a principle, a CATIA P1 product or a CATIA P1 configuration will pre-require or include (case of configurations) the P1 products can be used on P2, and in such cases they operate with the CATIA OBJECT MANAGER 2 (COM) product. As a principle, a CATIA P2 product or a CATIA P2 configuration will pre-require or include (case of configurations) the CATIA - OBJECT MANAGER 2 (COM) product. In addition: The CATIA - FreeStyle Optimizer 2 (FSO) product prerequires the CATIA FreeStyle Shaper 2 (FSS) product

The CATIA - Generative Assembly Structural Analysis 2 (GAS) product pre-requires the CATIA - GENERATIVE PART STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS 2 (GPS) product The CATIA - CIRCUIT BOARD DESIGN 2 (CBD) product prerequires the CATIA - Part Design 2 (PDG) product CATIA Interactive Drafting 1 (ID1) is required for CATIA-CADAM Interface 1 (CC1) CADAM Drafting for V5 prerequires any configuration which includes CATIA Interactive Drafting 1 (ID1). CATIA DMU Optimizer 2 (DMO) prerequires CATIA DMU Navigator 2 (DMN).

ClearCoat Technology on SGI

Support for ClearCoat Technology on SGI UNIX/NT Workstations ClearCoat technology (SGI only) is supported for more realistic shading effects. This technology reproduces the reflective nature of glossy materials such as paint, plastic and glass.This life-like rendering technology improves greatly the fidelity of styling reviews. You can access this new technology on SGI Unix/NT workstations by downloading the dso/dll library from the following site:
http://www.sgi.com/manufacturing/partners/catia

This library must be installed in the CATIA filetree containing runtime code (...code/bin). Once the ClearCoat software is installed, the environment mapping textures applied in CATIA will be modified in a way to produce the ClearCoat effects.

How Are CATIA Version 5 Products Packaged?

The CATIA Version 5 product packaging model is based on the concepts of configurations and products.

Configurations
Configurations are a convenient and attractive way for you to order and install the adequate combination of products for each type of user, while offering a single solution from a licensing point of view. There are two types of configurations: standard configurations contain a pre-defined list of products, corresponding to most frequent user profiles across industries and processes. These configurations are offered at an attractive price compared to the sum of the individual product prices. the content of custom configurations is dynamically defined at ordering time, thus allowing you to adapt the configuration content to the most specific user needs. The content of a custom configuration is defined by adding individual products (see product delivered as "add-on" below) to an existing standard configuration. The result is a competitively priced solution, and remains a single solution from a licensing point of view. After initial installation, the configuration mechanism lets you manage the evolution and growth of your user profile content by allowing you to add new products. The resulting new seat definition is still a single solution from a licensing point of view. To be able to use CATIA V5R3, you need to purchase and acquire at least one configuration license. If you already have a custom configuration, you can extend it by adding products. But before you do so, you must use LUM to migrate your server license database to support custom configuration growth. To do so: stop your LUM license server migrate your server license database to the new format using the command: i4ccmig then import your new license as usual.

Products
Products are the elementary software building blocks for CATIA Version 5 installations> CATIA Version 5 may be ordered in three ways: As a standard configuration As an "add-on" product on top of a standard configuration to build a custom configuration. As a "shareable" product. In this case the product is delivered with its own license key, allowing the user to obtain the license at the beginning of his session, or to leave it for another user. Prices of products ordered in this mode are different, versus "add-on" price, to take into account multiple users potential.

More About the Licensing Mechanism

CATIA Version 5 delivers identical licensing mechanisms on UNIX and Windows NT environments, based on LUM (License Use Management). The following licensing principles apply: Using a given CATIA Version 5 product requires a license for it and for its prerequisite products Using a given CATIA Version 5 configuration requires a license for it. Licenses for CATIA Version 5 configurations are acquired and released for the total configuration. The products within a configuration cannot be shared. In all cases, licenses are acquired at the beginning of the process, and released at its termination. CATIA Version 5 can be used in two licensing modes: nodelock or with concurrent usage of licenses on a network. On Microsoft Windows 95 OSR2 or Windows 98 LUM network licensing (on a UNIX or Windows NT server) is the only licensing mechanism supported.

Nodelock Licensing
The use of local display of the hardware configuration is mandatory for CATIA Version usage in nodelock mode. There is no limit to the number of CATIA Version 5 processes launched for a given license (product or configuration). For instance, a user can launch the following simultaneous processes: a Version 5 interactive session a Version 5 process executed through an OLE container application replay of macros recorded from captured sequences of Version 5 user interactions.

Concurrent Licensing

A user on one machine, using one display, uses one license per product used, regardless of the number of processes. If the display changes, then an additional license is taken for the corresponding process. CATIA add-on and shareable products require a license for a configuration which includes at least the prerequisite products. Licenses for CATIA configurations are acquired and released for the total configuration. The functions within a configuration cannot be shared.

Demo Usage
In addition to its normal mode of operation where all licensed functions are accessed, CATIA Version 5 is capable of running in demo mode, on UNIX and NT, with some disabled functions (such as File->Save - see list below): Existing V5 customers, who have a minimum of one regular license, can switch from standard mode to demo mode (Tools ->Options - Licensing tab). As the user restarts CATIA, the demo mode will be automatically used. Qualified prospects, who may be given the CATIA code for evaluation purposes are required to enter a special demo license key. This will ensure that the code starts automatically in demo mode. With this mechanism, the customer can explore add-on products for which they do not yet have a license. The qualified prospect can get his first hands-on experience, verify the ease of use of CATIA Version 5, create his first parts. In both cases, a favorable business environment is created for accelerating sales cycles. When using CATIA in demo mode, the following functions are disabled: File Save and Save as File Read (except for prepared CATIA demo documents) Embedding CATIA documents in OLE documents Opening CATIA documents using OLE technology Cutting, copying and pasting CATIA documents with the NT clipboard Record and replay macros.

Glossary A
accelerator key access bar access key See shortcut key. See desktop toolbar. The key that corresponds to an underlines letter on a menu or control (also referred to as a mnemonic access key). Designing software to be usable and accessible to the widest range of users, including users with disabilities. The state when an object is the focus of user input and its operations are available. The ending point for a selected range of objects. It is usually established at the object logically nearest the hot spot of the pointer when a user releases a mouse button. Compare anchor point. Object currently being edited. The window in which a user is currently working or directing input. An active window is typically at the top of the Z order and is distinguished by the color of its title bar. Compare inactive window. Collection of images you generate with the Tools -> Capture command. The starting point for a selected range of objects. An anchor point is usually established at the object logically nearest the hot spot of the pointer when a user presses a mouse button. Compare active end. A graphic design technique that involves adding colored pixels to smooth the jagged edges of a graphic. Window containing the CATIA Version 5 application. To commit a set of changes or pending transactions made in a secondary window, typically without closing that window. A text box in which the input focus automatically moves to the next control as soon as a user types the last character. The movement of text to fill a remaining gap after a user deletes other text. A technique where a display area automatically scrolls without direct interaction with a scroll bar.

accessibility active active end

active object active window

album anchor point

anti-aliasing application window apply

auto-exit

auto-joining automatic scrolling

auto-repeat

An event or interaction that is automatically repeated.Atu-repeat events usually occur when a user holds down a keyboard key or presses and holds a special control (for example, scroll bar buttons).

B
background box edit Area in document windows to which you can apply a background color. A standard Microsoft Windows interface control that provides a discrete area for entering each character. A user can also edit text within the control.

C
cancel caret cascading menu check box To halt an operation or process and return to the state before it was invoked. Compare stop. See insertion point. A menu that is a submenu of a menu item (also referred to as a hierarchical menu, child menu, or submenu). A standard Windows control that displays a setting, either checked (set) or unchecked (not set). Compare option button. See cascading menu. A document window used within an MDI window. See also multiple document interface. (v.) To position the pointer over an object and then press and release a mouse button. See also press. (n.) The act of clicking. The area of storage for objects, data or their references after a user carries out a Cut or Copy command. The data format of a memory object on the clipboard. Applications can use the standard clipboard formats provided by Windows or register their own custom formats. A clipboard format is identified by a unique, unsigned integer value, called the "format name." Depth effect for viewing parts or all of a 3D object between two planes. To remove a window. A character is any symbol used for the organization, control, or representation of data. A group of such symbols used to describe a particular language. Each language (or group of languages) has its character set

child menu child window click

clipboard clipboard format

clipping close character set

code page code set

collection column heading combo box command button composite

constraint container context-sensitive Help

contextual contextual menu

contextual window

contiguous selection

A collection of characters that make up character set. See also locale. A code page (or code set) is a table mapping a given character (from a given character set) to a hexadecimal code position, or code point, for that code page. It contains the encoding values for a character set or several character sets. The encoding values in a code set provide the interface between the system and its input and output devices. A set of objects that shares some common aspect. A standard Windows control that can be used to provide interactive column titles for a list. A standard Windows control that combines a text box and interdependent list box. A standard Windows control that initiates a command or sets an option (also referred to as a push button). A set or group of objects whose aggregation is recognized as an object itself (for example, characters in a paragraph, named range of cells in a spreadsheet, or a grouped set of drawing objects). A relationship between a set of objects, such that making a change to one object affects another object in the set. An object that holds other objects. Information about an object and its current condition. It answers the questions "What is this" and "Why would I want to use it?" Compare reference Help and task-oriented Help. Specific to the conditions in which something exists or occurs. A menu that is displayed at the location of a selected object (also referred to as a shortcut menu). The menu contains the commands that are contextually relevant to the selection, and the most frequently used. You display the contextual menu by right-clicking. A secondary window with no title bar that is displayed next to an object; it provides contextual information about that object. A selection that consists of a set of objects that are logically sequential or adjacent to each other (also referred to as range selection). Compare disjoint selection.

control current cursor

An object that enables user interaction or input, often to initiate an action, display information, or set values. State of an object when selected. A generic term for the visible indication of where a user's interaction will occur. See also input focus, insertion point, and pointer.

D
data-centric design data link default default button A design in which users interact with their data directly without having to first start an appropriate editor or application. A link that propagates a value between two objects or locations. An operation or value that the system or application assumes, unless a user makes an explicit choice. The command button that is invoked when a user presses the ENTER key. A default button typically appears in a secondary window. The visual work area that fills the display. The desktop is also a container and can be used as a convenient location to place objects stored in the file system. A toolbar that docks to the desktop, similar to the taskbar. See also taskbar. A device-independent measure to use for layout. One horizontal unit is equal to one-fourth of the average character width for the current system font. One vertical unit is equal to one-eighth of an average character height for the current system font. A secondary window that gathers additional information from a user. A dialog box usually contains one or more controls, such as buttons, list boxes, combo boxes, and edit boxes, with which the user enters text, chooses options, or directs the action of the command. Compare message box, palette window, and property sheet. See unavailable. A selection that consists of a set of objects that are not logically sequential or physically adjacent to each other. Compare contiguous selection. See also extended selection. To manipulate an interface element, such as a toolbar, such that is aligns itself with the edge of another interface element, typically a window or pane.

desktop

desktop toolbar dialog base unit

dialog box

dimmed disjoint selection

dock

document

document window double-click

duplicate

A common unit of data (typically a file) used in user tasks and exchanged between users. When saved on disk, a document is given a unique filename by which it can be retrieved. A window that provides a primary view of a document (typically its content). (v.) To press an release a mouse button twice in rapid succession. (n.) The act of double-clicking. Performs mirroring or pattern operations on an active object.

E
See text box. A common drop-down menu that includes general purpose commands for editing the current object, such as Cut, Copy, and Paste. ellipsis The "..." suffix added to a menu item or button label to indicate that the command requires additional information to be completed. When a user chooses the command, a dialog box is usually displayed for the user input of this additional information. embedded object See OLE embedded object. enter (v.) To type a character from the keyboard. (n.) A classification of an object based on its characteristics, behavior, and attributes. explicit selection A selection that a user intentionally performs with an input device. Compare implicit selection. extended selection A section technique that is optimized for the selection of a single object or single range using contiguous selection techniques (that is, canceling any existing selection when a new selection is made). However, it also supports modifying an existing selection using disjoint selection techniques. See also disjoint selection. extended selection list box A list box that supports multiple selection, but is optimized for a selection of a single object or single range. See extended selection and list box. Compare multiple selection list box. edit field Edit menu

F
filter File menu font font size Tool for organizing elements of V4 model document into layers. A common drop-down menu that includes commands for file operations, such as Open, Save, and Print. A set of attributes for text characters. The size of a font, typically represented in points.

G
geometry area glyph Area of a document window in which application data are displayed and edited. A generic term used to refer to any graphic or pictorial image that can be used on a button or in a message box. Compare icon. A standard Windows control that groups a set of controls.

group box

H
handle Help menu An interface element added to an object that provides a control point for moving, sizing, reshaping, or other operations pertaining to that object. A common drop-down menu that includes commands that provide access to Help information or other forms of user assistance. See also context-sensitive Help, and task-oriented Help. A selection that includes objects with different properties or type. Compare homogeneous selection. See cascading menu. To continue pressing a keyboard key, or mouse button. A selection that includes objects with the same properties or type. Compare heterogeneous selection. The specific portion of the pointer (or pointing device) that defines the exact location, or object, to which a user is pointing. The interaction area of a particular object or location with which a pointer or pointing device's hot spot must come in contact.

heterogeneous selection hierarchical menu hold down homogeneous selection hot spot

hot zone

I
icon implicit selection inactive inactive window A pictorial representation of an object. Compare glyph. A selection that is the result of inference or the context of some other operation. See also explicit selection. The state of an object which it is not the focus of a user's input. A window in which a user's input is not currently being directed. An inactive window is typically distinguished by the color of its title bar. Compare active window. The ability to edit an OLE embedded object in place, without opening it into its own window. The location where the user is currently directing input. The visual display of a control or other object that indicates when it has the input focus. The location where text or graphics will be inserted (also referred to as the caret). Also used for text box controls to indicate input focus. A technique that allows a user to directly interact with the content of an OLE embedded object without executing an explicit activation command. Compare outside-in activation. Ability to exchange data between CATIA Version 4 and CATIA Version 5. Ability to exchange CATIA Version 5 data between CATIA Version 5 workshops Ability to exchange data between CATIA Version 5 and OLE-compliant applications.

in-place activation input focus input focus appearance insertion point

inside-out activation

interoperability

J
jump A special form of a link that navigates to another location (also referred to as a hyperlink).

L
label landscape link The text (or graphic) that identifies a control (also referred to as a caption). An orientation where the long dimension of a rectangular area (for example, screen or paper) is horizontal. (v.) To form a connection between two objects. (n)) A reference to an object that is linked to another object. See also OLE linked object.

link path list box list view

locale

localization

The descriptive form of referring to the location of a link source (also referred to as a moniker). A standard Windows control that displays a list of choices. See also extended selection list box. A standard Windows list box control that displays a set of objects. The control also supports different views and drag and drop. A part of a user's environment dedicated to international data to define conventions for a specified culture, such as time formatting, numeric formatting, and character classification, conversion, and collation. The process of adapting software for different countries, languages, or cultures.

M
marquee maximize MDI menu menu bar menu button menu item menu title See region selection and bounding outline. To make a window its largest size. See also minimize. See multiple document interface. A list of textual or graphical choices from which a user can choose. See also contextual menu. A horizontal bar at the top of a window, below the title bar, that contains menus. A command button that displays a menu. A choice on a menu. A text or graphic label that designates a particular menu. For drop-down menus, the titles is the entry in the menu bar; for cascading menus the menu title is the name of its parent menu item. A secondary window that is displayed to inform a user about a particular condition. Compare dialog box, palette window, and property sheet. To minimize the size of a window: in some cases, this means to hide the window. See also maximize. An operation creating a 3D object by duplicating an initial object. The duplication is defined by symmetry. See access key.

message box

minimize mirror mnemonic

A restrictive or limiting interaction because of operating in a mode. Modal often describes a secondary window that restricts a user's interaction with other windows. A secondary window can be modal with respect to its primary window or to the entire system. Compare modeless. mode A particular state of interactions, often exclusive in some way to other forms of interactions. model CATIA Version 4 model. model document Document containing a CATIA Version 4 model. modeless Not restrictive or limiting interaction. Modeless often describes a secondary window that does not restrict a user's interaction with other windows. Compare modal. modifier key A keyboard key that, when pressed, (and held), changes the actions of input. moniker See link path. most recently used List of most recently used files (MRU) located in the File menu for easy access. mouse A commonly used input device that has one or more buttons used to interact with a computer. It is also used as a generic term to include other pointing devices that operate similarly (for example, trackballs and headpointers). multiple document A technique for managing a set of windows whereby interface (MDI) documents are opened into windows (sometimes called child windows) that are constrained to a single primary (parent) window. See child window, and parent window. multiple selection list box A list box that is optimized for making multiple, independent selections. Compare extended selection list box and single selection list box.

modal

N
network license A license maintained on a network license server for use upon request by a License Use Runtime (LUM) client. Compare nodelocked license. non-default drag and drop A drag (transfer) operation whose interpretation is determined by a user's choice of command. These commands are included in a pop-up menu displayed at the destination when the object is dropped.

nodelocked license

A type of license locked to a specific node, so that the product can be used only at that node. The nodelocked license is installed on the computer for which it was created. Compare network license.

O
object OLE An entity or component identifiable by a user that can be distinguished by its properties, operations, and relationships. Object Linking and Embedding. The name that describes the technology and interface for implementing support for object interaction. A data object that retains the original editing and operating functionality of the application that created it, while physically residing in another document. An object that represents or provides an access point to another object that resides at another location in the same container or a different, separate container. See also link. A generic term that refers to the actions that can be done to or with an object. A standard Windows control that allows a user to select from a fixed set of mutually exclusive choices (also referred to as a radio button). Compare check box. A technique that requires a user to perform an explicit activation command to interact with the content of an OLE embedded object. Compare inside-out activation.

OLE embedded object OLE linked object

operation option button

outside-in activation

P
package palette window An OLE encapsulation of a file so that it can be embedded in an OLE container. A modeless secondary window that displays a tool bar of other choices, such as colors or patterns. Compare dialog box and message box. See also property sheet. One of the separate areas in a split window. A primary window that provides window management for a set of child windows. See also child window and multiple document interface. The principle that the state of an object is automatically preserved.

pane parent window

persistence

(v.) To position the pointer over a particular object an location. (n.) A unit of measurement for type (1 point equals approximately 1/72 inch). pointer A graphic image displayed on the screen that indicates the location of a pointing devices (also referred to as a cursor). portrait An orientation where the long dimension of a rectangular area (for example, screen or paper) is vertical. press To press and release a keyboard key. See also click. preview Tool allowing you to view a document or album image prior to printing. primary window The window in which the main interaction takes place. See also secondary window and window. progress indicator Any form of feedback that provides the user with information about the state of a process. progress indicator control A standard Windows control that displays the percentage of completion of a particular process as a graphical bar. project A window or task management technique that consists of a container holding a set of objects, such that when the container is opened, the windows of the contained objects are restored to their former positions. property Attribute or characteristic of an object that define its state, appearance, or value. property inspector A dynamic properties viewer that displays the properties of the current selection, usually of a particular type of object. Compare property sheet. property page A group of properties on a tabbed page or a property sheet. See also property sheet. property sheet A secondary window that displays the properties of an object when a user chooses its Properties command. Compare dialog box. See also property page. property sheet control A standard Windows control used to create property sheet interface. push button See command button.

point

R
radio button range selection redo See option button. See contiguous selection. Repeat the last operation.

reference Help

region selection

relationship rich-text box

right-click

A form of online Help information that can contain conceptual and explanatory information. Compare task-oriented Help and context-sensitive Help. A selection technique that involves dragging out a bounding outline (also referred to as a marquee) to define the selected objects. The context or way an object relates to its environment. A standard Windows control that is similar to a standard text box, except that it also supports individual character and paragraph properties. Click using the right mouse button (to display contextual menu).

S
scale scope Operation that resizes the contents of document prior to printing or previewing. The definition of the extent that a selection is logically independent from other selections. For example, selections made in separate windows are typically considered to be independent of each other. To move the view of an object or information to make a different portion visible. A component of a scroll bar that allows the information to be scrolled by defined increments when the user clicks it. The direction of the arrow indicates the direction in which the information scrolls. A standard Windows control that supports scrolling. The component of a scroll bar that provides the visual context for the scroll box. Clicking (or tapping) in the scroll bar shaft scrolls the information by a screenful. See also scroll box. A component of a scroll bar that indicates the relative position (and optionally the proportion) of the visible information relative to the entire amount of information. The user can drag the scroll box to view areas of information not currently visible. See also scroll bar shaft. A window that provides information or supplemental interaction related to objects in a primary window. 3D view of a cross-section generated using a plane. To identify one or more objects upon which an operation can be performed. An object or set of objects hat have been selected.

scroll scroll arrow button

scroll bar scroll bar shaft

scroll box

secondary window section view select selection

selection appearance selection handle

selection set Send To separator settings shell shortcut

shortcut icon shortcut key

shortcut menu single selection list box size grip

slider

specification tree

spin box

split split bar

The visual display of an object when it has been selected. A graphical control point of an object that provides direct manipulation support for operations of that object, such as moving, sizing, or scaling. A group of selected objects that you can store and retrieve. Tool used for sharing document files with other users. An entry in a menu used to group menu items together. Set of setup parameters and user preferences stored in non-editable files. A generic term that refers to the interface that allows the user control over the system. A generic term that refers to an action or technique that invokes a particular command or performs an operation with less interaction than its usual method. A link presented as an icon that provides a user with access to another object. A keyboard key or key combination that invokes a particular command (also referred to as an accelerator key). See contextual menu. A list box that only supports selection of a single item in the list. A special control that appears at the junction of a horizontal and vertical scroll bar or the right end of a status bar and provides an area that a user can drag to size the lower right corner of a window. A standard Windows control that displays and sets a values from a continuous range of possible values, such as brightness or volume. Area of the document window reserved for viewing the design specifications of a part, presented in the form of a tree structure. A control composed of a text box and increment and decrement buttons that allow a user to adjust a values from a limited range of possible values. An operation allowing splitting 3D objects using a plane. A division between panes that appears where a window has been split; the split bar visually separates window panes.

split box

standard view status bar

status bar control stop submenu

A special control added to a window, typically adjacent to the scroll bar, that allows a user to split a window or adjust a window split. Typical view available in 3D workshops: top, bottom, front, back, left, right, isometric. An area that allows the display of state information of the information being viewed in the window, typically places at the bottom of a window. A standard Windows control that provides the functionality of a status bar. To halt a process or actions, typically without restoring the state before the process began. Compare cancel. See cascading menu.

T
tab control targeting taskbar A standard Windows control looks similar to a notebook or file divider and provides navigation between different pages or sections of information. To determine where pen input is directed. A special toolbar that docks on an edge of the desktop supplied by the system. The taskbar includes the Start button, buttons for each open primary window, and a status bar. Information about the steps involved in carrying out a particular task. Compare context-sensitive Help and reference Help. An object that automates the creation of new objects of a particular type. A standard Windows control in which a user can enter an edit text (also referred to as the edit field). A process that is part of a larger process or program. The horizontal area at the top of a window that identifies the window. The title bar also acts as a handle for dragging the window. A keyboard key that alternates between turning a particular operation, function, or mode on or off. A frame or special area that contains a set of other controls. A command button used in a toolbar (or status bar). A standard Windows control designed with the same characteristics as the toolbar.

task-oriented Help

template text box thread title bar

toggle key toolbar toolbar button toolbar control

tooltip

transfer appearance tree control

A standard Windows control that provides a small pop-up window that provides descriptive text such as a label, for a control or graphic object. The visual feedback displayed during a transfer operation. A standard Windows control that allows a set of hierarchically related objects to be displayed as an expandable outline.

U
unavailable undo user-defined view The state of a control or data whose normal functionality is not presently available to a user (also referred to as dimmed). To reverse one operation performed on an object. 3D view an end user can generate by customizing view parameters. The view can be named. Also referred to as named view.

V
view toolbar viewing tools VRML Toolbar containing viewing tools. Tools for viewing contents of current document in different ways. Virtual Reality Markup Language. A vector-based language for modeling three-dimensional environments. It sends ASCII text files over the Internet, which are translated by the VRML viewing engine at the other end. VRML complements HTML. This format is useful for viewing CATIA Version 5 data using a Web browser.

W
well control window A control that is used to display color or pattern choices, typically used like an option button. A standard Windows object that displays information. A window is a separately controllable area of the screen that typically has a rectangular border. See also primary window and secondary window. A form of user assistance that automates a task through a dialog with the user. The convention where, as a user enters text, existing text is automatically moved from the end of a line to the next line.

wizard wordwrap

workbench

workspace

writing tool

Set of tools for completing specific tasks. Each type of document can be edited with a document-specific set of tools. A window or task management technique that consists of a container holding a set of objects, where the windows of the contained objects are constrained to a parent window. Similar to the multiple document interface, except that the window displayed within the parent window are of objects that are also contained in the workspace. A standard Windows pen interface control that supports text editing.

Z
Z order The layered relationship of a set of objects, such as windows, on the display screen.

Index
Symbols & Numerics A B G H O P U V C I Q W D L R Z E M S F N T

Symbols
/regserver /unregserver

Numerics
3D compass choosing orientation

A
About CATIA V5 command accessing most recently used (MRU) documents accessing web site actions redoing repeating Album icon Album... command , , , , , , ,

B
back view Best orientation bottom view bounding outline

C
capture toolbar , , Capture... command , capturing images selected areas of images Cascade command CATCommandPath CATDictionaryPath CATDocView , CATFontPath CATGalaxyPath CATGraphicPath CATIA V5 Help command CATICPath CATMsgCatalogPath , CATReferenceSettingPath CATReffilesPath CATSettings folder/directory catstart command CATStartupPath CATTemp , , CATUserSettingPath , centering character set characteristic element clipboard , , clipping plane Close command closing documents CNEXT command cnext command code point code set

colors customizing setting command Toolbars commands About CATIA V5 Album... , , , , , , Capture... , Cascade CATIA V5 Help catstart Close CNEXT cnext Contents and Index Customize , , Cut Delete Depth Effect... Examine Fit All In Fly Full Screen Geometry Ground Hidden Line Removal (HLR) Image Capture... , Lighting... Look At Magnifier... net use New Window New... Next View next view

Normal View Object , Open... Options... Other Selection... Overview Pan Parallel Paste , Perspective Previous View previous view Print , , , Properties , , Quick Hidden Line Removal (HRD) RCMD Redo Rotate Save Save All Save As... , Search Select , , , , , setcatenv , , , Setup.exe Shading (SHD) Shading with Edges (SHD+E) Shading with Texture Shading with Texture and Edges Specifications Swap Hide/Show Tile Horizontally Tile Vertically Turn Head Undo User Galaxy

Walk What's This? Wireframe (NHR) Zoom Area Zoom In Zoom Out Contents, Index and Search command contextual help Copy command Copy icon copying CATIA V5 images to OLE-compliant applications copying and pasting objects copying images to clipboard creating CATIA V5 data in OLE-compliant applications formulas new documents user-defined views Ctrl-clicking Customize command , , customizing colors general settings performance settings , print settings settings toolbars toolbars by drag and drop customizing toolbars creating deleting renaming restoring original contents toggling to hide or show Cut command

cutting and pasting objects

D
Delete command deleting images in album objects demo mode Depth Effect... command depth effects foggy Near Limit deselecting displaying document windows full screen graphic properties hidden objects parallel view perspective view document windows , documents closing creating new dxf type , igs type , opening existing previewing before printing saving saving all saving in other formats saving under another name setting automatic save frequency stl type stp type txt type

VRML type dragging and dropping icons onto objects , objects onto objects , dxf type documents ,

E
embedding CATIA V5 data in OLE-compliant applications objects environment global user environment files , Erase icon Examine command

F
File Selection Box Fit All In command icon Fit in Page fitting all in Fly command formulas front view Full Screen command full screen display

G
geometry area , getting help , global environment graphic properties displaying editing Ground command

H
hardware prerequisites help accessing online help library accessing web site contextual on toolbar icons online glossary searching online status bar help messages switching off tooltips tooltips hidden line removal (HLR) Hidden Line Removal (HLR) command Hidden Line Removal icon hiding objects HLR horizontal ground command HRD HSL values

I
igs type documents , Image Capture... command , images capturing capturing selected areas of copying to clipboard deleting from album previewing in album printing renaming in album saving to other formats installing on UNIX , , on Windows isometric view

L
Landscape LD_LIBRARY_PATH left view LIBPATH lighting effects neon light one light source switching off light sources two light sources Lighting... command linking objects Look At command looking at through viewport

M
macros background information creating from scratch deleting editing recording running Magnifier... command menu bar most recently used (MRU) documents multiple selection by Ctrl-clicking by Shift-clicking

N
navigating changing views viewing objects against the ground Near Limit net use command New Window command New... command Next View command next view command NHR No Show space Normal View command Normal View icon

O
Object command , Object Linking and Embedding objects copying and pasting cutting and pasting deleting pasting , OLE container applications document server OLE-compliant applications copying CATIA Version 5 images to creating CATIA Version 5 data in embedding CATIA Version 5 data in online glossary help Open... command opening document in new window existing documents most recently used (MRU) documents V4 models , operations repeating reversing undoing Options... command Other Selection... command Overview command

P
page orientation page setup Pan command Pan icon panning using mouse paper format paper margins Parallel command parallel view Paste command , pasting objects , PATH permanent settings Perspective command perspective view Pixel icon Portrait power input mode prerequisites hardware software preselect highlighting preselection navigator Preview icon , previewing before printing previewing images in album Previous View command previous view command Print command , , , print settings banner information

best orientation center color customizing Fit in Page gamma factor image position and size landscape line specifications options origin page orientation page setup paper format paper margins portrait preview area print to file , , quality factor reset printer defaults scale printer setting up on UNIX printer configuration file printing images quickly to a file , , privileged plane profile Properties command , ,

Q
quick hidden line removal (HRD) Quick Hidden Line Removal (HRD) command Quick Print icon , , , quick printing

R
RCMD command Redo command redoing actions renaming images in album rendering hidden line removal (HLR) quick hidden line removal (HRD) shading (SHD) shading with edges (SHD+E) wireframe (NHR) repeating the last action reversing last action RGB values right view roaming profile roll file Rotate command Rotate icon rotating using mouse runtime environment variables CATCommandPath CATDictionaryPath CATDocView , CATFontPath CATGalaxyPath CATGraphicPath CATICPath CATMsgCatalogPath , CATReferenceSettingPath CATReffilesPath CATStartupPath CATTemp

CATUserSettingPath LD_LIBRARY_PATH LIBPATH PATH SHLIB_PATH

S
Save All command Save As... command , Save As... icon Save command saving all documents documents documents automatically documents in other formats documents under another name images to other formats scaling print images Search command searching online help Select command selecting by Ctrl-clicking by Shift-clicking characteristic elements using selection sets using the bounding outline using the pointer selection sets setcatenv command , , , setting automatic save frequency colors document layout preferences lighting effects setting up printer on UNIX settings permanent setting files

temporary Setup.exe command Setup.iss file shading (SHD) Shading (SHD) command Shading with Edges (SHD+E) Shading with Edges (SHD+E) command Shading with Texture and Edges command Shading with Texture command SHD SHD+E Shift-clicking SHLIB_PATH Shown option silent installation silent installation file software prerequisites specification tree , Specifications Visible command standard toolbar , standard views back bottom front isometric left right top starting by dragging and dropping icons in language other than English using commands (UNIX) using commands (Windows) using document icons status bar status bar help messages

stl type documents stp type documents Swap Hide/Show command switching off tooltips

T
TargetId temporary settings Tile Horizontally command Tile Vertically command title bar toolbars creating deleting hiding renaming restoring original contents toggling to hide or show viewing Toolbars command tooltips top view Turn Head command turning head txt type documents

U
Undo command undoing actions user environment User Galaxy command

V
Vector icon view toolbar , viewing along normal to plane fitting all in hidden objects hiding objects looking at objects against the ground panning rotating turning head using mouse centering panning rotating zooming zooming in zooming out VRML type documents

W
Walk command What's This? command wireframe (NHR) Wireframe (NHR) command Wireframe icon workbench workbench toolbar ,

Z
Zoom Area command Zoom In command Zoom In icon Zoom Out icon zooming an area zooming in zooming out zooming using mouse